-
1 невелик барин
невелик (не велик, не большой) барин или невелика (не велика, не большая) барыняразг., пренебр., ирон.not such a great lord (or lady) as that; no high and mighty person; cf. not a big card (pot, wig, gun, cheese, noise, shot, bug, dog, fish, number); too grand to dirty his (or her) hands iron.Анна Петровна.
Что с ним церемониться, что ли? Не велик барин! Прогоню, да и всё тут. (А. Островский, Бедная невеста) — Anna Petrovna: Is there any reason to stand on ceremony with him? He's no high and mighty person! I'll drive him out, and that's all.- Телята-то непоены остались! Мне что, самому их поить, что ли? - А и напоишь, невелик барин! (В. Белов, Привычное дело) — 'And the calves not fed or watered! Expect me to do it myself, or what?' 'Wouldn't hurt if ye did, too grand to dirty your hands!'
- Она [корова] к ласке привычная. Полина, покойница, с ней, бывало, всё разговаривала. Она у нас с приговорами доиться привыкла... - С приговорами? - засмеялась хозяйка. - Ну и ну!... Ничего, обойдётся. Не велика барыня. (И. Ракша, Весь белый свет) — 'You see, she's been used to a bit of affection. Polina, my late wife, always used to talk to her. She's used to hearing a few words of encouragement as she's being milked.' 'Words of encoragement?' the woman laughed. 'Well, I never!... Never mind, she'll soon learn to do without them. She's not such a great lady as that.'
-
2 не велика птица
прост., пренебр.not such a great lord (or lady); not such a big bug (dog, wig, number, noise, shot)Русско-английский фразеологический словарь > не велика птица
-
3 невелик гусь
прост., пренебр.not such a great lord (or lady) as that; not a big bug (card, noise); cf. aren't we grand!- Ну что ж, пожелаю ни пуха ни пера. Обо мне прошу забыть. - Он вышел из зала, помахивая чемоданчиком. - Невелик гусь, - проворчал Василий Адамович. - И так забудем, просить нечего. Подумаешь! (Ю. Трифонов, Студенты) — 'All right then - good luck to you! Forget my existence!' He went out of the gym brandishing his sports case. 'Aren't we grand!' said Vasili Adamovich. 'We'd have forgotten you, anyhow. Who does he think he is?'
-
4 महा _mahā
1महा A cow.2महा The substitute of महत् at the beginning of Karmadhāraya and Bahuvrīhi compounds, and also at the beginning of some other irregular words. (Note: The number of compounds of which महा is the first mem- ber is very large, and may be multiplied ad infinitum. The more important of them, or such as have peculiar significations, are given below.)-Comp. -अक्षः an epithet of Śiva. ˚पटलिक a chief keeper of archives.-अङ्ग a. huge, bulky.-(ङ्गः) 1 a camel.-2 a kind of rat.-3 N. of Śiva.-अञ्जनः N. of a mountain.-अत्ययः a great danger or calamity.-अध्वनिक a. 'having gone a long way', dead.-अध्वरः a great sacrifice.-अनसम् 1 a heavy carriage.-2 cooking utensils. (-सी) a kitchen-maid. (-सः, -सम्) a kitchen; सूपानस्य करिष्यामि कुशलो$स्मि महानसे Mb.4.2.2.-अनिलः a whirl- wind; महानिलेनेव निदाघजं रजः Ki.14.59.-अनुभाव a.1 of great prowess, dignified, noble, glorious, magnanimous, exalted, illustrious; ग्रहीतुमार्यान् परिचर्यया मुहुर्महानु- भावा हि नितान्तमर्थिनः Śi.1.17; Ś.3.-2 virtuous, righteous, just.(-वः) 1 a worthy or respectable person.-2 (pl.) people of a religious sect in Mahārāṣtra founded by Chakradhara in the 13th century.-अन्तकः 1 death.-2 an epithet of Śiva.-अन्धकारः 1 thick darkness.-2 gross (spiritual) ignorance.-अन्ध्राः (pl.) N. of a people and their country.-अन्वय, -अभिजन a. nobly-born, of noble birth. (-यः, -नः) noble birth, high descent.-अभिषवः the great extraction of Soma.-अमात्यः the chief or prime minister (of a king).-अम्बुकः an epithet of Śiva.-अम्बुजम् a billion.-अम्ल a. very sour. (-म्लम्) the fruit of the tamarind tree. अरण्यम् a great (dreary) forest, large forest.-अर्घ a. very costly, costing a high price; महार्घस्तीर्थानामिव हि महतां को$प्यतिशयः U.6.11. (-र्घः) a kind of quail.-अर्घ्य a.1 valuable, precious.-2 invaluable; ines- timable; see महार्ह below.-अर्चिस् a. flaming high.-अर्णवः 1 the great ocean.-2 N. of Śiva.-अर्थ a.1 rich.-2 great, noble, dignified.-3 important, weighty.-4 significant.-अर्बुदम् one thousand millions.-अर्ह a.1 very valuable, very costly; महार्हशय्यापरिवर्तनच्युतैः स्वकेशपुष्पैरपि या स्म दूयते Ku.5.12.-2 invaluable, inestimable; महार्हशयनोपेत किं शेषे निहतो भुवि Rām.6.19. 2. (-र्हम्) white sandal-wood.-अवरोहः the fig-tree.-अशनिध्वजः a great banner in the form of the thunderbolt; जहार चान्येन मयूरपत्रिणा शरेण शक्रस्य महाशनि- ध्वजम् R.3.56.- अशन a. voracious, gluttonous; Mb. 4.-अश्मन् m. a precious stone, ruby.-अष्टमी the eighth day in the bright half of Āśvina sacred to Durgā; आश्विने शुक्लपक्षस्य भवेद् या तिथिरष्टमी । महाष्टमीति सा प्रोक्ता......-असिः a large sword.-असुरी N. of Durgā.-अह्नः the afternoon.-आकार a. extensive, large, great.-आचार्यः 1 a great teacher.-2 an epithet of Śiva.-आढ्य a. wealthy, very rich. (-ढ्यः) the Kadamba tree.-आत्मन् a.1 high-souled, high-minded, magnanimous, noble; अयं दुरात्मा अथवा महात्मा कौटिल्यः Mu.7; द्विषन्ति मन्दाश्चरितं महात्मनाम् Ku.5.75; U.1.49; प्रकृतिसिद्धमिदं हि महात्मनाम् Bh.1.63.-2 illustrious, distinguished, exalted, eminent; किमाचाराः किमाहाराः क्व च वासो महात्मनाम् Mb.3. 1.4.-3 mighty (महाबल); अथायमस्यां कृतवान् महात्मा लङ्केश्वरः कष्टमनार्यकर्म Rām.5.9.74. (-m.)1 the Supreme Spirit; युगपत्तु प्रलीयन्ते यदा तस्मिन् महात्मनि Ms.1.54.-2 the great principle, i. e. intellect of the Sāṅkhyas. (महात्मवत् means the same as महात्मन्).-आनकः a kind of large drum.-आनन्दः, -नन्दः 1 great joy or bliss.-2 espe- cially, the great bliss of final beatitude.(-न्दा) 1 spirituous liquor.-2 a festival on the ninth day in the bright half of Māgha.-आपगा a great river.-आयुधः an epithet of Śiva.-आरम्भ a. undertaking great works, enterprizing. (-म्भः) any great enterprize.-आलयः 1 a temple in general.-2 a sanctuary, an asylum.-3 a great dwelling.-4 a place of pilgrimage.-5 the world of Brahman.-6 the Supreme Spirit.-7 a tree &c. sacred to a deity.-8 N. of a particular dark fortnight.-9 पितृश्राद्ध in the month of Bhādra- pada. (-या) N. of a particular deity.- आशय a. high- souled, nobleminded, magnanimous, noble; दैवात् प्रबुद्धः शुश्राव वराहो हि महाशयः Ks; राजा हिरण्यगर्भो महाशयः H.4; see महात्मन्.(-यः) 1 a noble-minded or magnanimous person; महाशयचक्रवर्ती Bv.1.7.-2 the ocean.-आस्पद a.1 occupying a great position.-2 mighty, powerful.-आहवः a great or tumultuous fight.-इच्छ a.1 magnanimous, noble-minded, high-souled, noble; मही महेच्छः परिकीर्य सूनौ R.18.33.-2 having lofty aims or aspirations, ambitious; विद्यावतां महेच्छानां...... नाश्रयः पार्थिवं विना Pt.1.37.-इन्द्रः 1 'the great Indra', N. of Indra; इयं महेन्द्रप्रभृतीनधिश्रियः Ku.5.53; R.13.2; Ms.7.7.-2 a chief or leader in general.-3 N. of a mountain range; पतिर्महेन्द्रस्य महोदधेश्च R.6.54;4.39,43. ˚चापः rain-bow. ˚नगरी N. of Amarāvatī, the capital of Indra. ˚मन्त्रिन् m. an epithet of Bṛihaspati. ˚वाहः the elephant Airāvata; महेन्द्रवाहप्रतिमो महात्मा Mb.9.17.52.-इभ्य a. very rich.-इषुः a great archer; अधिरोहति गाण्डीवं महेषौ Ki.13.16.-इष्वासः a great archer, a great warrior; अत्र शूरा महेष्वासा भामार्जुनसमा युधि Bg.1.4.-ईशः, -ईशानः N. of Śiva; महेशस्त्वां धत्ते शिरसि रसराजस्य जयिनीम् Udb. ˚बन्धुः the Bilva tree.-ईशानी N. of Pārvatī.-ईश्वरः 1 a great lord, sovereign; महेश्वरस्त्र्यम्बक एव नापरः R.; गोप्तारं न निधीनां कथयन्ति महेश्वरं विबुधाः Pt.2.74.-2 N. of Śiva.-3 of Viṣṇu.-4 a god (opp. प्रकृति).-5 the Supreme Being (परमात्मा); मायां तु प्रकृतिं विद्यान्मायिनं तु महेश्वरम् Śvet. Up.4.1. ˚सखः N. of Kubera; यया कैलासभवने महेश्वरसखं बली Mb.9.11.55.(-री) 1 N. of Durgā.-2 a kind of bell-metal.-उक्षः (for उक्षन्) a large bull; a full grown or strong bull; महोक्षतां वत्सतरः स्पृशन्निव R.3.32;4.22;6.72; Śi.5.63.-उत्पलम् a large blue lotus. (-लः) the Sārasa bird.-उत्सवः 1 a great festival or occasion of joy; नयनविषयं जन्मन्येकः स एव महोत्सवः Māl.1.36.-2 the god of love.-उत्साह a. possessed of great energy, energetic, persevering; अहं च कर्णं जानामि...... सत्यसंधं महोत्साहं...... Mb.3.91.2.(-हः) 1 perseverance.-2 great pride; ये जात्यादिमहो- त्साहान्नरेन्द्रान्नोपयान्ति च । तेषामामरणं भिक्षा प्रायश्चितं विनिर्मितम् ॥ Pt.1.38.-उदधिः 1 the great ocean; महोदधेः पूर इवेन्दु- दर्शनात् R.3.17.-2 an epithet of Indra. ˚जः a conch- shell, shell.- उदय a. very prosperous or lucky, very glorious or splendid, of great prosperity.(-यः) 1 (a) great elevation or rise, greatness, prosperity; नन्दस्त्वतीन्द्रियं दृष्ट्वा लोकपालमहोदयम् Bhāg.1.28.1; अपवर्ग- महोदयार्थयोर्भुवमंशाविव धर्मयोर्गतौ R.8.16. (b) great fortune or good luck. (c) greatness, pre-eminence.-2 final beatitude.-3 a lord, master.-4 N. of the district called Kānyakubja or Kanouja; see App.-5 N. of the capital of Kanouja.-6 sour milk mixed with honey.-7 = महात्मन् q. v.; संसक्तौ किमसुलभं महोदयानाम Ki.7.27. ˚पर्वन् a time of union of the middle of श्रवण नक्षत्र and the end of व्यतिपात (generally in the month of माघ or पौष at the beginning of अमावास्या).- उदर a. big-bellied, corpulent.-(रम्) 1 a big belly.-2 dropsy.-उदार a.1 very generous or magnanimous.-2 mighty, powerful.-उद्यम a. = महोत्साह q. v; महोद्यमाः कर्म समा- रभन्ते.-उद्योग a. very industrious or diligent, hard- working.-उद्रेकः a particular measure (= 4 प्रस्थs).-उन्नत a. exceedingly lofty. (-तः) the palmyra tree.-उन्नतिः f. great rise or elevation (fig. also), high rank.-उपकारः a great obligation.-उपाध्यायः a great preceptor, a learned teacher.-उरगः a great serpent; वपुर्महोरगस्येव करालफणमण्डलम् R.12.98.-उरस्क a. broad-chested. (-स्कः) an epithet of Śiva.-उर्मिन् m. the ocean; ततः सागरमासाद्य कुक्षौ तस्य महोर्मिणः Mb.3.2.17.-उल्का 1 a great meteor.-2 a great fire-brand.-ऋत्विज् m. 'great priest', N. of the four chief sacri- ficial priests.-ऋद्धि a. very prosperous, opulent. (-f.) great prosperity or affluence.-ऋषभः a great bull.-ऋषिः 1 a great sage or saint; यस्मादृषिः परत्वेन महांस्त- स्मान्महर्षयः; (the term is applied in Ms.1.34 to the ten Prajāpatis or patriarchs of mankind, but it is also used in the general sense of 'a great sage').-2 N. of Sacute;iva.-3 of Buddha.-ओघ a. having a strong current.-घः a very large number; शतं खर्व- सहस्राणां समुद्रमभिधीयते । शतं समुद्रसाहस्रं महौघमिति विश्रुतम् ॥ Rām.6.28.37.-ओष्ठ (महोष्ठ) a. having large lips. (-ष्ठः) an epithet of Śiva.-ओजस् a. very mighty or powerful, possessed of great splendour or glory; महौजसा मानधना धनार्चिताः Ki.1.19. (-m.) a great hero or warrior, a champion. (-n.) great vigour.-ओजसम् the discus of Viṣṇu (सुदर्शन). (-सी) N. of plant (Mar. कांगणी).-ओदनी Asparagus Racemosus (Mar. शतावरी).-ओषधिः f.1 a very efficacious medicinal plant, a sovereign drug.-2 the Dūrvā grass.-3 N. of various plants ब्राह्मी, श्वेतकण्टकारी, कटुका, अतिविष &c. ˚गणः a collection of great or medicinal herbs:-- पृश्निपर्णी श्यामलता भृङ्गराजः शतावरी । गुड्चा सहदेवी च महौषधिगणः स्मृतः ॥ cf. also सहदेवी तथा व्याघ्री बला चातिबला त्वचा । शङ्खपुष्पी तथा सिंही अष्टमी च सुवर्चला ॥ महौषध्यष्टकं प्रोक्तं....-औषधम् 1 a sovereign remedy, panacea.-2 ginger.-3 garlic.-4 a kind of poison (वत्सनाभ).-कच्छः 1 the sea.-2 N. of Varuṇa.-3 a mountain.-कन्दः garlic.-कपर्दः a kind of shell.-कपित्थः 1 the Bilva tree.-2 red garlic.-कम्बु a. stark naked. (-म्बुः) an epithet of Śiva.-कर a.1 large-handed.-2 having a large revenue.-कर्णः an epithet of Śiva.-कर्मन् a. doing great works. (-m.) an epithet of Śiva.-कला the night of the new moon.-कल्पः a great cycle of time (1 years of Brahman); Bhāg.7.15.69.-कविः 1 a great poet, a classical poet, such as कालिदास, भवभूति, बाण, भारवि &c.-2 an epithet of Śukra.-कषायः N. of a plant (Mar. कायफळ).-कान्तः an epithet of Śiva. (-ता) the earth.-काय a. big-bodied, big, gigantic, bulky.(-यः) 1 an elephant.-2 an epithet of Śiva.-3 of Viṣṇu.-4 of a being attending on Śiva (= नन्दि).-कारुणिक a. exceedingly compassionate.-कार्तिकी the night of full-moon in the month of Kārtika.-कालः 1 a form of Śiva in his character as the destroyer of the world; महाकालं यजेद्देव्या दक्षिणे धूम्रवर्णकम् Kālītantram.-2 N. of a cele- brated shrine or temple of Śiva (Mahākāla) (one of the 12 celebrated Jyotirliṅgas) established at Ujjayinī (immortalized by Kālidāsa in his Meghadūta, which gives a very beautiful description of the god, his temple, worship &c., together with a graphic picture of the city; cf. Me.3-38; also R.6.34); महाकालनिवासिनं कालीविलासिनमनश्वरं महेश्वरं समाराध्य Dk.1.1.-3 an epithet of Viṣṇu.-4 N. of a kind of gourd.-5 N. of Śiva's servant (नन्दि). ˚पुरम् the city of Ujjayinī. ˚फलम् a red fruit with black seeds; पक्वं महाकालफलं किलासीत् N.22.29.-काली an epithet of Durgā in her terrific form.-काव्यम् a great or classical poem; (for a full description of its nature, contents &c., according to Rhetoricians see S. D.559). (The number of Mahākāvyas is usually said to be five:-- रघुवंश, कुमारसंभव, किरातार्जुनीय, शिशुपालवध and नैषधचरित or six, if मेघदूत-- a very small poem or खण़्डकाव्य-- be added to the list. But this enumeration is apparently only traditional, as there are several other poems, such as the भट्टिकाव्य, विक्रमाङ्कदेवचरित, हरविजय &c. which have an equal claim to be considered as Mahākāvyas).-कीर्तनम् a house.-कुमारः the eldest son of a reigning prince, heir-apparent.-कुल, -कुलीन a. of noble birth or descent, sprung from a noble family, nobly born. (-लम्) a noble birth or family, high descent.-कुहः a species of parasitical worm.-कृच्छ्रम् a great penance.-केतुः N. of Śiva.-केशः, -कोशः 1 an epithet of Śiva.-2 a large sheath.-क्रतुः a great sacrifice; e. g. a horse-sacrifice; तदङ्गमग्ऱ्यं मघवन् महाक्रतोरमुं तुरङ्गं प्रतिमोक्तुमर्हसि R.3.46.-क्रमः an epithet of Viṣṇu.-क्रोधः an epithet of Śiva.-क्षत्रपः a great satrap.-क्षीरः sugar-cane.-क्षीरा f. a She-buffalo; Nighaṇṭaratnākara.-खर्वः, -र्वम् a high number (ten billions ?).-गजः a great elephant; see दिक्करिन्.-गणपतिः a form of the god Gaṇeśa.-गदः fever.-गन्ध a. exceedingly fragrant. (-न्धः) a kind of cane. (-न्धम्) a kind of sandal- wood. (-न्धा) N. of Chāmuṇḍā.-गर्तः, -गर्भः -गीतः N. of Śiva.-गर्दभगन्धिका N. of a plant, भारङ्गी.-गल a. longnecked.-गवः Bos gavaeus.-गुण a. very efficacious, sovereign (as a medicine); त्वया ममैष संबन्धः कपिमुख्य महागुणः Rām.5.1.12. (-णः) a chief quality, cardinal virtue.-गुरुः a highly respectable or venerable person; (these are three, the father, mother and preceptor; पिता माता तथाचार्यो महागुरुरिति स्मृतः).-गुल्मा the Soma plant.-गृष्टिः f. a cow with a large hump.-ग्रहः 1 an epithet of Rāhu.-2 the sun; महाग्रहग्राहविनष्टपङ्कः Rām.5.5.6.-ग्रामः N. of the ancient capital of Ceylon, the modern Māgama.-ग्रीवः 1 a camel.-2 an epithet of Śiva.-ग्रीविन् m. a camel.-घूर्णा spirituous liquor.-घृतम् ghee kept for a long time (for medicinal purposes).-घोष a. noisy, loud-sounding. (-षम्) a market, fair. (-षः) a loud noise, clamour.-चक्रम् the mystic circle in the शाक्त ceremonial.-चक्रवर्तिन् m. a universal monarch.-चण्डा N. of Chāmuṇḍā.-चपला a kind of metre.-चमूः f. a large army.-छायः the fig-tree.-जङ्घः a camel.-जटः an epithet of Śiva.-जटा 1 a great braid of hair.-2 the matted hair of Śiva.-जत्रु a. having a great collar-bone. (-त्रुः) an epithet of Śiva.-जनः 1 a multitude of men, a great many beings, the general populace or public; महाजनो येन गतः स पन्थाः Mb.3.313. 117; आगम्य तु ततो राजा विसृज्य च महाजनम् 6.98.25.-2 the populace, mob; विलोक्य वृद्धोक्षमधिष्ठितं त्वया महाजनः स्मेरमुखो भविष्यति Ku.5.7.-3 a great man, a distinguished or eminent man; महाजनस्य संसर्गः कस्य नोन्नतिकारकः । पद्मपत्रस्थितं तोयं धत्ते मुक्ताफलश्रियम् Pt.3.6.-4 the chief of a caste or trade.-5 a merchant, tradesman.-जवः an antelope.-जातीय a.1 rather large.-2 of an excellent kind.-जालिः, -ली N. of a plant (Mar. सोनामुखी)-जिह्वः an epithet of Śiva.-ज्ञानिन् m.1 a very learned man.-2 a great sage.-3 N. of Śiva.-ज्यैष्ठी the day of fullmoon in the month of Jyeṣṭha; ताभिर्दृश्यत एष यान् पथि महाज्यैष्ठीमहे मन्महे N.15.89; पूर्णिमा रविवारेण महाज्यैष्ठी प्रकीर्तिता Agni P.121.63.-ज्योतिस् m. an epithet of Śiva.-ज्वरः great affliction.-ज्वाल a. very brilliant or shining.(-लः) 1 N. of Śiva.-2 a sacrificial fire.-डीनम् a kind of flight; 'यानं महाडीनमाहुः पवित्रामूर्जितां गतिम्' Mb.8.41.27 (com.).-तपस् m.1 a great ascetic.-2 an epithet of Viṣṇu.-तलम् N. of one of the seven lower regions; see पाताल.-तारा N. of a Buddhist goddess.-तिक्तः the Nimba tree.-तिथिः the 6th day of a lunation.-तीक्ष्ण a. exceedingly sharp or pungent. (-क्ष्णा) the marking- nut plant.-तेजस् a.1 possessed of great lustre or splendour.-2 very vigorous or powerful, heroic. (-m.)1 a hero, warrior.-2 fire.-3 an epithet of Kārtikeya. (-n.) quick-silver.-त्याग, -त्यागिन् a. very generous. (-m.) N. of Śiva.-दंष्ट्रः a species of big tiger.-दन्तः 1 an elephant with large tusks.-2 an epithet of Śiva.-दण्डः 1 a long arm.-2 a severe punishment.-दम्भः an epithet of Śiva.-दशा the influence exercised (over a man's destiny) by a predominant planet.-दानम् the gift of gold equal to one's own weight; अथातः संप्रवक्ष्यामि महादानस्य लक्षणम्.-दारु n. the devadāru tree.-दुर्गम् a great calamity; Pt.-दूषकः a kind of grain.-देवः N. of Śiva.(-वी) 1 N. of Pārvatī.-2 the chief queen.-द्रुमः the sacred fig-tree.-द्वारम् a large gate, the chief or outer gate of a temple.-धन a.1 rich.-2 expensive, costly; हेमदण्डैर्महाधनैः Rām.7. 77.13.(-नम्) 1 gold.-2 incense.-3 a costly or rich dress.-4 agriculture, husbandry.-5 anything costly or precious.-6 great booty.-7 a great battle (Ved.).-धनुस् m. an epithet of Śiva.-धातुः 1 gold.-2 an epithet of Śiva.-3 lymph.-4 N. of Meru.-धी a. having a great understanding.-धुर्यः a full-grown draught ox.-ध्वजः a camel.-ध्वनिक a. dead.-नग्नः an athlete; Buddh.-नटः an epithet of Śiva; महानटः किं नु...... तनोति...... साम्प्रतमङ्गहारम् N.22.7; महानटबाहुनेव बद्धभुजाङ्केन Vās.-नदः a great river.-नदी 1 a great river, such as Gaṅgā, Kṛiṣṇā; मन्दरः पर्वतश्चाक्षो जङ्घा तस्य महानदी Mb.8.34.2; संभूयाम्भोधिमभ्येति महानद्या नगापगा Śi.2.1.-2 N. of a river falling into the bay of Bengal.-नन्दा 1 spirituous liquor.-2 N. of a river.-3 ninth day of the bright half of the month of Māgha; माघमासस्य या शुक्ला नवमी लोकपूजिचा । महानन्देति सा प्रोक्ता....-नरकः N. of one of the 21 hells.-नलः a kind of reed.-नवमी the ninth day in the bright half of Āśvina, sacred to the worship of Durgā ततो$नु नवमी यस्मात् सा महानवमी स्मृता.-नाटकम् 'the great drama', N. of a drama, also called Hanumannāṭaka, (being popularly ascribed to Hanumat); thus defined by S. D.:-- एतदेव यदा सर्वैः पताकास्थानकैर्युतम् । अङ्कैश्च दशभिर्धीरा महानाटकमूचिरे ॥-नाडी sinew, tendon.-नादः 1 a loud sound, uproar.-2 a great drum.-3 a thunder-cloud.-4 a shell.-5 an elephant.-6 a lion.-7 the ear.-8 a camel.-9 an epithet of Śiva. (-दम्) a musical instrument.-नाम्नी 1 N. of a परिशिष्ट of Sāmaveda.-2 (pl.) N. of 9 verses of Sāmaveda beginning with विदा मघवन् विदा.-नायकः 1 a great gem in the centre of a string of pearls.-2 a great head or chief.-नासः an epithet of Śiva.-निद्र a. fast asleep. (-द्रा) 'the great sleep', death.-निम्नम् intestines, abdomen.-नियमः an epithet of Viṣṇu.-निर्वाणम् total extinction of individuality (according to the Buddhists).-निशा 1 the dead of night, the second and third watches of the night; महानिशा तु विज्ञेया मध्यमं प्रहरद्वयम्-2 an epithet of Durgā.-नीचः a washerman.-नील a. dark-blue. (-लः) a kind of sapphire or emerald; इन्द्रनीलमहानीलमणिप्रवरवेदिकम् Rām.5.9.16; महा- महानीलशिलारुचः Śi.1.16;4.44; R.18.42; Kau. A.2.11. 29. ˚उपलः a sapphire.-नृत्यः, -नेत्रः an epithet of Śiva.-नेमिः a crow.-न्यायः the chief rule.-पक्ष a.1 having many adherents.-2 having a large family or retinue; महापक्षे धनिन्यार्थे निक्षेपं निक्षिपेद् बुधः Ms.8.179.(-क्षः) 1 an epithet of Garuḍa.-2 a kind of duck. (-क्षी) an owl.-पङ्क्तिः, -पदपङ्क्तिः a kind of metre.-पञ्चमूलम् the five great roots:-- बिल्वो$ग्निमन्थः श्योनाकः काश्मरी पाटला तथा । सर्वैस्तु मिलितैरेतैः स्यान्महापञ्चमूलकम् ॥-पञ्चविषम् the five great or deadly poisons:-- शृङ्गी च कालकूटश्च मुस्तको वत्सनाभकः । शङ्खकर्णीति योगो$यं महापञ्चविषाभिधः ॥-पटः the skin.-पथः 1 chief road, principal street, high or main road; संतानकाकीर्णमहापथं तत् Ku.7.3.-2 the passage into the next world, i. e. death.-3 N. of certain mountain-tops from which devout persons used to throw themselves down to secure entrance into heaven.-4 an epithet of Śiva.-5 the long pilgrimage to mount Ke- dāra.-6 the way to heaven.-7 the knowledge of the essence of Śiva acquired in the pilgrimage to Kedāra.-पथिक a.1 undertaking great journeys.-2 one receiving Śulka (toll) on the high way; cf. Mb.12.76.6 (com. महापथिकः समुद्रे नौयानेन गच्छन् यद्वा महापथि शुल्कग्राहकः)-पद्मः 1 a particular high number.-2 N. of Nārada.-3 N. of one of the nine treasures of Kubera.-4 N. of the southernmost elephant supporting the world.-5 an epithet of Nanda.-6 a Kinnara attendant on Kubera.(-द्मम्) 1 a white lotus.-2 N. of a city. ˚पतिः N. of Nanda.-पराकः a. a particular penance; Hch.-पराङ्णः a late hour in the afternoon.-पवित्रः an epithet of Viṣṇu.-पशुः large cattle; महापशूनां हरणे... दण्डं प्रकल्पयेत् Ms.8.324.-पातः a long flight; Pt.2.58.-पातकम् 1 a great sin, a heinous crime; ब्रह्महत्या सुरापानं स्तेयं गुर्वङ्गनागमः । महान्ति पातकान्याहुस्तत्संसर्गश्च पञ्चमम् ॥ Ms.1154.-2 any great sin or transgression.-पात्रः a prime minister.-पादः an epithet of Śiva.-पाप्मन् a. very sinful or wicked.-पुराणम् N. of a Purāṇa; महापुराणं विज्ञेयमेकादशकलक्षणम् Brav. P.-पुंसः a great man.-पुरुषः 1 a great man, an eminent or distinguished personage; शब्दं महापुरुषसंविहितं निशम्य U. 6.7.-2 the Supreme Spirit.-3 an epithet of Viṣṇu.-पौरुषिकः a worshipper of Viṣṇu; तदहं ते$भिधास्यामि महापौरुषिको भवान् Bhāg.2.1.1.-पुष्पः a kind of worm.-पूजा great worship; any solemn worship performed on extraordinary occasions.-पृष्ठः a camel.-पोटगलः a kind of large reed.-प्रजापतिः N. of Viṣṇu.-प्रतीहारः a chief door-keeper.-प्रपञ्चः the great universe.-प्रभ a. of great lustre. (-भः) the light of a lamp.-प्रभुः 1 a great lord.-2 a king, sovereign.-3 a chief.-4 an epithet of Indra.-5 of Śiva-6 of Viṣṇu.-7 a great saint or holy man.-प्रलयः 'the great dissolution', the total annihilation of the universe at the end of the life of Brahman, when all the lokas with their inha- bitants, the gods, saints &c. including Brahman himself are annihilated; महाप्रलयमारुत...... Ve.3.4.-प्रश्नः a knotty question.-प्रसादः 1 a great favour.-2 a great present (of food offered to an idol); पादोदकं च निर्माल्यं नैवेद्यं च विशेषतः । महाप्रसाद इत्युक्त्वा ग्राह्यं विष्णोः प्रयत्नतः-प्रस्थानम् 1 departing this life, death.-2 setting out on a great journey for ending life; इहैव निधनं याम महाप्रस्थानमेव वा Rām.2.47.7 (com. महाप्रस्थानं मरणदीक्षा- पूर्वकमुत्तराभिमुखगमनम्); Mb.1.2.365.-प्राणः 1 the hard breathing or aspirate sound made in the pronunciation of the aspirates.-2 the aspirated letters themselves (pl.); they are:-- ख्, घ्, छ्, झ्, ठ्, ढ्, थ्, ध्, फ्, भ्, श्, ष्, स्, ह्.-3 a raven.-प्राणता possession of great strength or essence; अन्यांश्च जीवत एव महाप्राणतया स्फुरतो जग्राह K.-प्रेतः a noble departed spirit.-प्लवः a great flood, deluge;... क्षिप्तसागरमहाप्लवामयम् Śi.14.71.-फल a.1 bearing much fruit.-2 bringing much reward.(-ला) 1 a bitter gourd.-2 a kind of spear.(-लम्) 1 a great fruit or reward.-2 a testicle.-फेना the cuttle-fish bone.-बन्धः a peculiar position of hands or feet.-बभ्रुः a kind of animal living in holes.-बल a. very strong; नियुज्यमानो राज्याय नैच्छद्राज्यं महाबलः Rām(-लः) 1 wind, storm.-2 a Buddha.-3 a solid bamboo.-4 a palm.-5 a crocodile.-बला N. of a plant; महाबला च पीतपुष्पा सहदेवी च सा स्मृता Bhāva. P. (-लम्) lead. ˚ईश्वरः N. of a Liṅga of Śiva near the modern Mahābaleśwara.-बाध a. causing great pain or damage.-बाहु a. long-armed, powerful. (-हुः) an epithet of Viṣṇu.-बि(वि)लम् 1 the atmosphere.-2 the heart.-3 a water-jar, pitcher.-4 a hole, cave.-बिसी a variety of skin (चर्म), a product of द्वादशग्राम in the Himālayas.-बी(वी)जः an epithet of Śiva.-बी (वी)ज्यम् the perinæum.-बुध्न a. having a great bottom or base (as a mountain).-बुशः barley.-बृहती a kind of metre.-बोधिः 1 the great intelligence of a Buddha.-2 a Buddha.-ब्रह्मम्, -ब्रह्मन् n. the Supreme Spirit.-ब्राह्मणः 1 a great or learned Brāhmaṇa.-2 a low or contemptible Brāhmaṇa.-भटः a great warrior; तदोजसा दैत्यमहाभटार्पितम् Bhāg.-भद्रा N. of the river Gaṅgā.-भाग a.1 very fortunate or blessed, very lucky or prosperous.-2 illustrious, distinguished, glo- rious; उभौ धर्मौ महाभागौ Mb.12.268.3; महाभागः कामं नरपतिरभिन्नस्थितिरसौ Ś.5.1; Ms.3.192.-3 very pure or holy, highly virtuous; पतिव्रता महाभागा कथं नु विचरिष्यति Mb.4.3.16.-भागता, -त्वम्, -भाग्यम् 1 extreme good fortune, great good luck, prosperity.-2 great excel- lence or merit.-भागवतम् the great Bhāgavata, one of the 18 Purāṇas. (-तः) a great worshipper of Viṣṇu.-भागिन् a. very fortunate or prosperous.-भाण्डम् a chief treasury.-भारतम् N. of the celebrated epic which describes the rivalries and contests of the sons of Dhṛitarāṣṭra and Pāṇḍu. (It consists of 18 Parvans or books, and is said to be the composition of Vyāsa; cf. the word भारत also); महत्त्वाद्भारतत्वाच्च महाभारतमुच्यते-भाष्यम् 1 a great commentary.-2 particularly, the great commentary of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini.-भासुरः an epithet of Viṣṇu.-भिक्षुः N. of Śākyamuni.-भीता a kind of sensitive plant (लाजाळू).-भीमः an epithet of king Śantanu.-भीरुः a sort of beetle or fly.-भुज a. long-armed, powerful.-भूतम् a great or primary element; see भूत; तस्यैतस्य महाभूतस्य निःश्वसितमेतद्यदृग्वेदः Up.; तं वेधा विदधे नूनं महाभूतसमाधिना R.1. 29; Ms.1.6.(-तः) 1 the Supreme Being.-2 a great creature.-भोगः 1 a great enjoyment.-2 a great coil or hood; great winding.-3 a serpent. (-गा) an epi- thet of Durgā.-मणिः 1 a costly or precious jewel; संस्कारोल्लिखितो महामणिरिव क्षीणो$पि नालक्ष्यते Ś.6.5.-2 N. of Śiva.-मति a.1 high-minded.-2 clever. (-तिः) N. of Bṛihaspati or Jupiter.-मत्स्यः a large fish, sea-monster.-मद a. greatly intoxicated. (-दः) an elephant in rut.-मनस्, -मनस्क a.1 high-minded, noble- minded, magnanimous; ततो युधिष्ठिरो राजा धर्मपुत्रो महामनाः Mb.4.1.7.-2 liberal.-3 proud, haughty. (-m) a fabulous animal called शरभ q. v.-मन्त्रः 1 any sacred text of the Vedas.-2 a great or efficacious charm, a powerful spell.-मन्त्रिन् m. the prime-minister, premier.-मयूरी N. of Buddhist goddess.-मलहारी a kind of Rāgiṇi.-महः a great festive procession; Sinhās.-महस् n. a great light (seen in the sky).-महोपाध्यायः 1 a very great preceptor.-2 a title given to learned men and reputed scholars; e. g. महामहो- पाध्यायमल्लिनाथसूरि &c.-मांसम् 'costly flesh', especially human flesh; न खलु महामांसविक्रयादन्यमुपायं पश्यामि Māl.4; अशस्त्रपूतं निर्व्याजं पुरुषाङ्गोपकल्पितम् । विक्रीयते महामांसं गृह्यतां गृह्यतामिदम् 5.12 (see Jagaddhara ad loc.).-माघी the full-moon day in the month of Māgha.-मात्र a.1 great in measure, very great or large.-2 most excellent, best; वृष्ण्यन्धकमहामात्रैः सह Mb.1.221.27; 5.22.37.(-त्रः) 1 a great officer of state, high state- official, a chief minister; (मन्त्रे कर्मणि भूषायां वित्ते माने परिच्छदे । मात्रा च महती येषां महामात्रास्तु ते स्मृताः); Ms. 9.259; गूढपुरुषप्रणिधिः कृतमहामात्रापसर्पः (v. l. महामात्यापसर्पः) पौरजानपदानपसर्पयेत् Kau. A.1.13.9; Rām.2.37.1.-2 an elephant-driver or keeper; मदोन्मत्तस्य भूपस्य कुञ्जरस्य च गच्छतः । उन्मार्गं वाच्यतां यान्ति महामात्राः समीपगाः ॥ Pt.1.161.-3 a superintendent of elephants.(-त्री) 1 the wife of a chief minister.-2 the wife of a spiritual teacher.-मानसी N. of a Jain goddess.-मान्य a. being in great honour with; मकरन्दतुन्दिलानामरविन्दानामयं महामान्यः Bv.1.6.-मायः 1 an epithet of Śiva.-2 of Viṣṇu.-माया 1 worldly illusion, which makes the material world appear really existent.-2 N. of Durgā; महामाया हरेश्चैषा यया संमोह्यते जगत् Devīmāhātmya.-मायूरम् a particular drug. (-री) N. of an amulet and a goddess; Buddh.-मारी 1 cholera, an epidemic.-2 an epithet of Durgā.-मार्गः high road, main street. ˚पतिः a superintendent of roads.-मालः N. of Śiva.-माहेश्वरः a great worshipper of Maheśvara or Śiva.-मुखः a crocodile.-मुद्रा a parti- cular position of hands or feet (in practice of yoga).-मुनिः 1 a great sage.-2 N. of Vyāsa.-3 an epithet of Buddha.-4 of Agastya.-5 the coriander plant. (-नि n.)1 coriander seed.-2 any medicinal herb or drug.-मूर्तिः N. of Viṣṇu.-मूर्धन् m. an epithet of Śiva.-मूलम् a large radish. (-लः) a kind of onion.-मूल्य a. very costly. (-ल्यः) a ruby.-मृगः 1 any large animal.-2 an elephant,-3 the fabulous animal called शरभ.-मृत्युः, -मेधः N. of Śiva.-मृत्युंजयः a kind of drug.-मृधम् a great battle.-मेदः the coral tree; महामेदाभिधो ज्ञेयः Bhāva. P.-मेधा an epithet of Durgā.-मोहः great infatuation or confusion of mind. (ससर्ज) महामोहं च मोहं च तमश्चाज्ञानवृत्तयः Bhāg.3.12.2. (-हा) an epithet of Durgā.-यज्ञः 'a great sacrifice', a term applied to the five daily sacrifices or acts of piety to be performed by a house-holder; अध्यापनं ब्रह्मयज्ञः पितृयज्ञस्तु तर्पणम् । होमो दैवो (or देवयज्ञः) बलिर्भौतो (or भूतयज्ञः) नृयज्ञो$तिथिपूजनम् ॥ Ms.3.7,71, (for explanation, see the words s. v.).-2 N. of Viṣṇu.-यमकम् 'a great Yamaka', i. e. a stanza all the four lines of which have exactly the same words, though different in sense; e. g. see Ki.15.52, where विकाशमीयुर्जगतीशमार्गणाः has four different senses; cf. also बभौ मरुत्वान् विकृतः समुद्रः Bk.1.19.-यशस् a. very famous, renowned, celebrated.-यात्रा 'the great pilgrimage', the pilgrimage to Benares.-यानम् N. of the later system of Buddhist teaching, firstly promul- gated by Nāgārjuna (opp. हीनयान).-याम्यः an epi- thet of Viṣṇu.-युगम् 'a great Yuga', consisting of the four Yugas of mortals, or comprising 4,32, years of men.-योगिन् m.1 an epithet of Śiva.-2 of Viṣṇu.-3 a cock.-योनिः f. excessive dilation of the female organ.-रक्तम् coral.-रङ्गः a large stage.-रजतम् 1 gold; उच्चैर्महारजतराजिविराजितासौ Śi.4.28.-2 the thorn-apple.-रजनम् 1 safflower.-2 gold.-3 turmeric; तस्य हैतस्य पुरुषस्य रूपं यथा महारजनं वासः Bṛi. Up.2.3.6.-रत्नम् 1 a precious jewel; वज्रं मुक्ता प्रवालं च गोमेदश्चेन्द्रनीलकः ॥ वैडूर्यः पुष्करागश्च पाचिर्माणिक्यमेव च । महारत्नानि चैतानि नव प्रोक्तानि सूरिभिः ॥ Śukra.4.155-56.-रथः 1 a great chariot.-2 a great warrior or hero; द्रुपदश्च महारथः Bg.1.4; कुतः प्रभावो धनंजयस्य महारथजयद्रथस्य विपत्तिमुत्पादयितुम् Ve.2; दशरथः प्रशशास महारथः R.9.1; Śi.3.22; (a महारथ is thus defined:-- एको दशसहस्राणि योधयेद्यस्तु धन्विनाम् ॥ शस्त्रशास्त्र- प्रवीणश्च विज्ञेयः स महारथः ॥).-3 desire, longing; cf. मनोरथ.-रवः a frog.-रस a. very savoury.(-सः) 1 a sugar- cane.-2 quicksilver.-3 a precious mineral.-4 the fruit of the date tree.-5 any one of the eight substan- ces given below:-- दरदः पारदं शस्ये वैक्रान्तं कान्तमभ्रकम् । माक्षिकं विमलश्चेति स्युरेते$ष्टौ महारसाः ॥ (-सम्) sour ricewater.-राजः 1 a great king, sovereign or supreme ruler; पञ्चाशल्लक्षपर्यन्तो महाराजः प्रकीर्तितः Śukra.1.184.-2 a respect- ful mode of addressing kings or other great personages (my lord, your majesty, your highness); इति सत्यं महाराज बद्धो$स्म्यर्थेन कौरवैः Mb.-3 a deified Jaina teacher.-4 a fingernail. ˚अधिराजः a universal emperor, para- mount sovereign. ˚चूतः a kind of mango tree.-राजिकः N. of Viṣṇu.-राजिकाः (m. pl.) an epithet of a class of gods (said to be 22 or 236 in number.).-राज्यम् the rank or title of a reigning sovereign.-राज्ञी 1 the reigning or chief queen, principal wife of a king.-2 N. of Durgā.-रात्रम् midnight, dead of night.-रात्रिः, -त्री f.1 see महाप्रलय; ब्रह्मणश्च निपाते च महाकल्पो भवेन्नृप । प्रकीर्तिता महारात्रिः.-2 midnight.-3 the eighth night in the bright half of Āśvina.-राष्ट्रः 'the great kingdom', N. of a country in the west of India, the country of the Marāṭhās.-2 the people of Mahārāṣṭra; the Marāṭhās (pl.). (-ष्ट्री) N. of the principal Prākṛita; dialect, the language of the people of the Mahārāṣṭra; cf. Daṇḍin:-- महाराष्ट्राश्रयां भाषां प्रकृष्टं प्राकृतं विदुः Kāv.1.34.-रिष्टः a kind of Nimba tree growing on mountains.-रुज्, -ज a. very painful.-रुद्रः a form of Śiva.-रुरुः a species of antelope.-रूप a. mighty in form.(-पः) 1 an epithet of Śiva.-2 resin.-रूपकम् a kind of drama.-रेतस् m. an epithet of Śiva.-रोगः a dangerous illness, grievous malady; (these are eight:-- उन्मादो राजयक्ष्मा च श्वासस्त्वग्दोष एव च । मधुमेहश्चाश्मरी च तथो- दरभगन्दरौ ॥).-रौद्र a. very dreadful. (-द्री) an epithet of Durgā.-रौरवः N. of one of the 21 hells; Ms.4.88-9.-लक्ष्मी 1 the great Lakṣmī, or Śakti of Nārāyaṇa; सेवे सैरिभमर्दिनीमिह महालक्ष्मीं सरोजस्थिताम्.-2 a young girl who represents the goddess Durgā at the Durgā festival.-लयः 1 a great world destruction.-2 the Supreme Being (महदादीनां लयो यस्मिन्).-लिङ्गम् the great Liṅga or Phallus. (-ङ्गः) an epithet of Śiva.-लोलः a crow.-लोहम् a magnet.-वंशः N. of a wellknown work in Pali (of the 5th century).-वक्षस् m. epithet of Śiva.-वनम् a large forest in Vṛindāvana.-वरा Dūrvā grass.-वराहः 'the great boar', an epithet of Viṣṇu in his third or boar incarnation.-वर्तनम् high wages;-वल्ली 1 the Mādhavī creeper.-2 a large creeping plant.-वसः the porpoise.-वसुः silver; Gīrvāṇa.-वाक्यम् 1 a long sentence.-2 any continuous composition or literary work.-3 a great proposition, principal sentence; such as तत्त्वमसि, ब्रह्मैवेदं सर्वम् &c.-4 a complete sentence (opp. अवान्तरवाक्य q. v.); न च महावाक्ये सति अवान्तरवाक्यं प्रमाणं भवति ŚB. on MS.6.4.25.-वातः a stormy wind, violent wind; महावाता<?>तैर्महिषकुलनीलैर्जलधरैः Mk.5.22.-वादिन् m. a great or powerful disputant.-वायुः 1 air (as an element).-2 stormy wind, hur- ricane, tempest.-वार्तिकम् N. of the Vārtikas of Kātyāyana on Pāṇini's Sūtras.-विडम् a kind of factitious salt.-विदेहा N. of a certain वृत्ति or condition of the mind in the Yoga system of philosophy.-विद्या the great lores; काली तारा महाविद्या षोडशी भुवनेश्वरी । भैरवी छिन्नमस्ता च विद्या धूमवती तथा । बगला सिद्धविद्या च मातङ्गी कमला- त्मिका । एता दश महाविद्याः... ॥-विपुला a kind of metre.-विभाषा a rule giving a general option or alternative; इति महाविभाषया साधुः.-विभूतिः an epithet of Śiva.-विषः a serpent having two mouths.-विषुवम् the vernal equinox. ˚संक्रान्तिः f. the vernal equinox (the sun's entering the sign Aries).-विस्तर a. very extensive or copious.-वीचिः N. of a hell.-वीरः 1 a great hero or warrior.-2 a lion.-3 the thunderbolt of Indra.-4 an epithet of Viṣṇu.-5 of Garuḍa.-6 of Hanumat.-7 a cuckoo.-8 a white horse.-9 a sacrificial fire.-1 a sacrificial vessel.-11 a kind of hawk. ˚चरितम् N. of a celebrated drama by Bhavabhūti.-वीर्य a. of great valour, very powerful.(-र्यः) 1 N. of Brah- man.-2 the Supreme Being. (-र्या) the wild cotton shrub.-2 an epithet of संज्ञा, the wife of the sun.-वृषः a great bull.-वेग a.1 very swift or fleet.(-गः) 1 great speed, excessive velocity.-2 an ape.-3 the bird Garuḍa.-वेघः a particular position of hands or feet (in the practice of Yoga).-वेल a. billowy.-व्याधिः f.1 a great disease.-2 a very bad kind of leprosy (black leprosy).-व्याहृतिः f. a great mystical word, i. e. भूर्, भुवस् and स्वर्.-व्रत a. very devotional, rigidly observing vows.(-तम्) 1 a great vow, a great reli- gious observance; a vow for not taking even water for a month; महाव्रतं चरेद्यस्तु Mb.12.35.22 (com. महाव्रतं मासमात्रं जलस्यापि त्यागः).-2 any great or funda- mental duty; प्राणैरपि हिता वृत्तिरद्रोहो व्याजवर्जनम् । आत्मनीव प्रियाधानमेतन्मैत्रीमहाव्रतम् Mv.5.59; क्रतौ महाव्रते पश्यन् ब्रह्मचारी- त्वरीरतम् N.17.23.-व्रतिन् m.1 a devotee, an ascetic.-2 an epithet of Śiva.-शक्तिः 1 an epithet of Śiva.-2 of Kārtikeya.-शङ्कुः the sine of the sun's eleva- tion.-शङ्खः 1 a great conch-shell; पौण्ड्रं दध्मौ महाशङ्खं Bg.1.15; महाशङ्खमयी माला ताराविद्याजपे प्रिया Tantra.-2 the temporal bone, forehead.-3 a human bone.-4 a particular high number.-5 one of Kubera's treasures.-शठः a kind of thorn-apple.-शब्द a. making a loud sound, very noisy, boisterous.-शल्कः a kind of sea- crab or prawn; Ms.3.272.-शालः a great householder.-शालिः a kind of large and sweetsmelling rice.-शाल्वणम् ('great fomentation') N. of a remedy; Suśr.-शासन a.1 exercising great power.-2 whose commands are great; त्रैलोक्यघिपतित्वमेव विरसं यस्मिन् महा- शासने Bh.3.8.(-नम्) 1 the knowledge of Brahma as expounded in the Upaniṣadas.-2 great order of government.-शिरस् m. a kind of serpent.-शिवरात्रिः N. of a festival on the 14th day of the dark half of Māgha,-शुक्तिः f. a pearl-shell.-शुक्ला an epithet of Sarasvatī.-शुभ्रम् silver.-शूद्रः (-द्री f.)1 a Sūdra in a high position.-2 a cowherd.-3 an upper servant. (-द्री) a female cow-keeper. (-द्रा) a Śudra woman in a high position.-शून्यम् a particular mental condi- tion of a Yogin.-शृङ्गः 1 a species of stag.-2 the शरभ animal.-श्मशानम् an epithet of Benares.-श्यामा the Sissoo tree. (Mar. शिसवी).-श्रमणः 1 an epithet of Buddha.-2 a Jain monk.-श्लक्ष्णा sand.-श्वासः a kind of asthma.-श्वेता 1 an epithet of Sarasvatī.-2 of Durgā.-3 white sugar.-संहिता great combi- nation.-संक्रान्तिः f. the winter solstice.-सती a very chaste woman.-सत्ता absolute existence.-सत्यः an epithet of Yama.-सत्त्व a.1 noble.-2 very strong or powerful.-3 just, righteous.(-त्त्वः) 1 a large animal.-2 N. of Sākyamuni.-3 an epithet of Kubera.-संधिविग्रहः the office of the minister of peace and war.-सन्नः an epithet of Kubera.-सन्निः m. (in music) a kind of measure.-समुद्रः the great ocean.-सर्गः a great or completely new creation (after a complete destruction of the world).-सर्जः the bread- fruit or jack-tree.-साधनभागः a great executive officer.-सांतपनः a kind of very rigid penance; see Ms.11. 218.-सांधिविग्रहिकः a minister of peace and war.-सामन्तः a great vassal.-सामान्यम् the widest genera- lity.-सारः a kind of Khadira tree.-सारथिः an epithet of Aruṇa.-साहसम् great violence or outrage, great audacity.-साहसिकः a dacoit, highwayman, a daring robber.-सिंहः the fabulous animal called Śarabha.-सिद्धिः f. a kind of magical power.-सुखम् 1 great pleasure.-2 copulation. (-खः) a Buddha.-सुगन्धम् a fragrant unguent.-सुगन्धिः a kind of antidote.-सुधा silver; Gīrvāṇa.-सुभिक्षम् good times.-सूक्तः the composer of the great Sūktas or hymns of the 1th Maṇḍala of the Ṛigveda.-सूक्ष्मा sand.-सूतः a mili- tary drum.-सेनः 1 an epithet of Kārtikeya; महासेन- प्रसूतिं तद्ययौ शरवणं महत् Rām.7.16.1.-2 the commander of a large army. (-ना) a great army.-स्कन्धः a camel.-स्थली the earth.-स्थानम् a great position.-स्नेहः a combination of the 4 kinds of fat.-स्मृतिः the Ṣaḍaṅgas and Smṛitis; महास्मृतिं पठेद्यस्तु तथैवानुस्मृतिं शुभाम् Mb.12.2.3.-स्रोतस् n. the bowels.-स्रग्विन् m. an epithet of Śiva.-स्वनः a kind of drum.-हंसः an epithet of Viṣṇu.-हविस् n. clarified butter.-हस्तः an epithet of Śiva.-हासः a loud or boisterous laughter, cachinnation.-हिमवत् m. N. of a mountain.-ह्रस्वा N. of a plant (Mar. कुहिली). -
5 groß
big; tall; great; large; grand; heavyset* * *[groːs]1. ADJEKTIVcomp ordm;er ['grøːsɐ] superl ordm;te(r, s) ['grøːstə]1) big; Fläche, Raum, Haus, Hände big, large; Höhe, Breite great; Größe, Tube, Dose, Packung etc large; (TYP ) Buchstabe capitalein ganz großes Haus/Buch — a great big house/book
der große ( Uhr)zeiger — the big or minute hand
x ist größer als 10 (Math) — x is greater than 10
ein 2 Hektar großes Grundstück — a 2-hectare plot of land
ein Loch größer machen — to make a hole bigger
ein großes Bier, ein Großes (inf) — ≈ a pint (of beer) (Brit), a large beer
die große Masse (fig) — the vast majority
2) = hoch, hochgewachsen taller ist 1,80 Meter groß — he's one metre (Brit) or meter (US) eighty (tall)
unsere Große — our eldest or oldest (daughter); (von zweien) our elder daughter
unser Großer — our eldest or oldest ( son); (von zweien) our elder son
mit etw groß geworden sein — to have grown up with sth
er ist ein großes Kind — he's a big or a great big (inf) baby
4) zeitlich Verzögerung, Rede big, longdie große Pause (Sch) — the long or lunch break
die großen Ferien — the summer holidays (Brit) or holiday (US)
5) = beträchtlich, wichtig, bedeutend great; Erfolg, Enttäuschung, Hoffnung, Eile great, big; Gewinn, Ereignis big; Katastrophe, Schreck terrible; Summe large; Geschwindigkeit higher hat Großes geleistet — he has achieved great things
die größten Erfindungen unseres Jahrhunderts — the greatest inventions of our century
ein großer Dichter wie Goethe — a great poet like Goethe
eine große Dummheit machen — to do something very or really stupid
er ist kein großer Esser (inf) — he's not a big eater
eine der größeren Firmen — one of the major companies
die großen Fragen unserer Zeit — the great or big questions of our time
das große Ganze — the broader or wider view
vor meinem Haus war or herrschte ein großer Lärm — there was a lot of noise outside my house
ich habe große Lust zu verreisen — I'd really like to go away (on holiday (Brit) or vacation (US))
sie hatte große Lust, sich zu verkleiden — she really wanted to get dressed up
einen großen Namen haben — to be a big name
ich bin kein großer Redner (inf) — I'm no great speaker
ich bin kein großer Opernfreund (inf) — I'm not a great opera fan
im größten Regen/Schneesturm — in the middle of a downpour/snowstorm
große Worte machen — to use grand words
6) = großartig, bewundernswert iro greatdas ist or finde ich ganz groß (inf) — that's really great (inf)
7) in Eigennamen GreatAlfred/Friedrich der Große — Alfred/Frederick the Great
8) MUS2. ADVERBcomp ordm; er, superl am ordm;ten1)groß machen (baby-talk) — to do number two (baby-talk), to do a poo (Brit baby-talk)
groß daherreden (inf) — to talk big (inf)
See:2)3)was ist das schon groß? (inf) — big deal! (inf), so what? (inf)
was soll man da schon groß machen/sagen? (inf) — what can you do/say?
er hat sich nicht gerade groß für unsere Belange eingesetzt (inf) — he didn't exactly put up a big fight for us
ich habe mich nie groß um Politik gekümmert (inf) — I've never been a great one for politics (inf)
ich kümmere mich nicht groß darum (inf) — I don't take much notice
ganz groß rauskommen (inf) — to make the big time (inf)
* * *1) (large in size: a big car.) big2) (very large, larger etc than average: a great crowd of people at the football match.) great3) (great in size, amount etc; not small: a large number of people; a large house; a large family; This house is too large for two people.) large4) (fairly large: His income is quite sizeable, now that he has been promoted.) sizeable5) ((of people and thin or narrow objects such as buildings or trees) higher than normal: a tall man/tree.) tall6) ((of people) having a particular height: John is only four feet tall.) tall7) (great or large: He won by a wide margin.) wide* * *<größer, größte>[ˈgro:s]I. adjin \großen/größeren Formaten/Größen in large/larger formats/sizes2. (hoch aufragend) longein \großer Kirchturm/Mast/Turm a high church steeple/pylon/tower3. (hoch gewachsen) Mensch talldu bist \groß geworden you've grownwie \groß bist du? how tall are you?er ist 1,78 m \groß he is 5 foot 10 [or 1.78m] [tall]ein \großer Baum/eine \große Vase a tall tree/vaseauf \große[r] Fahrt on a long journeydie \große Pause SCH mid-morning break5. (älter) big, elder, olderdas ist Anita, unsere G\große this is Anita, our eldestwenn ich \groß bin... when I'm grown up...mein \großer Bruder/meine \große Schwester my elder brother/my elder sisterG\groß und Klein young and old [alike]6. (mengenmäßig)im G\großen einkaufen to buy in bulkdie \große Masse most [or the majority] of the peopleein \großer Teil der Bevölkerung a large part of the population7. (erheblich, beträchtlich) greatwas für eine \große Freude! how delightful!du redest ganz \großen Unsinn you're talking complete rubbishwas ist denn das für ein \großer Lärm auf der Straße? what's all that noise in the street?macht doch nicht so einen \großen Lärm! don't make so much noise!\große Angst haben to be terribly afraid [or frightened]ein \großer Aufstieg a meteoric riseeine \große Beeinträchtigung a major impairmentein \großer Betrag a large amounteine \große Dummheit sheer stupidityein \großer Durchbruch/Reinfall a major breakthrough/disastereine \große Enttäuschung a great [or deep] [or profound] disappointmentmit \großer Geschwindigkeit at high [or great] speed\großen Hunger haben to be terribly hungry\großes Leid great [or deep] [or profound] sorrowein \großer Misserfolg an abject [or a dismal] failure\große Nachfrage a big demandeine \große Preissteigerung a massive price rise [or increase]ein \großer Schrecken a nasty fright\große Schwierigkeiten serious [or real] trouble\große Wut unbridled fury\großer Zorn deep [or profound] anger8. (bedeutend) greatetwas/nichts G\großes something/nothing greatsie hat in ihrem Leben nichts G\großes geleistet she never achieved anything great [or major] in her life, she did not achieve great things in her lifemit diesem Gemälde hat sie etwas G\großes geschaffen she has created something great [or profound] with this paintingein \großer Konzern/ein \großes Unternehmen a leading [or major] group/company9. (besonders gut) bigim Meckern ist sie ganz \groß she's quite good at moaningich bin kein \großer Esser/Trinker I'm not a big eater/drinkerich bin kein \großer Redner I'm no [or not a] great speaker10. (in Eigennamen)▪ ... der G\große... the GreatFriedrich der G\große Frederick the Great11. (großes Glas) large, bignach den drei \großen Bier war ich ziemlich angeheitert I felt quite merry fam [or fam tipsy] after three pints [of beer]12.▶ im G\großen und Ganzen [gesehen] on the whole, by and largeich habe nur \großes Geld I haven't any change on me; s.a. kleinII. advwas ist da jetzt schon \groß dabei! big deal! famer hat sich aber nicht gerade \groß für uns eingesetzt! he didn't exactly do very much [or put himself out much] for us!was soll man da schon \groß sagen? you can't really say very muchich habe mich nie \groß für Politik interessiert I've never been particularly interested in politics\groß einsteigen to go in for sth in a big waysie ist ganz \groß in die Politik eingestiegen she's gone into politics in a big way2. (von weitem Ausmaß)\groß angelegt large-scaleeine \groß angelegte Offensive a full-scale offensive [or attack3. MODE4. (nicht klein)5.* * *1.größer, größt... Adjektiv1) big; big, large <house, window, area, room, etc.>; large < pack, size, can, etc.>; great <length, width, height>; tall < person>große Eier/Kartoffeln — large eggs/potatoes
eine große Terz/Sekunde — (Musik) a major third/second
ein großes Bier, bitte — a pint, please
2) (eine bestimmte Größe aufweisend)1 m2/2 ha groß — 1 m2/2 ha in area
sie ist 1,75 m groß — she is 1.75 m tall
doppelt/dreimal so groß wie... — twice/three times the size of...
3) (älter) big <brother, sister>seine größere Schwester — his elder sister
unsere Große/unser Großer — our eldest or oldest daughter/son
4) (erwachsen) grown-up <children, son, daughter>[mit etwas] groß werden — grow up [with something]
die Großen — (Erwachsene) the grown-ups; (ältere Kinder) the older children
Groß und Klein — old and young [alike]
5) (lange dauernd) long, lengthy <delay, talk, explanation, pause>die großen Ferien — (Schulw.) the summer holidays or (Amer.) long vacation sing.
die große Pause — (Schulw.) [mid-morning] break
große Summen/Kosten — large sums/heavy costs
eine große Auswahl — a wide selection or range
7) (außerordentlich) great <pleasure, pain, hunger, anxiety, hurry, progress, difficulty, mistake, importance>; intense <heat, cold>; high < speed>ihre/seine große Liebe — her/his great love
ein großer Augenblick/Tag — a great moment/day
große Worte — grand or fine words
die Großen [der Welt] — the great figures [of our world]
die große Dame/den großen Herrn spielen — (iron.) play the fine lady/gentleman
10) (bedeutend) great, major < artist, painter, work>Katharina die Große — Catherine the Great; s. auch Karl
11) (wesentlich)die große Linie/der große Zusammenhang — the basic line/the overall context
in großen Zügen od. Umrissen — in broad outline
im Großen [und] Ganzen — by and large; on the whole
ein großes Herz haben — be great-hearted
13) (ugs.): (großspurig)2.1)groß geschrieben werden — (fig. ugs.) be stressed or emphasized
groß machen — (Kinderspr.) do number two (child lang.)
2) (ugs.): (aufwendig)3) (ugs.): (besonders) greatly; particularly4) (ugs.): (großartig)sie steht ganz groß da — she has made it big (coll.) or made the big time (coll.)
* * *A. adj1. big (besonders gefühlsbetont); Haus, Fläche etc: large; Land: vast; Baum, Gebäude etc: (hoch) tall; (riesig) huge; Person: tall;ein großes Gebäude a big(, tall) building;der Große Ozean GEOG the Pacific (Ocean);die Großen Seen GEOG the Great Lakes;große Zehe big toe;großer Buchstabe capital letter;Gut mit großem G good with a capital G;wir sprechen hier von Geiz mit einem großen G fig, pej we’re talking about meanness with a capital M here;groß machen/müssen kinderspr do/have to do big jobs2. an Ausmaß, Intensität, Wert etc: great; Fehler, Lärm, Unterschied etc: auch big; Entfernung: great, long; Geschwindigkeit: high; Hitze, Kälte, Schmerzen etc: intense; Kälte: auch severe; Verlust: heavy; Wissen: extensive, wide; (tief) profound; MUS, Intervall, Terz: major; Angeber, Angsthase, Feigling etc: terrible, dreadful;wir waren zu Hause eine große Familie we were a large family;große Ferien summer holiday(s), long vacation;zu meiner großen Freude to my great joy ( oder pleasure);wie komme ich an das große Geld? umg how do I get into the big money?;großes Glück haben be very lucky;großen Hunger haben be very hungry; stärker: be starving;große Mehrheit great majority;große Pause long (mid-morning) break;ein Fest im großen Rahmen a celebration on the grand scale;große Schritte machen make great progress;zum großen Teil largely, for the most part;3. mit Maßangabe:wie groß ist er? how tall is he?;er ist … groß he’s … (tall); das Grundstückist 600 m2groß is 600 metres (US -ers) square;gleich groß Personen: the same height, as tall as each other; Flächen, Kleidungsstücke etc: the same size;so groß wie ein Fußballfeld the size of a football pitch (US soccer field);war dreimal so groß wie der der Konkurrenz was three times that of our rivalsgroße Schwester big sister;groß werden Kinder: grow up;zu groß werden für outgrow sth, get too big for;er ist nur ein großes Kind he’s just a big baby;Groß und Klein young and old5. fig Augenblick, Entdeckung, Erfolg, Tag, Tat etc: great; (bedeutend) major, important; (großartig) grand, magnificent; Pläne, Ziele: great, grand, big; Künstler, Dichter etc: great;große Worte big words;Friedrich der Große Frederick the Great;Karl der Große Charlemagne;die große Dame/den großen Herrn spielen iron play the great lady/lord;große Reden schwingen iron talk big;Groß und Klein standesmäßig: high and low6. (allgemein, wesentlich) broad, general;den großen Zusammenhang erkennen see the big picture;im großen Ganzen overall;in großen Zügen in broad outline7. umg (gut):das war ganz groß! that was really great!;große Klasse she’s really good ( oder she’s brilliant) at arithmetic;im Angeben/Geldausgeben ist er (ganz) groß iron he’s very good at showing off/spending money;ich bin kein großer Freund von Partys/Suppe I’m not a great one for parties/soup, I’m not particularly fond of parties/soup;er ist ein großer Schweiger/kein großer Esser he’s not a great talker/eater8. (edel):in großer Aufmachung Bericht etc: prominently featured, splashed across the page; Person: in full dress;B. adv1. big;groß gedruckt in large letters ( oder print);groß gemustert with a large pattern;groß kariert large-checked;er sah mich nur groß an he just stared at me;groß und breit dastehen umg, unübersehbar: stand out; stärker: stick out like a sore thumb; → auch großschreiben, großgebaut etc2. (aufwändig):groß angelegt Aktion etc: large-scale, full-scale;groß ausgehen umg have a real night out;jemanden/etwas groß herausbringen umg pull out all the stops for sb/sth, give sb/sth a tremendous build-up3. umg:groß auftreten act big;groß daherreden talk big5. (gut):groß in Form in great form;beim Publikum groß ankommen be a big hit with the audience;ganz groß dastehen (Erfolg haben) do brilliantly6. umg:er kümmert sich nicht groß darum he doesn’t really bother about it;was ist schon groß dabei? so what?, US auch (so) what’s the big deal?;was gibt es da groß zu sagen? what can you say?;was gibt’s da noch groß zu fragen? is there really anything more we need to ask?;was kann das schon groß kosten? it can’t be very expensive, can it?;was war los? -was soll schon groß gewesen sein? what do you think happened?* * *1.größer, größt... Adjektiv1) big; big, large <house, window, area, room, etc.>; large <pack, size, can, etc.>; great <length, width, height>; tall < person>große Eier/Kartoffeln — large eggs/potatoes
eine große Terz/Sekunde — (Musik) a major third/second
ein großes Bier, bitte — a pint, please
1 m2/2 ha groß — 1 m2/2 ha in area
sie ist 1,75 m groß — she is 1.75 m tall
doppelt/dreimal so groß wie... — twice/three times the size of...
3) (älter) big <brother, sister>unsere Große/unser Großer — our eldest or oldest daughter/son
4) (erwachsen) grown-up <children, son, daughter>[mit etwas] groß werden — grow up [with something]
die Großen — (Erwachsene) the grown-ups; (ältere Kinder) the older children
Groß und Klein — old and young [alike]
5) (lange dauernd) long, lengthy <delay, talk, explanation, pause>die großen Ferien — (Schulw.) the summer holidays or (Amer.) long vacation sing.
die große Pause — (Schulw.) [mid-morning] break
große Summen/Kosten — large sums/heavy costs
eine große Auswahl — a wide selection or range
7) (außerordentlich) great <pleasure, pain, hunger, anxiety, hurry, progress, difficulty, mistake, importance>; intense <heat, cold>; high < speed>ihre/seine große Liebe — her/his great love
ein großer Augenblick/Tag — a great moment/day
große Worte — grand or fine words
[k]eine große Rolle spielen — [not] play a great or an important part
die Großen [der Welt] — the great figures [of our world]
9) nicht präd. (glanzvoll) grand <celebration, ball, etc.>die große Dame/den großen Herrn spielen — (iron.) play the fine lady/gentleman
10) (bedeutend) great, major <artist, painter, work>Katharina die Große — Catherine the Great; s. auch Karl
11) (wesentlich)die große Linie/der große Zusammenhang — the basic line/the overall context
in großen Zügen od. Umrissen — in broad outline
im Großen [und] Ganzen — by and large; on the whole
13) (ugs.): (großspurig)2.große Reden schwingen od. (salopp) Töne spucken — talk big (coll.)
1)groß geschrieben werden — (fig. ugs.) be stressed or emphasized
groß machen — (Kinderspr.) do number two (child lang.)
2) (ugs.): (aufwendig)3) (ugs.): (besonders) greatly; particularly4) (ugs.): (großartig)sie steht ganz groß da — she has made it big (coll.) or made the big time (coll.)
* * *adj.ample adj.big adj.capital adj.great adj.heavyset adj.large adj.sizable adj.tall adj. adv.largely adv.sizably adv. -
6 señor
adj.mister, Mr., Mr.m.1 gentleman, lord, gent.2 sir, mister.3 Lord.4 master.* * *► adjetivo1 (noble) distinguished, noble2 familiar fine► nombre masculino,nombre femenino2 (amo - hombre) master; (- mujer) mistress4 (tratamiento - hombre) sir; (- mujer) madam, US ma'am■ buenos días, señora good morning, madam5 (ante apellido - hombre) Mr; (- mujer) Mrs■ el Sr. Rodríguez Mr Rodríguez7 (en carta - hombre) Sir; (- mujer) Madam1 RELIGIÓN the Lord1 good Lord!\ser todo un señor / ser toda una señora to be a real gentleman / be a real lady¡señoras y señores! ladies and gentlemen!el señor de la casa / la señora de la casa the gentleman of the house / the lady of the houseNuestro Señor / Nuestra Señora Our Lord / Our Ladyseñor feudal feudal lord* * *noun m.1) gentleman2) sir3) owner, master4) mister5) lord* * *señor, -a1. ADJ1) * [antes de sustantivo] [uso enfático] great big *2) (=libre) free, at libertyeres muy señor de hacerlo si quieres — you're quite free o at liberty to do so if you want
2. SM / F1) (=persona madura) man o más frm gentleman/ladyha venido un señor preguntando por ti — there was a man o más frm a gentleman here asking for you
2) (=dueño) [de tierras] owner; [de criado, esclavo] master/mistress¿está la señora? — is the lady of the house in?
3) [fórmula de tratamiento]a) [con apellido] Mr/Mrslos señores Centeno y Sánchez tuvieron que irse antes — frm Messrs Centeno and Sánchez had to leave early frm
b) * [con nombre de pila]buenos días, señor Mariano — [a Mariano Ruiz] good morning, Mr Ruiz
la señora María es de mi pueblo — [hablando de María Ruiz] Mrs Ruiz is from my village
c) [hablando directamente] sir/madamno se preocupe señor — don't worry, sir
¿qué desea la señora? — [en tienda] can I help you, madam?; [en restaurante] what would you like, madam?
¡oiga, señora! — excuse me, madam!
¡señoras y señores! — ladies and gentlemen!
d) [con nombre de cargo o parentesco]sí, señor juez — yes, my Lord
e) frm [en correspondencia]señor director — [en carta a periódico] Dear Sir
4) [uso enfático]pues sí señor, así es como pasó — yes indeed, that's how it happened
señora¡no señor, ahora no te vas! — oh no, you're not going anywhere yet!
5) [en letrero]3. SM1) ( Hist) lord2) (Rel)* * *I- ñora adjetivo (delante del n) (fam) ( uso enfático)II- ñora1)a) ( persona adulta) (m) man, gentleman; (f) ladyte busca un señor — there's a man o gentleman looking for you
señoras — ladies, women
b) ( persona distinguida) (m) gentleman; (f) lady2) (dueño, amo)el señor/la señora de la casa — the gentleman/the lady of the house (frml)
el señor de estas tierras — (Hist) the lord of these lands
3) (Relig)a) Señor masculino LordDios, nuestro Señor — the Lord God
b) Señora femenino5) ( tratamiento de cortesía)a) ( con apellidos) (m) Mr; (f) Mrsb) (uso popular, con nombres de pila)la señora Cristina/el señor Miguel — ≈ Mrs Fuentes/Mr López
c) (frml) ( con otros sustantivos)Señor Director — (Corresp) Dear Sir, Sir (frml)
d) (frml) ( sin mencionar el nombre)perdón, señor/señora ¿tiene hora? — excuse me, could you tell me the time?
¿se lleva ésa, señora? — will you take that one, Madam? (frml)
muy señor mío/señores míos — (Corresp) Dear Sir/Sirs
Teresa Chaves - ¿señora o señorita? — Teresa Chaves - Miss, Mrs or Ms?
los señores han salido — Mr and Mrs Paz (o López etc) are not at home
e) ( uso enfático)¿y lo pagó él?-sí señor — you mean he paid for it-he did indeed
no señor, no fue así — no that is certainly not what happened
•• Cultural note:no señor, no pienso ir — there's no way I'm going
Señor/Señora/SeñoritaTitles used before someone's name when speaking to or about them. They are generally followed by the person's surname, or first name and surname. They can also be followed by the person's professional title, without the name: señor arquitecto, señora doctora, señorita maestra. They can be used on their own to attract attention. In letters they can be followed by the appropriate forms of don/doña: Sr. Dn Juan Montesinos, Sra Dña. Ana Castellón. The full forms are written in lower case when used in the middle of a sentence; the abbreviated forms are always capitalized - for señor, Sr., for señora, Sra., and for señorita, Srta. Señor is used for men. Señores, can mean "sirs", "gentlemen", and "ladies and gentlemen", and when used of a married couple means "Mr and Mrs": los señores Montesino. Señora is used for married women and widows, and women of unknown marital status. Señorita is used for single women, young women of unknown marital status, and female teachers* * *= master, Mr (Mister), gentleman [gentlemen, -pl.].Ex. But I said at once: 'Look here, master, I'll thank you to leave me alone after this, do you hear?'.Ex. My second point may be a slightly tangential, but I hope it is a concrete reaction to the general tenor of Mr. Lubetzky's remarks and the general subject posed.Ex. These were gentlemen whose forebears had upset Elizabeth I by encouraging the people to think a little too much for themselves and who proved very difficult to control.----* en el año del Señor = in the year of our Lord.* nada es gratis en la viña del Señor = there is no such thing as a free lunch, there is no such thing as a free ride.* señor feudal = suzerain.* * *I- ñora adjetivo (delante del n) (fam) ( uso enfático)II- ñora1)a) ( persona adulta) (m) man, gentleman; (f) ladyte busca un señor — there's a man o gentleman looking for you
señoras — ladies, women
b) ( persona distinguida) (m) gentleman; (f) lady2) (dueño, amo)el señor/la señora de la casa — the gentleman/the lady of the house (frml)
el señor de estas tierras — (Hist) the lord of these lands
3) (Relig)a) Señor masculino LordDios, nuestro Señor — the Lord God
b) Señora femenino5) ( tratamiento de cortesía)a) ( con apellidos) (m) Mr; (f) Mrsb) (uso popular, con nombres de pila)la señora Cristina/el señor Miguel — ≈ Mrs Fuentes/Mr López
c) (frml) ( con otros sustantivos)Señor Director — (Corresp) Dear Sir, Sir (frml)
d) (frml) ( sin mencionar el nombre)perdón, señor/señora ¿tiene hora? — excuse me, could you tell me the time?
¿se lleva ésa, señora? — will you take that one, Madam? (frml)
muy señor mío/señores míos — (Corresp) Dear Sir/Sirs
Teresa Chaves - ¿señora o señorita? — Teresa Chaves - Miss, Mrs or Ms?
los señores han salido — Mr and Mrs Paz (o López etc) are not at home
e) ( uso enfático)¿y lo pagó él?-sí señor — you mean he paid for it-he did indeed
no señor, no fue así — no that is certainly not what happened
•• Cultural note:no señor, no pienso ir — there's no way I'm going
Señor/Señora/SeñoritaTitles used before someone's name when speaking to or about them. They are generally followed by the person's surname, or first name and surname. They can also be followed by the person's professional title, without the name: señor arquitecto, señora doctora, señorita maestra. They can be used on their own to attract attention. In letters they can be followed by the appropriate forms of don/doña: Sr. Dn Juan Montesinos, Sra Dña. Ana Castellón. The full forms are written in lower case when used in the middle of a sentence; the abbreviated forms are always capitalized - for señor, Sr., for señora, Sra., and for señorita, Srta. Señor is used for men. Señores, can mean "sirs", "gentlemen", and "ladies and gentlemen", and when used of a married couple means "Mr and Mrs": los señores Montesino. Señora is used for married women and widows, and women of unknown marital status. Señorita is used for single women, young women of unknown marital status, and female teachers* * *= master, Mr (Mister), gentleman [gentlemen, -pl.].Ex: But I said at once: 'Look here, master, I'll thank you to leave me alone after this, do you hear?'.
Ex: My second point may be a slightly tangential, but I hope it is a concrete reaction to the general tenor of Mr. Lubetzky's remarks and the general subject posed.Ex: These were gentlemen whose forebears had upset Elizabeth I by encouraging the people to think a little too much for themselves and who proved very difficult to control.* en el año del Señor = in the year of our Lord.* nada es gratis en la viña del Señor = there is no such thing as a free lunch, there is no such thing as a free ride.* señor feudal = suzerain.* * *1 ( delante del n) ( fam)(uso enfático): ha conseguido un señor puesto she's got herself a really good jobfue una señora fiesta it was some party o quite a party! ( colloq)2(libre): eres muy señor de hacer lo que quieras you're completely free to do as you likeAte busca un señor there's a man o gentleman looking for youla señora del último piso the lady who lives on the top floorpeluquería de señoras ladies' hairdresser'sla señora de la limpieza the cleaning lady[ S ] señoras ladies, womentiene 20 años pero se viste muy de señora she's only 20 but she dresses a lot olderes todo un señor he's a real gentlemantiene ínfulas de gran señora she gives herself airs and graces, she fancies herself as some sort of lady ( BrE)Compuesto:feminine companionB(dueño, amo): el señor/la señora de la casa the gentleman/the lady of the house ( frml)los vasallos debían fidelidad a sus señores ( Hist) the vassals owed allegiance to their lordsCompuesto:masculine feudal lordC ( Relig)1recibir al Señor to receive the body of ChristDios, nuestro Señor the Lord GodNuestro Señor Jesucristo our Lord Jesus Christnuestro hermano que ahora descansa or duerme en el Señor our brother who is now at peace2D1saludos a tu señora give my regards to your wifela señora de Jaime está muy enferma Jaime's wife is very ill2buenas tardes, Señor López good afternoon, Mr LópezSeñora de Luengo, ¿quiere pasar? would you go in please, Mrs/Ms Luengo?¿avisaste a la señora (de) Fuentes? did you tell Mrs/Ms Fuentes?los señores de Paz Mr and Mrs Pazya tenemos en nuestras manos los documentos enviados por los señores Gómez y López ( frml); we have now received the documents from Messrs. Gómez and López ( frml)2(uso popular, con nombres de pila): ¿cómo está, Señora Cristina? ≈ how are you Mrs Fuentes?, ≈ how are you, Mrs F? ( colloq)la señora Cristina/el señor Miguel no está ≈ Mrs Fuentes/Mr López is not at home3 ( frml)(con otros sustantivos): el señor alcalde no podrá asistir the mayor will not be able to attendla señora directora está ocupada the director is busysalude a su señor padre/señora madre de mi parte ( ant); please convey my respects to your father/mother ( dated)4 ( frml)(sin mencionar el nombre): perdón, señor/señora, ¿tiene hora? excuse me, could you tell me the time?pase señor/señora come in, pleaseseñoras y señores ladies and gentlemen¿se lleva ésa, señora? will you take that one, Madam? ( frml)muy señor mío/señores míos ( Corresp) Dear Sir/SirsTeresa Chaves — ¿señora o señorita? Teresa Chaves — Miss, Mrs or Ms?los señores han salido Mr and Mrs Paz are not at home¿el señor/la señora va a cenar en casa? will you be dining in this evening, sir/madam? ( frml)5(uso enfático): ¿y lo pagó él? — pues sí, señor you mean he paid for it? — he did indeed o ( colloq) he sure didno, señor/señora, no fue así oh, no! that's not what happenedno, señor, no pienso prestárselo there's no way I'm going to lend it to him* * *
Multiple Entries:
Señor
señor
señor◊ - ñora sustantivo masculino, femenino
1
(f) lady;
(f) lady;
2 (dueño, amo):◊ el señor/la señora de la casa the gentleman/the lady of the house (frml)
3 (Relig)a)◊ Señor sustantivo masculino
Lordb)◊ Señora sustantivo femenino: Nuestra Sseñora de Montserrat Our Lady of Montserrat
4
5 ( tratamiento de cortesía)
(f) Mrs;
b) (frml) ( con otros sustantivos):
Sseñor Director (Corresp) Dear Sir, Sir (frml)c) (frml) ( sin mencionar el nombre):◊ perdón, señor ¿tiene hora? excuse me, could you tell me the time?;
muy señor mío/señores míos (Corresp) Dear Sir/Sirs;
Teresa Chaves — ¿señora o señorita? Teresa Chaves — Miss, Mrs or Ms?;
los señores han salido Mr and Mrs Paz (o López etc) are not at home
señor sustantivo masculino
1 (hombre) man, gentleman
2 sir (en inglés británico indica una posición social inferior) señor, se le ha caído la cartera, excuse me, you have dropped your wallet 3 señoras y señores, ladies and gentlemen
4 (tratamiento) Mr: ha llegado el Sr. Gómez, Mr Gómez is here
el señor presidente está reunido, the President is in a meeting
5 (en correspondencia) estimado señor, Dear Sir
6 Hist lord
7 Rel El Señor, the Lord
8 (persona respetable) es todo un señor y no hace caso de habladurías, he doesn't pay the slightest bit of attention to idle chatter, he's a real gentleman
9 familiar (grande, importante) el joven principiante se ha convertido en un señor actor, the inexperienced young actor has become a star
Recuerda que no se usa Mr o Mrs solo con el nombre de pila, excepto cuando un "criado" está hablando con su "señor". En todo caso debes decir Mr Miguel más el apellido o Mr más el apellido. La misma regla se aplica también a Mrs y Ms.
' señor' also found in these entries:
Spanish:
abierta
- abierto
- ama
- amo
- audiencia
- caballero
- de
- don
- estimada
- estimado
- Excemo.
- Excmo.
- N. S.
- señora
- señorita
- señorito
- Sr.
- el
- encantado
- mío
- parte
- rogar
English:
dear
- esquire
- follow-up
- gent
- lord
- master
- mister
- Mr
- Mrs
- Ms
- outstanding
- sir
- worship
- Epiphany
- gentleman
- squire
* * *señor, -ora♦ adj1. [refinado] noble, refined[excelente] wonderful, splendid;tienen una señora casa/un señor problema that's some house/problem they've got♦ nm1. [tratamiento] [antes de apellido, nombre, cargo] Mr;el señor López Mr López;los señores Ruiz Mr and Mrs Ruiz;¿están los señores (Ruiz) en casa? are Mr and Mrs Ruiz in?;dile al señor Miguel que gracias say thanks to Miguel from me;¡señor presidente! Mr President!;el señor director les atenderá enseguida the manager will see you shortly2. [tratamiento] [al dirigir la palabra] Sir;pase usted, señor do come in, do come in, Sir;¡oiga señor, se le ha caído esto! excuse me! you dropped this;señores, debo comunicarles algo gentlemen, there's something I have to tell you;¿qué desea el señor? what would you like, Sir?;sí, señor yes, Sir;Muy señor mío, Estimado señor [en cartas] Dear Sir;Muy señores míos [en cartas] Dear Sirs3. [hombre] man;llamó un señor preguntando por ti there was a call for you from a man;el señor de la carnicería the man from the butcher's;en el club sólo dejaban entrar a (los) señores they only let men into the club;un señor mayor an elderly gentleman;señores [en letrero] men, gents4. [caballero] gentleman;es todo un señor he's a real gentleman;vas hecho un señor con ese traje you look like a real gentleman in that suit5. [dueño] owner;Formal¿es usted el señor de la casa? are you the head of the household?7. [noble, aristócrata] lordHist señor feudal feudal lord;señor de la guerra warlordNuestro Señor Our Lord;¡Señor, ten piedad! Lord, have mercy upon us!9. [indica énfasis]sí señor, eso fue lo que ocurrió yes indeed, that's exactly what happened;¡sí señor, así se habla! excellent, that's what I like to hear!;no señor, estás muy equivocado oh no, you're completely wrong;a mí no me engañas, no señor you can't fool ME♦ interjGood Lord!;¡Señor, qué manera de llover! Good Lord, look how it's raining!* * *m Lord* * *1) : gentleman m, man m, lady f, woman f, wife f2) : Sir m, Madam festimados señores: Dear Sirs3) : Mr. m, Mrs. f4) : lord m, lady fel Señor: the Lord* * *señor n¿quién es ese señor? who's that man?2. (con apellido) Mr3. (de cortesía) sirsí, señor yes, sir -
7 poder
m.1 power (mando, competencia).estar en/hacerse con el poder to be in/to seize powerpoder adquisitivo purchasing powerpoder calorífico calorific valuepoder de convicción persuasive powerstener poder de convocatoria to be a crowd-pullerel poder ejecutivo/legislativo/judicial the executive/legislature/judiciary (personas)poderes fácticos the church, military and presspoderes públicos public authoritiesEl poder corrompe a los indecisos Power corrupts the undecided.2 power, authorization.dar poderes a alguien para que haga algo to authorize somebody to do somethingpor poderes by proxypoder notarial power of attorney3 faculty.4 proxy, letter of delegation, power of attorney, letter of attorney.Ella se casó usando un poder She married using a proxy.v.1 can, to be able to.no puedo decírtelo I can't tell you, I'm unable to tell you2 can, may (tener permiso).no puedo salir por la noche I'm not allowed to o I can't go out at night¿puedo fumar aquí? may I smoke here?¿se puede? may I come in?3 can (ser capaz moralmente).no podemos portarnos así con él we can't treat him like that4 may, can (tener posibilidad, ser posible).puede estallar la guerra war could o may break outpodías haber ido en tren you could have gone by train¡podría habernos invitado! she could o might have invited us! (expresa enfado)puede que llueva it may o might rain¿vendrás mañana? — puede will you come tomorrow? — I may dopuede ser perhaps, maybe5 to be stronger than.tú eres más alto, pero yo te puedo you may be taller than me, but I could still beat you up6 to can, to may, to be able to, to be apt to.Ella puede correr She is able to run.7 to might, to stand to.Ella podría surgir She might rise above.8 to be capable.* * *Present IndicativePast IndicativeFuture IndicativeConditionalPresent SubjunctiveImperfect SubjunctiveFuture SubjunctiveImperative* * *1. verb1) can2) to be able3) may2. noun m.1) power2) control3) possession4) strength, force* * *1. VERBO AUXILIAR1) (=tener la posibilidad o capacidad de)puedo hacerlo solo — I can do it on my own o by myself
¿se puede llamar por teléfono desde aquí? — can you phone from here?
no puede venir — he can't o cannot come
no ha podido venir — he couldn't come, he was unable to come
2) (=tener permiso para)puedes irte — you can o may go
¿puedo usar tu teléfono? — can o may I use your phone?
¿puedo abrir la ventana? — can o may I open the window?
aquí no se puede fumar — you aren't allowed to smoke here, you can't smoke here
3) [en peticiones]¿puedes/puede darme un vaso de agua? — can I/may I have a glass of water please?
¿me puede usted decir cuándo sale el autobús? — can o could you tell me when the bus leaves?
4) [indicando eventualidad]puede o podría estar en cualquier sitio — it could o might be anywhere
¡cuidado, te puedes hacer daño! — careful, you could o might hurt yourself!
podías haberte roto una pierna — you could o might have broken your leg
5) [indicando obligación moral]¡no pueden tratarnos así! — they can't treat us like this!
6) [en cálculos, aproximaciones]¿qué edad puede tener? — I wonder what age he is?, how old do you reckon he is?
7) [en sugerencias]8) [en reproches]¡podías habérmelo dicho! — you could o might have told me!
habría podido ser más amable — she could o might have been a bit nicer
¡al menos podrías disculparte! — you could at least say sorry!
2. VERBO INTRANSITIVO1) (=tener la posibilidad o capacidad)¡no puedo más! — (=estoy agotado) I can't go on!; (=estoy desesperado) I can't cope any more!; (=he comido mucho) I can't eat another thing!
2) (=tener permiso)¿se puede? — may I come in?
¿puedo? — may I?
3) (=tener dominio, influencia)los que pueden — those who can, those who are able
el dinero puede mucho — money can do almost anything, money talks
poder conpoder a algn: yo le puedo — I'm a match for him; [entre niños] I could have him *
¿puedes con la maleta? — can you manage the suitcase?
no puedo con él — (=no puedo controlarle) I can't handle him; (=pesa mucho) he's too heavy for me
4) [en locuciones]•
a más no poder, es tonto a más no poder — he's as stupid as they come•
no poder por menos que, no pude por menos que decirle lo que pensaba de él — I just had to tell him what I thought of himsu actitud me pudo — his attitude annoyed me o got on my nerves
3.VERBO IMPERSONALpuede (ser) (=es posible) maybe, it may be so, perhapspuede (ser) que ({+ subjun}9})¡no puede ser! — that can't be!, that's impossible!
puede (ser) que esté en la biblioteca — he could o may be in the library, perhaps he's in the library
puede (ser) que tenga uno ya — he may o might have one already
puede (ser) que no venga — he may o might not come
puede (ser) que tenga razón — she may o could be right
4. SUSTANTIVO MASCULINO1) (=capacidad, facultad) powerpoder de convocatoria, tienen un gran poder de convocatoria — they really pull in the crowds, they're real crowd-pullers *
2) (=autoridad, influencia) powerejercen un poder enorme sobre la juventud — they have a lot of power o influence over young people
no tienen poder para oponerse a estas medidas — they are not powerful enough to oppose these measures
3) (Pol)¡el pueblo al poder! — power to the people!
¡Herrera al poder! — Herrera for leader!
•
bajo el poder de algn, estar en el poder, ocupar el poder — to be in power•
el cuarto poder — the fourth estate4) (=fuerza, eficacia)este medicamento no tiene poder contra la tuberculosis — this drug is ineffective o isn't effective against tuberculosis
5) (=potestad)pl poderes powersles dieron amplios poderes para dirigir la empresa — they were given wide-ranging powers to run the company
tiene plenos poderes para intervenir en el asunto — he has full authority to intervene in the matter
6) (Jur)7) (=posesión) possessionesa información está u obra en poder de la juez — that information is in the hands of the judge, that information is in the judge's possession
•
pasar a poder de algn — to pass to sb, pass into sb's possession8) (Fís, Mec) power9) LAm (=persona) drug pusher* * *Iverbo auxiliar¿cuándo podrá darme una respuesta? — when will you be able to o when can you give me an answer?
no pudo asistir a la reunión — he was unable to o he couldn't attend the meeting
¿pudiste hacerlo sola? — were you able to do it on your own?
¿puedo servirme otro? — can o may I have another one?
¿le puedo hacer una sugerencia? — may I make a suggestion?
¿podría irme un poco más temprano hoy? — could I leave a little earlier today?
¿se puede? - adelante! — may I? - come in
3) ( expresando derecho moral)4)a) (en quejas, reproches)¿cómo pudiste hacer una cosa así? — how could you do such a thing?
podías or podrías haberme avisado — you could o might have warned me!
b) ( en sugerencias)c) ( solicitando un favor)¿puedes bajar un momento? — can you come down for a moment?
¿podrías hacerme un favor? — could you do me a favor?
poder con algo/alguien: ¿puedes con todo eso? can you manage all that?; no puedo con esta maleta I can't manage this suitcase; no pudo con el alemán y lo dejó he couldn't get to grips with German and he gave up; con este niño no hay quien pueda! this child is just impossible!; podérsela con algo — (Chi fam) to cope with something
6) (en locs)a más no poder: comió a más no poder he ate until he was fit to burst; corrimos a más no poder we ran as fast as we could; es feo a más no poder he's as ugly as they come; no poder más: estoy que no puedo más ( cansado) I'm exhausted; ( lleno) I can't eat anything else; ya no puedo más con este niño I'm at the end of my tether with this child; ya no puedo más, me está desquiciando I can't go on like this, it's driving me mad; no poder (por) menos que: no pude menos que sentirme halagado I couldn't help feeling flattered; no pudo menos que reconocer — she had no alternative but to admit
7) (fam) (+ me, te, le etc)a) ( ganar)él es más alto, pero tú le puedes — he's taller than you but you can beat him
b) (Méx) ( doler)8) (con idea de eventualidad, posibilidad)te podrías or podías haber matado — you could have killed yourself!
9) (en 3a pers)no puede ser que no lo sepa — he must know
no puede ser que ya haya terminado — he can't have finished already
si puede ser or (Esp) a poder ser — if possible
puede (ser) que tengas razón — you may o could be right
II- puede que sí, puede que no — maybe, maybe not
1)a) (control, influencia) powertiene mucho poder en el pueblo — he has a great deal of power o influence in the village
estamos/nos tiene en su poder — we are/she has us in her power
caer en poder de alguien — ciudad/país to fall to somebody
b) (Pol)tomar el poder — to take o seize power
detenta el poder desde hace 20 años — (frml) he has held power for 20 years
2) ( posesión)la carta está en poder de... — the letter is in the hands of...
obra en su poder la copia del acta — (frml) you have in your possession a copy of the minutes
3)a) (derecho, atribución)tener amplios/plenos poderes para hacer algo — to have wide-ranging powers/full authority to do something
b) (Der) ( documento) letter of authorization; ( hecho ante notario) power of attorneycasarse por poder (AmL) or (Esp) por poderes — to get married by proxy
4)a) (capacidad, facultad) powerb) (de motor, aparato) power•* * *Iverbo auxiliar¿cuándo podrá darme una respuesta? — when will you be able to o when can you give me an answer?
no pudo asistir a la reunión — he was unable to o he couldn't attend the meeting
¿pudiste hacerlo sola? — were you able to do it on your own?
¿puedo servirme otro? — can o may I have another one?
¿le puedo hacer una sugerencia? — may I make a suggestion?
¿podría irme un poco más temprano hoy? — could I leave a little earlier today?
¿se puede? - adelante! — may I? - come in
3) ( expresando derecho moral)4)a) (en quejas, reproches)¿cómo pudiste hacer una cosa así? — how could you do such a thing?
podías or podrías haberme avisado — you could o might have warned me!
b) ( en sugerencias)c) ( solicitando un favor)¿puedes bajar un momento? — can you come down for a moment?
¿podrías hacerme un favor? — could you do me a favor?
poder con algo/alguien: ¿puedes con todo eso? can you manage all that?; no puedo con esta maleta I can't manage this suitcase; no pudo con el alemán y lo dejó he couldn't get to grips with German and he gave up; con este niño no hay quien pueda! this child is just impossible!; podérsela con algo — (Chi fam) to cope with something
6) (en locs)a más no poder: comió a más no poder he ate until he was fit to burst; corrimos a más no poder we ran as fast as we could; es feo a más no poder he's as ugly as they come; no poder más: estoy que no puedo más ( cansado) I'm exhausted; ( lleno) I can't eat anything else; ya no puedo más con este niño I'm at the end of my tether with this child; ya no puedo más, me está desquiciando I can't go on like this, it's driving me mad; no poder (por) menos que: no pude menos que sentirme halagado I couldn't help feeling flattered; no pudo menos que reconocer — she had no alternative but to admit
7) (fam) (+ me, te, le etc)a) ( ganar)él es más alto, pero tú le puedes — he's taller than you but you can beat him
b) (Méx) ( doler)8) (con idea de eventualidad, posibilidad)te podrías or podías haber matado — you could have killed yourself!
9) (en 3a pers)no puede ser que no lo sepa — he must know
no puede ser que ya haya terminado — he can't have finished already
si puede ser or (Esp) a poder ser — if possible
puede (ser) que tengas razón — you may o could be right
II- puede que sí, puede que no — maybe, maybe not
1)a) (control, influencia) powertiene mucho poder en el pueblo — he has a great deal of power o influence in the village
estamos/nos tiene en su poder — we are/she has us in her power
caer en poder de alguien — ciudad/país to fall to somebody
b) (Pol)tomar el poder — to take o seize power
detenta el poder desde hace 20 años — (frml) he has held power for 20 years
2) ( posesión)la carta está en poder de... — the letter is in the hands of...
obra en su poder la copia del acta — (frml) you have in your possession a copy of the minutes
3)a) (derecho, atribución)tener amplios/plenos poderes para hacer algo — to have wide-ranging powers/full authority to do something
b) (Der) ( documento) letter of authorization; ( hecho ante notario) power of attorneycasarse por poder (AmL) or (Esp) por poderes — to get married by proxy
4)a) (capacidad, facultad) powerb) (de motor, aparato) power•* * *poder11 = force, strength, power, leverage, authority, clout, might, muscle power, power of attorney, sway.Ex: Her reason admitted the force of his arguments, but her instinct opposed it.
Ex: The strength of the acetone rinsing on the strength of the paper is investigated, and its efficiency in removing NM2P is also examined using gas liquid chromatography.Ex: She added that she felt sorry for the assistant because he had so little power.Ex: At certain times, dubious interpretations of the rules have even been used as leverage in gaining ground on matters of dispute between Community partners.Ex: One of the great virtues of networking is that it democratizes access to information and access to authority.Ex: IT executives would like to see their role in the organization elevated, giving them more ' clout', stature and visibility.Ex: Gradually many of these conquerors came to realize that, although military might was necessary to gain control over an area, sheer force of arms was not sufficient to govern effectively.Ex: Their development, particularly for replacing human muscle power, has been in parallel with that of information technology, but largely independent of it.Ex: A power of attorney is a legal instrument that is used to delegate legal authority to another.Ex: During this period Africa was influenced by external forces as the Islamic states of the north extended their sway south.* abusar del poder = lord over, lord it over.* abuso de poder = abuse of power.* altas esferas del poder, las = echelons of power, the.* ansioso de poder = power-hungry.* asumir poder = assume + power.* ceder las riendas del poder = hand over + the reins of power.* círculo de poder = circle of power.* con ansias de poder = power-hungry.* conceder poderes = give + powers.* con hambre de poder = power-hungry.* con poder = powerful.* con sed de poder = power-hungry.* control del poder = hold on power.* dar poderes = give + powers.* dejar sin poder = disempower.* división de poderes = division of powers.* ejercer poder = wield + power, exercise + power.* en el poder = in office.* equilibrio de poder = balance of power.* estructura de poder = power structure.* frecuentar los pasillos del poder = stalk + the corridors of power.* gente de poder = wielders of power, powerful people.* gobierno en el poder = ruling government.* grupo de poder = power group.* hambriento de poder = power-hungry.* igualdad de poder = parity of power.* inversión de poderes = power reversal.* jerarquía de poder = scalar chain.* llevar al poder = bring + Nombre + to power.* los poderes fáticos = the powers-that-be.* los que detentan el poder = the powers-that-be.* lucha de poderes = power struggle.* lucha por el poder = power struggle.* luchar de poderes = battle of wills.* partido en el poder, el = ruling party, the.* pasar las riendas del poder a = hand + the reins over to.* pasillos del poder, los = corridors of power, the.* perder poder = lose + power.* pérdida de poder = disempowerment.* poder adquisitivo = spending power, purchasing power, buying power.* poder colectivo = collective power.* poder curativo = healing power.* poder de atracción = drawing power.* poder de curación = healing power.* poder de discriminación = discretion.* poder de enganche = holding power.* poder del estado = state power.* poder de negociación = bargaining power.* poder de representación = power of representation.* poder de retención = holding power.* poder divino = divine power.* poder económico = economic leverage.* poder ejecutivo = chief executive, executive arm, executive power.* poder ejecutivo, el = Executive, the.* poder estatal = state power.* poder imperial = imperial power.* poder judicial = judicial arm, judicial system.* poder judicial, el = judiciary, the.* poder legal = statutory power.* poder legislativo = legislative power, legislative arm.* poder mágico = magical power, magic power.* poder notarial = power of attorney.* poder político = political power.* poder presidencial = presidential power.* poder público = public power, public authority.* poder remunerativo = earning power, earning capacity.* poder sobrenatural = supernatural power.* política del poder = power politics.* por poderes = by proxy.* posición de poder = position power.* quitar el poder = disempower.* relación de poder = power relationship.* relaciones de poder = power relations.* sediento de poder = power-hungry.* subida al poder = seizure of power.* subir al poder = rise to + power.* tener el poder = be the boss, call + the shots, call + the tune, rule + the roost.* tener el poder de = have + the power to.* tener las riendas del poder = hold + the reins of power.* tomar el poder = take + power.* tomar las riendas del poder = take + the reins of power.poder22 = be able to, be capable of, can, have + the opportunity, may, qualify for, manage to.Ex: Thus the electronic journal (e-journal) is a concept where scientists are able to input ideas and text to a computer data base for their colleagues to view, and similarly to view the work of others.
Ex: Main classes are thus only capable of precise definition in the contexts of particular classification schemes.Ex: When used by skilled abstractors this mixture of styles can achieve the maximum transmission of information, within a minimum length.Ex: Every librarian, regardless of his government's policy, has the opportunity, if he has the courage, to open the avenues of books and ideas a little wider.Ex: My second point may be a slightly tangential, but I hope it is a concrete reaction to the general tenor of Mr. Lubetzky's remarks and the general subject posed.Ex: FIAC has drawn up a list of criteria to determine whether an advice centre qualifies for membership of the Federation.Ex: Tom Hernandez tried not to show how sad he felt about his friends' leaving, and managed to keep up a cheerful facade until the party broke up.* Algo por lo que se puede cobrar = billable.* al que no se puede dejar de faltar = unmissable.* como mejor + poder = as best + Pronombre + can.* cuando antes pueda = at + Posesivo + earliest convenience.* de modo que + poder + oír = within earshot of.* en el que se puede buscar = searchable.* estar tan bueno que no se puede dejar de comer = moreish, moreish.* hacerlo lo mejor que Uno pueda = do + Posesivo + utmost.* hacer lo mejor que Uno pueda = put + Posesivo + best into.* hacer lo mejor que Uno puede = try + Posesivo + heart out.* hacer todo lo que Uno pueda = do + Posesivo + best, do + the best + Nombre + may, do + the best + Nombre + can.* hacer todo lo que Uno pueda (dado) = do + the best possible (with).* lo suficientemente lejos como para no poder oír = out of earshot.* muy bien + podría + Verbo = might + well + Verbo.* muy bien + puede + Verbo = may well + Verbo.* nada puede estar más apartado de la realidad = nothing can be further from the truth.* noche sin poder dormir = sleepless night.* no poder = be unable to, cannot, can't [cannot].* no poder aguantar a Alguien = have + it in for + Nombre.* no poder conciliar el sueño = have + trouble sleeping.* no poder dejar de mencionar = cannot but notice.* no poder dejar de recalcar la importancia de Algo = the importance of + Nombre + cannot be stressed too strongly, cannot + give + too much emphasis + to the importance of.* no poder dormir = sleeplessness.* no poder estarse quieto = have + the fidgets, fidget.* no poder evitar + Infinitivo = cannot help + Gerundio, cannot help but + Verbo.* no poder evitar mencionar = cannot but notice.* no poder hacer más que = do + little more than.* no poder permitirse = ill afford.* no poder permitirse el lujo de = ill afford.* no poder quitarse Algo de la cabeza = can't get it out of my mind.* no poderse buscar = be unsearchable.* no poderse negar que = there + be + no denying that.* no poder ver a Alguien = have + it in for + Nombre.* no poder ver Algo o Alguien = can't stand + sight.* no pude evitar notar que = couldn't help but notice (that).* no puedo aguantarlo = can't take it.* no puedo comprender = I can't get over.* No se le puede pedir peras al olmo = You can't make a silk purse out of a sow's ear.* no se puede dejar de recalcar el + Nombre + de = the + Nombre + of + Nombre + cannot be overemphasised.* no se puede dejar de recalcar el + Nombre + of = the + Nombre + of + Nombre + cannot be overstated.* no se puede dejar de recalcar la importancia de Algo = the importance of + Nombre + cannot be overemphasised, the importance of + Nombre + cannot be overstated.* personas que no pueden salir de casa = homebound, the.* poder contar con = be there for + Pronombre, be there for + Pronombre.* poder + Infinitivo = succeed in + Gerundio.* poderse afirmar que = it + be + safe to say that.* poderse contestar = be answerable.* poderse integrar en = be integrable in.* poderse localizar = be locatable.* poder utilizarse = be usable.* por el que se puede cobrar = chargeable.* puede muy bien ser = could well be.* puede muy bien ser que = it may well be that.* puede que = maybe.* puede que al final sea para bien = be a blessing in disguise.* ¿Puede repetir? = I beg your pardon?, I beg your pardon?.* que no se le puede dar un nombre = unnameable.* que no se puede conseguir = unobtainable.* que no se puede entregar = undeliverable.* que no se puede hacer cumplir = unenforceable.* que no se puede identificar con un término = unnameable.* que no se puede uno perder = unmissable.* que puede causar detención = arrestable.* que puede demostrarse = demonstrably.* que puede salir en préstamo = loanable.* que puede ser apilado = stacking.* que puede ser usado a través de la web = web-compliant.* querer es poder = where there's a will there's a way.* que se le puede dar un nombre = nameable.* que se puede arreglar = fixable.* que se puede buscar = searchable.* que se puede cambiar de tamaño = resizeable [re-sizeable].* que se puede escuchar = playable.* que se puede hacer cumplir = enforceable.* que se puede identificar con un término = nameable.* que se puede imprimir = printable.* que se puede quitar = detachable.* que se puede separar = detachable.* que se puede visualizar = viewable.* sálvese el que pueda = free-for-all.* sálvese quien pueda = the devil take the hindmost, every man for himself, let battle commence.* se puede = is to be.* siempre que uno puede dedicarle el tiempo = in + Posesivo + own time.* sin poder contenerse = helplessly.* sin poder dormir = sleepless.* sin poder extinguirlo = inextinguishably.* sin poder hacer nada = helplessly.* tan sorprendente como pueda parecer = as amazing as it seems.* todavía + poderse + escuchar los ecos de = echo + still resound from.* * *A tener la capacidad deB expresando idea de permisoC expresando un derecho moralD1 en quejas, reproches2 en sugerencias3 solicitando un favorA1 poder con algo/alguien2 el dinero lo puede todoB en locucionesC1 vencer, ganar2 dolerA con idea de eventualidadB en tercera personaA(tener la capacidad o posibilidad de): ven en cuanto puedas come as soon as you canno puedo pagar tanto I can't pay that much¿cómo que no puedes? what do you mean, you can't do it ( o you can't come etc)?no podía dejar de reír I couldn't stop laughingno va a poder venir he won't be able to come¿cuándo podrá darme una respuesta definitiva? when will you be able to o when can you give me a firm answer?no pude convencerla I couldn't persuade herno pudo asistir a la reunión he was unable to o he couldn't attend the meeting¿pudiste hacerlo sola? did you manage to do it o were you able to do it on your own?hicimos todo lo que pudimos por ayudarlos we did everything in our power o everything we could to help themno se puede valer por sí mismo he can't manage by himselfno habría podido hacerlo sin tu ayuda I wouldn't have been able to do it o I couldn't have done it without your helpno debe (de) haber podido encontrarlo she obviously couldn't find it o can't have found it¡este niño no se puede estar quieto ni un minuto! this child just won't o can't keep still for a minute!con aquel ruido no se podía trabajar it was impossible to work o you couldn't work with that noise going on¿sabes que se han prometido? — ¡no te (lo) puedo creer! do you know they're engaged? — you're joking! o I don't believe it!B(expresando idea de permiso): ¿puedo servirme otro? can o may I have another one?ya pueden volver la hoja you may turn the page over now¿me puedo ir? — ¡no señor! can o may I go? — no, you cannot o may not!¿sales a jugar? — no puedo, estoy castigada are you coming out to play? — I can't, I'm being kept in¿puedo pasar? may I come in?¿le puedo hacer una sugerencia? may I make a suggestion?¿podría irme un poco más temprano hoy? could I leave a little earlier today?por mí, puedes hacer lo que quieras as far as I'm concerned, you can do whatever you likeno puede comer sal he isn't allowed to eat salt¿quién te lo dijo, si se puede saber? who told you, may I ask?¿se puede? — ¡adelante! may I? — come inaquí no se puede fumar smoking is not allowed here, you can't smoke hereC(expresando un derecho moral): no podemos hacerle eso we can't do that to herdespués de lo que has trabajado, bien puedes tomarte un descanso you're entitled to o you deserve a rest after all the work you've donees lo menos que puedes hacer it's the least you can doD1(en quejas, reproches): ¿cómo pudiste hacer una cosa así? how could you do such a thing?¿cómo puedes ser tan ingrato? how can you be so ungrateful?podías or podrías haberme avisado you could o might have warned me!2(en sugerencias): podrías or podías pedírselo tú, a ti siempre te hace caso why don't you ask him? he always listens to youya te puedes ir haciendo a la idea you'd better start getting used to the idea3(solicitando un favor): ¿puedes bajar un momento? can you come down for a moment?¿podrías hacerme un favor? could you do me a favor?¿no puedes irte a jugar a otra parte? can't you go and play somewhere else?A1 poder CON algo/algn:¿tú puedes con todo eso? can you manage all that?no puedo con esta maleta I can't manage this suitcaseyo no puedo solo con la casa, los niños y la tienda I can't do the housework, look after the children and run the store all on my own, I can't cope with the house, the children and the store all on my ownno pudo con el alemán y lo dejó he couldn't get o come to grips with German and he gave up¡con este niño no hay quien pueda! this child is just impossible!no se la puede con el trabajo he can't cope with the job o manage the job2el dinero lo puede todo money talks, you can do anything if you have moneyB ( en locuciones):a más no poder: comió a más no poder he ate until he was fit to burstgana dinero a más no poder she's making pots of money ( colloq), she's making money hand over fistes feo a más no poder he's as ugly as they comecorrimos a más no poder we ran for all we were worth o as fast as we couldno poder más: estoy que no puedo más (de cansancio) I'm exhausteda mí no me des postre que ya no puedo más don't serve me any dessert, I can't eat anything elseya no puedo más con este niño I'm at the end of my tether with this childno podía más, y ese estúpido que no salía del cuarto de baño I was desperate o I was bursting to go and that idiot wouldn't come out of the bathroom ( colloq)ya no puedo más, me está desquiciando I can't go on like this, it's driving me madno poder (por) menos que: uno no puede menos que sentirse halagado one can't help feeling flatteredno puedo menos que expresar mi profunda decepción I feel I must say how deeply disappointed I amno pudo menos que reconocer que teníamos razón she had no alternative but to admit that we were rightC1 ( fam)(vencer, ganar): él es más alto pero tú le puedes he's taller than you but you can beat himtu papá no le puede al mío your dad's not as strong as minea gracioso no hay quien le pueda as a comic, there's no-one to beat him o he's unbeatable2( Méx fam) (doler): tu desprecio le puede mucho she's very hurt by your disdainful attitude, your disdainful attitude hurts her deeplynos pudo mucho la muerte de Julio we were greatly saddened o terribly upset by Julio's deathA(con idea de eventualidad, posibilidad): puede aparecer en cualquier momento he may turn up at any momentde él se puede esperar cualquier cosa anything's possible with himno sé dónde lo puedo haber puesto I don't know where I can have put itno hagas nada que pueda resultar sospechoso don't do anything that might look suspiciouspuede haber venido mientras no estábamos he may have come while we were outhace horas que están reunidos ¿de qué pueden estar hablando? they've been in that meeting for hours, what can they be talking about?te podrías or podías haber matado you could have killed yourself!un error así puede costar millones a mistake like that could cost millionsno podía haber estado más amable she couldn't have been kinderllaman a la puerta — ¿quién podrá ser a estas horas? there's someone at the door — who can o could it be at this time?podría volver a ocurrir it could happen againPilar no pudo haber sido it couldn't have been PilarB ( en tercera persona):¿nos habrá mentido? — no sé, puede ser do you think he lied to us? — I don't know, he may have done o it's possibleno puede ser que no lo sepa he must knowno puede ser que ya haya terminado he can't have finished alreadysi puede ser or ( Esp) a poder ser preferiría la cuarta fila if possible, I'd prefer row fourme habría gustado verlo pero no pudo ser I would have liked to see him but it wasn't possible o it wasn't to bepuede (ser) que tengas razón you may o could be rightpuede (ser) que no nos haya visto he may not have seen us¿vas a votar para ella? — puede que sí or puede are you going to vote for her? — maybe o I may¿lo vas a aceptar? — puede que sí, puede que no are you going to accept it? — maybe, maybe notA1 (control, influencia) powerel poder de la prensa the power of the presstiene mucho poder en el pueblo he has a great deal of power o influence o he is a very powerful man in the villagela Familia Real no tiene ningún poder the Royal Family has no powerConstantinopla cayó en poder de los turcos Constantinople fell to the Turksestamos/nos tiene en su poder we are/she has us in her power2 ( Pol):el poder powerestar en el poder to be in powertomar el poder to take o seize powerasumir el poder to assume powerdetenta el poder desde hace 20 años ( frml); he has held power for 20 yearslleva cuatro años en el poder he has been in power for four yearstoda la vida buscó el poder y la gloria all her life she sought power and fameel poder en la sombra the power behind the throneel poder corrompe power corruptsB(posesión): la carta está en poder de las autoridades the letter is in the hands of the authoritieshay que evitar que llegue a su poder we have to stop it falling into his handsobra en su poder la copia del acta ( frml); you have in your possession a copy of the minutesla solicitud ya pasó a poder de la oficina central the application has already been passed to our head officeC1(derecho, atribución): tiene amplios/plenos poderes para investigar el asunto he has wide-ranging powers/full authority to investigate the matterla entrega or transmisión de poderes the handing over o transmission of powerlos poderes de la junta son ilimitados the junta has unlimited powerslos poderes que le han sido conferidos the powers which have been vested in himla separación de poderes entre la Iglesia y el Estado the division o separation of power between the Church and the StateD1 (capacidad, facultad) powersu poder de convicción or de persuasión her power of persuasionel poder del amor/de la sugestión the power of love/of suggestiontiene poderes extrasensoriales he has extrasensory powers2 (de un motor, aparato) powerCompuestos:masculine absolute powermasculine (de una divisa, un sueldo) purchasing power, buying power; (de una persona, un grupo) purchasing power, spending powermasculine divine powerel poder ejecutivo the executivempl power of attorneympl:los poderes públicos the authoritiesel poder judicial the judiciaryel poder legislativo the legislature* * *
poder 1 ( conjugate poder) v aux
1 ( tener la capacidad o posibilidad de):
no puedo pagar tanto I can't pay that much;
no podía dormir I couldn't sleep;
no va a poder venir he won't be able to come;
no pudo asistir he was unable to o he couldn't attend;
¿pudiste hacerlo sola? were you able to do it on your own?
2a) ( expresando idea de permiso):◊ ¿puedo servirme otro? can o may I have another one?;
¿podría irme más temprano hoy? could I leave earlier today?;
puedes hacer lo que quieras you can do whatever you like;
no puede comer sal he isn't allowed to eat salt;
¿se puede? — ¡adelante! may I? — come in;
aquí no se puede fumar smoking is not allowed hereb) ( solicitando un favor):◊ ¿puedes bajar un momento? can you come down for a moment?;
¿podrías hacerme un favor? could you do me a favor?
3 ( expresando derecho moral):
4 (en quejas, reproches): podías or podrías haberme avisado you could o might have warned me!
( con idea de esfuerzo)
1 poder con algo/algn:◊ ¿puedes con todo eso? can you manage all that?;
no puedo con este niño I can't cope with this child;
estoy que no puedo más ( cansado) I'm exhausted;
( lleno) I can't eat anything else;
2 (con idea de eventualidad, posibilidad): te podrías or podías haber matado you could have killed yourself!;
podría volver a ocurrir it could happen again;
no pudo ser it wasn't possible;
puede (ser) que tengas razón you may o could be right;
puede que sí, puede que no maybe, maybe not
3 (Méx) ( doler):
poder 2 sustantivo masculino
1
estamos en su poder we are in her powerb) (Pol)
estar en el poder to be in power;
tomar el poder to take o seize power
2 ( posesión):◊ la carta está en poder de … the letter is in the hands of …
3
( hecho ante notario) power of attorney;
casarse por poder (AmL) or (Esp) por poderes to get married by proxy
4
poder adquisitivo purchasing power
poder 1 sustantivo masculino power
Jur por poderes, by proxy
Econ poder adquisitivo, purchasing power
poder 2
I verbo transitivo
1 (tener capacidad) to be able to, can: no puedo evitarlo, I can't help it
podías habernos avisado, you could/ might have warned us
2 (tener derecho o autorización) may, might, can
¿puedo repetir?, may I have a second helping?
no puede tomar carne de cerdo, he can't eat pork
las mujeres ya pueden votar, women can already vote
3 (uso impers) may, might: puede que la vea luego, I might see her later
puede que sí, puede que no, maybe, maybe not
II verbo intransitivo
1 to cope [con, with]: no puedo con todo, I can't cope
2 (vencer, tener más fuerza) to be stronger than
En el presente, can y to be able to son sinónimos. Sin embargo, en el pasado could significa que podías hacer algo, mientras que was o were able to significa que, además de poder hacerlo, lo hiciste: I could tell him the truth. Podía decirle la verdad (no sabemos si lo hice). I was able to tell him the truth. Fui capaz de decirle la verdad (lo hice). En el futuro solo podemos emplear to be able to: I will be able to do it tomorrow. Podré hacerlo mañana.
Para expresar posibilidad puedes usar may, could o might. La diferencia consiste en el grado de probabilidad que sugieren. Recuerda que may se refiere a hechos más probables que might o could: Puede que llueva mañana. It may rain tomorrow (crees que es posible). It might/ could rain tomorrow (crees que la posibilidad es más remota).
' poder' also found in these entries:
Spanish:
absoluta
- absoluto
- abusar
- abuso
- adquisitiva
- adquisitivo
- ámbito
- caber
- CGPJ
- concentrar
- continuismo
- desgaste
- desperdicio
- destronar
- desvelarse
- dominio
- entregar
- erótica
- excedente
- garra
- grabar
- grandeza
- idea
- informal
- judicial
- legislativa
- legislativo
- manifestarse
- mano
- obrar
- parcela
- remediar
- respirar
- sátrapa
- sed
- seducción
- someterse
- sugestión
- usurpar
- ver
- acumular
- anhelar
- ansia
- ansiar
- atribuir
- autoridad
- ávido
- ceder
- clavar
- confiar
English:
able
- abuse
- afford
- anything
- assume
- assumption
- can
- conform
- cope
- encroach
- fold
- form
- foursome
- get
- glad
- greed
- greediness
- greedy
- handle
- hungry
- lust
- make
- manage
- may
- might
- office
- out
- power
- power of attorney
- proxy
- purchasing power
- seize
- seizure
- spending power
- stick
- stranglehold
- take aside
- takeover
- unable
- use
- utmost
- whichever
- zenith
- could
- executive
- height
- helplessly
- judiciary
- lie
- peace
* * *poder1 nm1. [mando, autoridad] power;la gente con más poder en la organización the most powerful people in the organization;estar en el poder to be in power;perder el poder to lose power;el poder corrompe power corrupts;la separación de poderes the separation of powers;de poder a poder: un enfrentamiento de poder a poder a heavyweight contest;el partido se disputó de poder a poder it was a close contest between two excellent sidespoder absoluto absolute power;el poder ejecutivo [el gobierno] the executive;los poderes fácticos the centres of power in society;el poder judicial [los jueces] the judiciary;el poder legislativo [las cortes] the legislature;poderes públicos (public) authoritiesobra en su poder un documento comprometedor she has in her possession a compromising document;tienen en su poder a varios rehenes they have taken a number of hostages;el pueblo cayó en poder del enemigo the town fell to the enemy;la casa pasó a poder del banco ownership of the house was transferred to the bank3. [capacidad] power;un producto con gran poder de limpieza a very powerful cleaning product;tener poderes (paranormales) to be psychic, to have psychic powerspoder adquisitivo [de salario] purchasing o buying power; [de persona] disposable income;poder calorífico calorific value;poder de convicción persuasive powers;poder de convocatoria: [m5] tener poder de convocatoria to be a crowd-puller;Mil poder de disuasión deterrent force; Mil poder disuasorio deterrent force4. [autorización] power, authorization;[documento] power of attorney;dar poderes a alguien para que haga algo to authorize sb to do sth;tener plenos poderes para hacer algo to be fully authorized to do sth;por poderes by proxy;poder notarial power of attorney [witnessed by a notary]♦ vi1. [tener facultad, capacidad] can, to be able to;no puedo decírtelo I can't tell you, I'm unable to tell you;ahora mismo no podemos atenderle, llame más tarde we can't o we are unable to take your call right now, please call later;¿puede correrse un poco, por favor? could you move up a bit, please?;al final pudo salir de allí in the end she managed to get out of there;¡así no se puede hacer nada! we'll never get anywhere like this!;de poder ir, sería a partir de las siete if I manage to o can make it, it will be after seven;en cuanto pueda as soon as possible;si puedo, te llamaré I'll call you if I get the chance2. [tener permiso] can, may;no puedo salir por la noche I'm not allowed to o I can't go out at night;¿podríamos ir contigo? could we go with you?;¿podría hablar un momento con usted? could I have a word with you?;¿se pueden hacer fotos? can we o are we allowed to take photos?;¿puedo fumar aquí? may o can I smoke here?;no se puede fumar you're not allowed to smoke;¿se puede? may I come in?;¿se puede saber dónde te habías metido? might I know o would you mind telling me where you were?3. [ser capaz moralmente] can;no podemos portarnos así con él we can't treat him like that;¿cómo puedes decir una cosa así? how can you say such a thing?4. [tener posibilidad, ser posible] may, can;puede volver de un momento a otro she could come back any moment;puedo haberlo perdido I may have lost it;podías haber cogido el tren you could have caught the train;puede estallar la guerra war could o may break out;¡habría podido invitarnos!, ¡podría habernos invitado! [expresa enfado] she could o might have invited us!;[tarea, problema] to be able to cope with;¿puedes con todas las bolsas? can you manage all those bags?;no puedo con este baúl, ¿me ayudas a levantarlo? I can't lift this trunk on my own, can you give me a hand?;no poder con algo/alguien [no soportar] not to be able to stand sth/sb;no puedo con la hipocresía I can't stand hypocrisy;¡contigo no hay quien pueda! you're impossible!es avaro a más no poder he's as miserly as can be;llovía a más no poder it was absolutely pouring down;la pierna me dolía a más no poder you can't imagine how much my leg was hurting;no poder más [estar cansado] to be too tired to carry on;[estar harto de comer] to be full (up); [estar enfadado, harto] to have had enough;no pude por menos que reírme I had to laugh, I couldn't help but laugh;Fam¡ya podrás, con una máquina como esa! anyone could do it with a machine like that!;no puedo con mi alma I'm ready to drop♦ v impersonal[ser posible] may;puede que llueva it may o might rain;puede que se haya equivocado she may be wrong;¿vendrás mañana? – puede will you come tomorrow? – I may do;puede que sí o puede que no maybe, maybe not;puede ser perhaps, maybe;si puede ser, a poder ser if (at all) possible;lo siento, pero no va a poder ser I'm sorry, but it's not going to be possible;puede ser que no lo sepa she may not know;¡no puede ser que sea ya tan tarde! surely it can't be that late already!♦ vt1. [ser más fuerte que] to be stronger than;tú eres más alto, pero yo te puedo you may be taller than me, but I could still beat you up;mi coche le puede al tuyo my car is faster than yours any dayle pudo su derrota, todavía no se repone losing really got to her, she still hasn't got over it* * *I v/aux1 capacidad can, be able to;no pude hablar con ella I wasn’t able to talk to her2 permiso can, be allowed to;¿puedo ir contigo? can o may I come with you?3 posibilidad may, might;¡podías habérselo dicho! you could have o you might have told himII v/i:me puede he can beat me;es franco a más no poder fam he’s as frank as they come fam ;comimos a más no poder fam we ate to bursting point fam ;no puedo más I can’t take any more, I’ve had enough;a poder ser if possible;puede ser perhaps, maybe;¡no puede ser! it can’t be!, that can’t be right!;puede que perhaps, maybe;puede ser que no lo sepa maybe o perhaps he doesn’t know;¿se puede? can I come in?, do you mind if I come in?;no pude menos de insultarle insulting him was the least I could doen poder de alguien in s.o.’s hands;plenos poderes pl full authority sg ;por poderes, L.Am.los poder es públicos the authorities* * *poder {58} v aux1) : to be able to, canno puede hablar: he can't speakpuede llover: it may rain at any moment¿cómo puede ser?: how can that be?¿puedo ir a la fiesta?: can I go to the party?¿se puede?: may I come in?poder vi1) : to beat, to defeatcree que le puede a cualquiera: he thinks he can beat anyone2) : to be possible¿crees que vendrán? - puede (que sí): do you think they'll come? - maybe3)poder con : to cope with, to manage¡no puedo con estos niños!: I can't handle these children!4)no poder más : to have had enoughno puede más: she can't take anymore5)no poder menos que : to not be able to helpno pudo menos que asombrarse: she couldn't help but be amazedpoder nm1) : control, powerpoder adquisitivo: purchasing power2) : authorityel poder legislativo: the legislature3) : possessionestá en mi poder: it's in my hands4) : strength, forcepoder militar: military might* * *poder1 n (en general) powerpoder2 vb1. (capacidad, posibilidad) can / could / to be able to¿puedo echarte una mano? can I give you a hand?¿qué podemos comprarle? what can we buy her?¿cuándo podrás venir? when will you be able to come?2. (permiso) can / may¿puedo hablar con el jefe? can I speak to the boss?¿se puede pasar? can I come in?3. (probabilidad) may / could / mightpuede que venga, puede que no he might come, he might notpoder con to manage / to cope with -
8 dominar
v.1 to control (controlar) (pasión, nervios, caballo).era imposible dominar el vehículo it was impossible to maintain control of the vehicle2 to overcome.lo dominaba el deseo irrefrenable de besarla he was overcome by an irresistible desire to kiss her3 to master (conocer) (técnica, tema).domina varias lenguas she speaks various languages fluentlyha conseguido dominar el inglés en pocos meses he managed to acquire a good command of English within a few months4 to overlook.desde aquí se domina todo Bilbao you can see the whole of Bilbao from here5 to predominate.6 to dominate, to domineer, to bestride, to have sway over.El tirano domina al pueblo The tyrant dominates the people.Ella domina su ira She dominates her anger.7 to tower above, to dominate.El cerro domina el horizonte The hill dominates the horizon.8 to have the control, to dominate, to have ascendancy, to have the ascendancy.Ella domina She has the control.9 to calm down forcibly, to calm down.10 to take over.* * *1 (tener bajo dominio) to dominate2 (avasallar) to domineer3 (controlar) to control, restrain4 (conocer a fondo) to master5 (ver) to overlook, dominate1 (ser superior) to dominate2 (destacar) to stand out3 (predominar) to predominate1 (controlarse) to control oneself, restrain oneself* * *verb1) to dominate2) master3) prevail•* * *1. VT1) (=controlar) [+ población, territorio] to dominate; [+ países] to rule, rule over; [+ adversario] to overpower; [+ caballo] to control2) (=contener) [+ incendio, epidemia] to check, bring under control; [+ rebelión] to put down, suppress; [+ pasión] to control, master; [+ nervios, emoción] to control; [+ dolor] to overcome3) [+ técnica, tema] to master4) (=estar por encima de)la catedral domina toda la ciudad — the cathedral dominates o towers above the whole town
2. VI1) [edificio] to tower2) (=predominar) [color, rasgo] to stand out; [opinión, tendencia] to predominate3.See:* * *1.verbo transitivoa) ( controlar) <nación/territorio/persona> to dominate; <pasión/cólera> to control; <vehiculo/caballo> to controldominado por la ambición/los celos — ruled by ambition/consumed by jealousy
la policía dominó la situación en todo momento — the police had the situation under control at all times
b) < idioma> to have a good command of; <tema/asignatura> to know... very wellc) ( abarcar con la vista)d) montaña/torre to dominate2. 3.* * *= dominate, dominate + the scene, get + command of, tame, subdue, master, command, conquer, preponderate, overtake, overlook, gain + control (over/of), get + a grip on, tower above/over, pervade, hold + sway (over), be king, lord over, lord it over, keep + a tight hold on.Ex. The ideology advocated by Panizzi has since dominated not only Anglo-American but Western cataloging generally.Ex. This may have something to do with the absence of CABx, who seem to have dominated the scene in other states.Ex. The great storyteller, FC Sayers, having advised the beginner to 'steep himself in folklore until the elemental themes are part of himself,' explains how best to get command of a tale.Ex. The problem reside in the fact that they environment we seek to tame and control is an open, unstructured dynamic process, while human organizations are static and highly resistant to change.Ex. Anyway, experience had taught him that a subordinate who attempts to subdue a superordinate is almost always lost; the superordinate has too many advantages in such a contest.Ex. The library director strove to master his frustration.Ex. Very few engravers commanded the necessary artistry.Ex. The tools and technologies provided by the Internet enable scholars to communicate or disseminate information in ways which conquer the barriers of time and space.Ex. The indexing languages used in science and technology were first in the field, and still preponderate, both in areas covered and in number.Ex. E-Books, while a curiosity and a lot of fun, do not seem to be overtaking the mass market.Ex. In this sense the British Council libraries may be seen as a window, overlooking the British Isles, their virtues and characteristics.Ex. Gradually many of these conquerors came to realize that, although military might was necessary to gain control over an area, sheer force of arms was not sufficient to govern effectively.Ex. The article ' Getting a grip on change' argues that only by confronting the challenges and inevitability of change can libraries retain their relevancy in the information age.Ex. Prague represents a unique collection of historical monuments dominated by Prague Castle towering high above the city.Ex. I strongly believe that we must cultivate a more positive attitude towards change in the field of library work, and that this attitude must pervade all levels of librarianship.Ex. This ideology appealed widely to the librarian as well as the library user and held sway for nearly a quarter of a millennium when, in 1841, a catalytic event in the history of cataloging took place.Ex. Despite the electronics invasion, books are still king, and book fairs keeps on growing every year.Ex. She argues that the way yeoman farmers lorded over their wives and dependents was similar to the way wealthy planters lorded over their slaves.Ex. They believe that the main use for government is for some people to lord it over others at their expense.Ex. A study of telly-addicts has found that in 45 per cent of homes mums keep a tight hold on the remote control.----* dominar a Alguien = have + Nombre + under + Posesivo + thumb, bring + Nombre + under + Posesivo + sway.* dominar aún más = tighten + Posesivo + grip on.* dominar el miedo = conquer + fear.* dominar la situación = tame + the beast.* dominar por completo = sweep + the board.* dominar una destreza = master + skill.* dominar una técnica = master + technique.* la mano que mece la cuna es la mano que domina el mundo = the hand that rocks the cradle rules the world.* * *1.verbo transitivoa) ( controlar) <nación/territorio/persona> to dominate; <pasión/cólera> to control; <vehiculo/caballo> to controldominado por la ambición/los celos — ruled by ambition/consumed by jealousy
la policía dominó la situación en todo momento — the police had the situation under control at all times
b) < idioma> to have a good command of; <tema/asignatura> to know... very wellc) ( abarcar con la vista)d) montaña/torre to dominate2. 3.* * *= dominate, dominate + the scene, get + command of, tame, subdue, master, command, conquer, preponderate, overtake, overlook, gain + control (over/of), get + a grip on, tower above/over, pervade, hold + sway (over), be king, lord over, lord it over, keep + a tight hold on.Ex: The ideology advocated by Panizzi has since dominated not only Anglo-American but Western cataloging generally.
Ex: This may have something to do with the absence of CABx, who seem to have dominated the scene in other states.Ex: The great storyteller, FC Sayers, having advised the beginner to 'steep himself in folklore until the elemental themes are part of himself,' explains how best to get command of a tale.Ex: The problem reside in the fact that they environment we seek to tame and control is an open, unstructured dynamic process, while human organizations are static and highly resistant to change.Ex: Anyway, experience had taught him that a subordinate who attempts to subdue a superordinate is almost always lost; the superordinate has too many advantages in such a contest.Ex: The library director strove to master his frustration.Ex: Very few engravers commanded the necessary artistry.Ex: The tools and technologies provided by the Internet enable scholars to communicate or disseminate information in ways which conquer the barriers of time and space.Ex: The indexing languages used in science and technology were first in the field, and still preponderate, both in areas covered and in number.Ex: E-Books, while a curiosity and a lot of fun, do not seem to be overtaking the mass market.Ex: In this sense the British Council libraries may be seen as a window, overlooking the British Isles, their virtues and characteristics.Ex: Gradually many of these conquerors came to realize that, although military might was necessary to gain control over an area, sheer force of arms was not sufficient to govern effectively.Ex: The article ' Getting a grip on change' argues that only by confronting the challenges and inevitability of change can libraries retain their relevancy in the information age.Ex: Prague represents a unique collection of historical monuments dominated by Prague Castle towering high above the city.Ex: I strongly believe that we must cultivate a more positive attitude towards change in the field of library work, and that this attitude must pervade all levels of librarianship.Ex: This ideology appealed widely to the librarian as well as the library user and held sway for nearly a quarter of a millennium when, in 1841, a catalytic event in the history of cataloging took place.Ex: Despite the electronics invasion, books are still king, and book fairs keeps on growing every year.Ex: She argues that the way yeoman farmers lorded over their wives and dependents was similar to the way wealthy planters lorded over their slaves.Ex: They believe that the main use for government is for some people to lord it over others at their expense.Ex: A study of telly-addicts has found that in 45 per cent of homes mums keep a tight hold on the remote control.* dominar a Alguien = have + Nombre + under + Posesivo + thumb, bring + Nombre + under + Posesivo + sway.* dominar aún más = tighten + Posesivo + grip on.* dominar el miedo = conquer + fear.* dominar la situación = tame + the beast.* dominar por completo = sweep + the board.* dominar una destreza = master + skill.* dominar una técnica = master + technique.* la mano que mece la cuna es la mano que domina el mundo = the hand that rocks the cradle rules the world.* * *dominar [A1 ]vt1 (controlar) ‹nación/territorio› to dominate; ‹persona› to dominate; ‹pasión/cólera› to controltiene a los niños totalmente dominados she has the children well under her thumb o under controldominado por la ambición ruled by ambitiondominado por los celos consumed by jealousyno logró dominar su ira she couldn't contain o control her angerel equipo que dominó el encuentro the team which dominated the matchno logró dominar el vehículo/caballo he couldn't get control of the vehicle/horsela policía dominó la situación en todo momento the police had the situation under control at all times2 ‹tema/idioma›no domino el tema I'm no expert on the subjectdomina el francés she has a good command of Frenchnunca voy a poder dominar el inglés I'll never be able to master English3(abarcar con la vista): desde allí se domina toda la bahía there's a view over the whole bay from there, from there you can look out over the whole bay4 «montaña/torre» to dominate■ dominarvi«color/tendencia» to predominate; «opinión» to prevailel tema que dominó en las negociones the subject which dominated the talksel equipo visitante dominó durante el segundo tiempo the visitors dominated the second half o were on top in the second half«persona» to restrain o control oneself* * *
dominar ( conjugate dominar) verbo transitivo
‹pasión/cólera› to control;
‹vehículo/caballo› to control;◊ dominado por la ambición/los celos ruled by ambition/consumed by jealousy
‹tema/asignatura› to know … very wellc) ( abarcar con la vista):
verbo intransitivo [color/tendencia] to predominate;
[ opinión] to prevail;
[ equipo] to dominate
dominarse verbo pronominal [ persona] to restrain o control oneself
dominar
I verbo transitivo
1 (un pueblo, país) to dominate, rule
2 (contener, controlar) to control
3 (conocer perfectamente: un idioma) to speak very well
(: un asunto, una actividad) to master
4 (con la vista) to overlook
II verbo intransitivo
1 to dominate
2 (un color, una característica) to stand out
' dominar' also found in these entries:
Spanish:
abarcar
- imperar
- imponerse
- vencer
- conocer
- dejar
- reducir
- someter
- sujetar
English:
control
- curb
- dominate
- hold down
- master
- overpower
- pervade
- restrain
- subdue
- sway
- tower
- over
- rule
* * *♦ vt1. [controlar] [país, territorio, pueblo] to dominate, to rule (over);[persona, caballo] to control; [emociones, nervios] to control, to keep under control; [situación] to be in control of; [incendio, epidemia] to bring under control; [rebelión] to put down; [partido] to dominate;la guerrilla domina toda esta zona guerrillas control this entire area;la policía logró dominar a los alborotadores the police managed to bring the troublemakers under control;tiene al marido dominado she has her husband under her thumb;era imposible dominar el vehículo it was impossible to maintain control of the vehicle;no supo dominar sus nervios she couldn't control her nervousness;el equipo local dominó el partido en todo momento the local team dominated the game from the beginning2. [sujeto: pasión, nervios, emociones] to overcome;lo dominaba el deseo irrefrenable de besarla he was overcome by an irresistible desire to kiss her3. [ser experto en] [técnica, tema] to master;[lengua] to be fluent in;domina a la perfección los temas de contabilidad he has a perfect mastery of accounting;domina varias lenguas she speaks various languages fluently;ha conseguido dominar el inglés en pocos meses he managed to acquire a good command of English in a few months;¡cómo domina el balón! what great ball control!4. [divisar] to overlook;desde aquí se domina todo Bilbao you can see the whole of Bilbao from here5. [destacar por encima de] to dominate;el castillo domina el pueblo the castle dominates the town♦ vi[predominar] to predominate;una zona donde domina el voto socialista an area with a predominantly socialist vote* * *I v/t2 idioma have a good command ofII v/i dominate* * *dominar vt1) : to dominate2) : to master, to be proficient atdominar vi: to predominate, to prevail* * *dominar vb1. (en general) to dominate2. (tener bajo poder) to rule over3. (controlar) to control5. (idioma) to be fluent in6. (otras materias) to be good at / to be an expert on -
9 más
conj.but.* * *1 but* * *conj.* * *CONJ but* * *conjunción (liter) but* * *= extra, more, plus, topmost [top most].Ex. Each step of subdivision involves an extra character (see below).Ex. The command function 'MORE' is used to request the system to display more information, for instance to continue the alphabetical display of terms.Ex. All of these (except PREVIOUS and NEXT), plus some additional commands are also available from the Command Menu.Ex. A list of the topmost cited papers of the Proceedings is presented.----* acercarse aun más = bring + closer together, come closer together, draw + closer together.* acercarse más aun = bring + closer together, come closer together, draw + closer together.* ahora más que nunca = now more than ever.* alcanzar cotas más altas = raise to + greater heights.* algo más = anything else.* algunos años más tarde = some years on.* a más largo plazo = longer-term.* a más..., más... = the + Comparativo..., the + Comparativo....* a más tardar = at the latest.* análisis más minucioso = closer examination.* aprender de la forma más difícil = learn + the hard way.* aún más = Verbo + further, even further, all the more, further, furthermore, beyond that, a fortiori.* bastante más = rather more.* cada vez más = ever-growing, ever-increasing, increasingly, more and more, progressively, ever more, mushrooming, ever greater, in increasing numbers, increasing.* cada vez más abultado = swelling.* cada vez más alto = constantly rising, steadily rising, steadily growing.* cada vez más amplio = ever-widening.* cada vez más estricto = tightening.* cada vez más extendido = spreading.* cada vez más fácil = ever easier.* cada vez más lejos = further and further.* cada vez más rápido = ever faster.* cada vez más tenue = fading.* cada vez más viejo = aging [ageing].* citado más arriba = above.* con el más sumo cuidado = with utmost care.* con más antigüedad = longest-serving.* con más detalle = in most detail, in more detail.* con más frecuencia = most frequently.* con más razón aún = a fortiori.* con más vigor aun = with a vengeance.* con más virulencia aun = with a vengeance.* con más vitalidad = revitalised [revitalized, -USA].* con un filo más pronunciado = sharper-edged.* correr más deprisa que = outrun [out-run].* costumbre cada vez más frecuente = growing practice.* cuanto más = all the more so, all the more, a fortiori.* cuanto más..., más... = the + Comparativo..., the + Comparativo....* cuantos más, mejor = the more the merrier, the more the better.* cuya fecha se anunciará más adelante = at a time to be announced later.* cuya fecha se determinará más adelante = at a time to be determined later.* dar a Algo más importancia de la que tiene = oversell.* dar más de sí = go further.* dar más explicaciones = elaborate on.* darse una situación más esperanzadora = sound + a note of hope.* decir la verdad, toda la verdad y nada más que la verdad = to tell the truth, the whole truth, and nothing but the truth.* de crecimiento más rápido = fastest-growing.* de esto, de lo otro y de lo de más allá = about this and that and everything else.* de forma que resulta más fácil de entender = in digestible form.* de la forma más difícil = the hard way.* de la forma más fácil = the easy way .* de lo más = very.* de lo más + Adjetivo = most + Adjetivo.* demandar cada vez más enérgicamente = build + pressure, build + pressure.* de más = extra, one too many.* de más arriba = topmost [top most].* desarrollar aun más = develop + further.* desde un punto de vista más amplio = in a broader sense.* desde un punto de vista más general = in a broader sense.* de una manera más sencilla = in digestible form.* dicho más arriba, lo = foregoing, the.* distanciar aun más = widen + the gap between... and.* dominio de las personas con más edad = senior power.* durante las horas de más calor = during the heat of the day.* durar más que = outlive.* el más = all-time.* el más adecuado = ideally suited.* el más + Adjetivo = the most + Adjetivo.* el más allá = hereafter.* el más bajo = rock-bottom.* el más favorito del mes = pick of the month.* el más leído = the most widely read.* el más recomendado = best of breed, the.* el + Nombre + más completo = the + Nombre + to end all + Nombre.* el no va más = the be all and end all, the bee's knees, the cat's pyjamas, the cat's meow, the cat's whiskers, the dog's bollocks.* el punto más bajo = rock-bottom.* el todo es más grande que la suma de sus partes = the whole is greater than the sum of its parts.* en el momento más débil de Alguien = at + Posesivo + weakest.* enfrascado en lo más difícil = in at the deep end.* enfrascar a Alguien de lleno en lo más difícil = throw in + at the deep end, throw in + at the deep end.* enfrascarse en lo más difícil = swim in + the deep end, jump in at + the deep end.* en lo más mínimo = not in the least + Nombre Negativo.* en más de una ocasión = on more than one occasion, in more than one instance, in more than one occasion.* en más de un sentido = in more ways than one.* en su forma más básica = at its most basic.* en su nivel más bajo = at its lowest ebb.* en su punto más álgido = at its height.* en su punto más bajo = at its lowest ebb.* en tiempos más recientes = in more recent times.* en un futuro más o menos cercano = in the near future, in the near future.* en un período más o menos lejano = in the near future, in the near future.* en un sentido más amplio = in a broader sense, in a larger sense.* en un sentido más general = in a broader sense.* es más = more important, moreover.* examen más minucioso = closer examination.* examinar más detenidamente = look + closer, take + a closer look at, take + a close look.* examinar más minuciosamente = examine + in greater detail.* explicar un Tema con más detalle = expand upon/on + Tema.* forma de la curva estadística en su valor más alto = peak-shape.* ganar cada vez más importancia = go from + strength to strength.* gastar más de la cuenta = overspend.* gastarse más dinero = dig + deep.* haber todavía más = there + be + more to it than that.* hacer las leyes más estrictas = tighten + laws.* hacerle la vida más simple a todos = simplify + life for everyone.* hacerlo más llevadero = make + life easier.* hacer más consciente de Algo = heighten + awareness.* hacer más copias de Algo = produce + additional copies.* hacer más estricto = tighten.* hacer más fuerte = toughen.* hacer más preciso = tightening up.* hacer más rico = add + richness to.* hacer más riguroso = tighten, tightening up.* hacer más sofisticado = dumb up.* hacer que tenga más valor = put + a premium on.* hacerse cada vez más importante = increase in + importance.* hacerse más complejo = grow in + complexity, gain in + complexity.* hacerse más corto = grow + shorter.* hacerse más fuerte = gain in + strength, grow in + strength.* hacerse más inteligente = smarten up.* herir en lo más profundo = cut to + the heart of, cut to + the quick.* horario de apertura más amplio = extended hours.* incluso yendo más lejos = even farther afield.* invertir más dinero = dig + deep.* ir aun más lejos = go + a/one step further.* ir más allá = go + one stage further.* ir más allá de = go beyond, transcend, get beyond, go far beyond, move + beyond, take + Nombre + a/one step further/farther, go + past.* ir más allá de las posibilidades de Alguien = be beyond + Posesivo + capabilities.* ir más lejos = go + one stage further.* ir poco más allá de + Infinitivo = go little further than + Gerundio.* ir todavía más lejos = go + a/one step further.* la parte más dura de = brunt of, the.* la parte más importante = the heart of.* ley del más fuerte, la = law of the jungle, the, survival of the fittest, survival of the strongest.* libro más vendido = bestseller [best seller/best-seller].* lista de más populares = chart.* lista de más vendidos = chart.* llegar más lejos = stretch + further.* llevar aún más lejos = carry + one step further.* llevar + Nombre + aún más lejos = take + Nombre + a/one step further/farther.* lo más cercano a = the nearest thing to.* lo más destacado = highlights.* lo más detestado = pet hate.* lo más importante = most of all.* lo más interesante = highlights.* lo más mínimo = so much as.* lo más novedoso = the last word.* lo más odiado = pet hate.* lo más parecido a = the nearest thing to.* lo más probable es que = most probably.* lo más recio de = brunt of, the.* lo más recóndito = nooks and crannies.* lo que es más = what is more, what's more.* lo que es más importante = most importantly, most of all, more importantly, most important.* los más necesitados = those most in need.* más acomodados, los = better off, the.* más adelante = later, further along, later on, in due time, at a later date.* más afilado que una navaja = as sharp as a knife.* más afilado que un cuchillo = as sharp as a knife.* más alegre que unas castañuelas = as happy as Larry.* más alejado = further afield, furthest away.* más allá = further than, farther, yonder, beyond that.* más allá de = beyond, beyond all, past, beyond the range of.* más allá de cualquier duda = beyond any doubt, beyond any doubt.* más allá de eso = beyond that.* más allá de la obligación = beyond the call of duty.* más allá del deber = beyond the call of duty.* más allá de ninguna duda = beyond doubt, beyond doubt, beyond any doubt.* más allá de toda duda = beyond doubt, beyond any doubt, without a shadow of a doubt, beyond a shadow of a doubt.* más allá de toda razón = beyond reason.* más allá, el = afterlife [after-life], land of the dead, the.* más antiguo = longest-serving.* más antiguo, el = seniormost, the.* más anunciado = best-publicised [best-publicized, -USA].* más apreciado = long-cherished.* más aun = nay, beyond that, furthermore.* más bien = if you like, instead.* más bien bajo = shortish.* más bien corto = shortish.* más bien pequeño = smallish.* más bien todo lo contrario = quite the opposite, quite the contrary, quite the reverse.* más borracho que una cuba = as drunk as a lord, as drunk as a newt, as drunk as a skunk.* más bueno que un pan = as good as gold.* más cerca de = more nearly.* más claro el agua = as clear as a bell.* más claro que el agua = as clear as a bell.* más complejo de lo que parece = more than meets the eye.* más complicado de lo que parece = more than meets the eye.* más común = mainstream.* más concretamente = more to the point.* más conocido = best known, best-publicised [best-publicized, -USA], mainstream.* más conocido como = better known as.* más contento que unas castañuela = as happy as Larry.* más contento que unas pascuas = as happy as Larry.* Posesivo + más cordial enhorabuena = Posesivo + heartiest congratulations.* más corto que las mangas de una chaleco = as daft as a brush.* más corto que las mangas de un chaleco = as thick as two (short) planks, as shy as shy can be, as thick as a brick, knucklehead.* más débil de la camada, el = runt of the litter, the.* más débil del grupo, el = runt of the litter, the.* más de + Cantidad = in excess of + Cantidad, over + Cantidad, more than + Cantidad, upwards of + Cantidad.* más del 10 por ciento = double digit, double figure.* más de la cuenta = one too many.* más de la mayoría de los + Nombre = more than most + Nombre.* más de lo mismo = more of the same.* más demandado = most demanded.* más dentro = further into.* más destacado = foremost.* más de una vez = more than once.* más de un ISBN = more than one ISBN.* más de un millón = million-plus.* más de unos cuantos + Nombre = not a few + Nombre.* más difundido = best-publicised [best-publicized, -USA].* más duradero = longer-lasting.* más duro que la suela de un zapato = as tough as leather, as tough as nails, as tough as nuts, as tough as old boots, as tough as shoe leather.* más duro que una piedra = as tough as nuts, as tough as nails, as tough as leather, as tough as old boots, as tough as shoe leather.* más exactamente = more nearly.* más fácil de entender para nosotros = closer to home.* más frío que el mármol = as cold as ice.* más frío que la nieve = as cold as ice.* más frío que un témpano (de hielo) = as cold as ice.* más fuerte que un roble = as strong as an ox.* más fuerte que un toro = as strong as an ox.* más granado de la sociedad, lo = cream of society, the.* más grande = greater.* más hambre que el perro de un ciego = as hungry as a wolf, as hungry as a bear, as hungry as a hunter.* más hambre que un maestro de escuela = as hungry as a wolf, as hungry as a bear, as hungry as a hunter.* más importante = foremost.* más importante aun = more significantly.* más información = further information, further details.* más íntimo = innermost.* más largo que un día sin pan = as long as (my/your) arm.* más lejos = further afield, further away, furthest away.* más meridional = southernmost.* más necesitado = most in need.* más occidental = westernmost.* más o menos = more or less, of a sort, or so, of sorts, after a fashion, round about, roughly speaking, give or take, ballpark.* más o menos + Adverbio = relatively + Adverbio.* más o menos cuadrado = squarish.* más perdedor = losingest.* más perenne = longer-lasting.* más permanente = longer-lasting.* más prestigioso = top-rated, top-ranked.* más profundo = innermost.* más que = more... than..., rather than.* más que antes = more than ever, more... than ever before, more than ever before.* más que la suma de sus partes = Comparativo + than the sum of its parts.* más quemado que la pipa (de) un indio = completely burned-out, totally burned-out.* más que muerto = dead and buried.* más que nada = more than anything else.* más que ninguna otra cosa = beyond all else.* más que nunca = more than ever before, more than ever.* más que nunca antes = more... than ever before, more than ever before, more than ever.* más que todo lo demás = beyond all else.* más que todos nosotros juntos = more than all of us put together.* más recientemente = in more recent times, more recently.* más recóndito = innermost.* más secreto = innermost.* más septentrional = northernmost.* Posesivo + más sinceras felicitaciones = Posesivo + heartiest congratulations.* más sincero + Nombre = deeply felt + Nombre.* más sordo que una tapia = as deaf as a post.* más suave que el terciopelo = as soft as velvet.* más suave que la seda = as soft as silk.* más tarde = later on.* más tarde o más temprano = sooner or later, at one time or another.* más todavía = all the more so.* más usado = most heavily used.* más vale malo conocido que bueno por conocer = better the devil you know (than the devil you don't).* más vale pájaro en mano que ciento volando = a bird in the hand is worth two in the bush.* más vale prevenir que curar = a stitch in time saves nine, better (to be) safe than sorry.* más vale que + Subjuntivo = might + as well + Verbo.* más vale tarde que nunca = better late than never.* más valorado = highly valued.* más vendido = best selling [bestselling/best-selling], top-selling.* más veterano, el = seniormost, the.* más viejo que Matusalén = as old as Methuselah, as old as the hills, as old as the hills.* más votado = top-rated, top-ranked.* materia más general = broader subject.* menos blandeces y más mano dura = less of the carrot, more of the stick.* meter a Alguien de lleno en lo más difícil = throw in + at the deep end, throw in + at the deep end.* meterse de lleno en lo más difícil = swim in + the deep end, jump in at + the deep end.* metido en lo más difícil = in at the deep end.* mientras más, mejor = the more the merrier, the more the better.* mirada más de cerca = closer look.* miseria más absoluta = abject poverty.* muchas otras cosas más = much else besides.* muchísimo más = a whole lot more, an awful lot more.* muchísimo más + Adjetivo = infinitely + Adjetivo.* mucho más = order of magnitude, much more, much more so, a lot more, lots more.* mucho más + Adjetivo = all the more + Adjetivo.* mucho más + Adverbio = far more + Adverbio/Adjetivo.* mucho más cerca = far closer.* mucho más de = well over + Expresión Numérica.* mucho más rápido = far faster.* muchos más = a great many more.* nada + estar + más apartado de la realidad = nothing + can + be further from the truth, nothing + can + be further from the truth.* nada + estar + más lejos de la realidad = nothing + can + be further from the truth.* nada + estar + más lejos de la verdad = nothing + can + be further from the truth.* nada más = anything else, nothing else.* nada más y nada menos = as much as + Expresión Numérica.* nada más y nada menos que = in the order of + Cantidad, nothing less than.* nada más y nada menos que de = to the tune of + Cantidad.* nada más y nada menos que desde + Expresión Temporal = from as far back as + Expresión Temporal.* nada más y nada menos que + Número = as many as + Número.* nada puede estar más alejado de la realidad = nothing can be further from the truth.* nadie más = nobody else.* ni más ni menos = nothing more, nothing less, no more, no less.* no aguantar más = have had enough.* no dar más de sí = stretch + Nombre + to the limit, overstretch.* no hacer más que = do + no more than.* no importar lo más mínimo = could not care less.* no más que = in any more than.* Nombre + más o menos = Nombre + of sorts.* no poder hacer más que = do + little more than.* no saber qué más hacer = be at + Posesivo + wit's end.* no ser lo más adecuado para = ill suited to/for.* no ser más que = be nothing more than, be nothing but.* no tener la más mínima idea sobre Algo = Negativo + have + the foggiest idea.* no tener más alternativa que = have + no other option but.* no tener más remedio que = be stuck with, be left with the need to, get + stuck with.* no tener ni la más mínima posibilidad = not to have a prayer.* no tener ni la más remota posibilidad = not to have a prayer.* no voy a aguantarlo más = not going to take it any more.* Número + de más = Número + too many.* Número + veces más = Número + times as many.* Número + veces más de = Número + times the number of.* nunca más = never again.* observar con más detalle = closer look.* optar por la solución más fácil = take + the easy way out.* otro + Nombre + más = further + Nombre, yet another + Nombre.* pagando un poco más = at additional cost.* pagar más de lo que se debería = overpay.* para complicar aun más las cosas = to add to the confusion.* para confundir aun más las cosas = to add to the confusion.* para hacer más fácil = for ease of.* para más información = for further details.* para más inri = to cap it all (off), on top of everything else, but to make things worse, but to make matters worse.* para que quede más claro = for main effects.* para ser más explícito = to elaborate a little further.* pasar a cosas más agradables = on a happier note.* poco más = little else.* poner más fuerte = crank up.* ¡por lo más quieras! = Not on your life!.* por más que lo intento = for the life of me.* Posesivo + más cordial enhorabuena = Posesivo + heartiest congratulations.* Posesivo + más sinceras felicitaciones = Posesivo + heartiest congratulations.* precio de coste más margen de beneficios = cost-plus pricing.* presupuesto cada vez más pequeño = shrinking budget.* pruebas cada vez más concluyentes = mounting evidence.* quedar mucho más por hacer = much more needs to be done.* qué más = what else.* que no da más de sí = overstretched.* ¿quién más...? = who else...?.* rechazar sin más = dismiss + out of hand.* redondear al número entero más cercano = round up to + the nearest whole number.* requerir más destreza = be more of an art.* sacar más partido = get + more for + Posesivo + money.* sentir más ganas de hacer Algo = grow in + appetite.* sentirse más seguro de = gain + confidence (with/in).* separar aun más = widen + the gap between... and.* ser aun más = be all the more.* ser cada vez más importante = increase in + importance.* ser el punto más débil de Alguien = be at + Posesivo + weakest.* ser el punto más flaco de Alguien = be at + Posesivo + weakest.* ser lo más parecido a = be as close as we come to.* ser lo que a Uno más le gusta = be + Posesivo + big scene.* ser más interno = inner being.* ser más un + Nombre = be more of a + Nombre.* ser mucho más = be all the more.* ser nada más y nada menos que = be nothing less than.* siempre querer más = enough + be + not/never + enough.* signo más (+) = addition sign (+), plus sign (+).* sin la más mínima duda = without the shadow of a doubt, beyond a shadow of a doubt.* sin más = out of hand, unceremoniously, unceremonious.* sin más dilación = without (any) further ado, without (any) more ado, without warning.* sin más ni más = unceremoniously, unceremonious, for the love of it, without much ado.* sin más preámbulos = without (any) further ado, without (any) more ado.* sino más bien = rather.* sino (que) más bien = but rather.* supervivencia del más fuerte = survival of the fittest, survival of the strongest.* tarifa especial más barata = discount charge.* tener más paciencia que un santo = have + the patience of a saint.* término más específico = narrower term.* todavía más + Adjetivo = all the more + Adjetivo.* tratar con más detalle = discuss + in greater detail.* una imagen vale más que mil palabras = a picture is worth more than ten thousand words.* una pieza más en la organización = a cog in the wheel.* una vez más = again, yet again.* uno de los + Nombre + más + Adjetivo = not the least + Adjetivo + Nombre, not the least of the + Adjetivo + Nombre.* uno de los + Nombre + más importante = not the least + Nombre, not the least of + Nombre.* uno de mas = one too many.* uno más = one of equals.* uno más de tantos en la organización = a cog in the machine.* unos días más tarde = a few days later.* véase + Nombre + para más información = refer to + Nombre + for details.* vender a un precio más barato que = undercut.* vender más barato = undercut.* venderse más que = outsell.* venta a un precio más barato = undercutting.* y Dios sabe qué más = and Heaven knows what else.* y más adelante = and beyond.* y más allá = and beyond.* y mucho más = and much more.* y mucho(s) más = and more.* y poco más = and little more.* ¡y qué más da! = so what!.* y unos cuantos más = and a few others.* * *conjunción (liter) but* * *= extra, more, plus, topmost [top most].Ex: Each step of subdivision involves an extra character (see below).
Ex: The command function 'MORE' is used to request the system to display more information, for instance to continue the alphabetical display of terms.Ex: All of these (except PREVIOUS and NEXT), plus some additional commands are also available from the Command Menu.Ex: A list of the topmost cited papers of the Proceedings is presented.* acercarse aun más = bring + closer together, come closer together, draw + closer together.* acercarse más aun = bring + closer together, come closer together, draw + closer together.* ahora más que nunca = now more than ever.* alcanzar cotas más altas = raise to + greater heights.* algo más = anything else.* algunos años más tarde = some years on.* a más largo plazo = longer-term.* a más..., más... = the + Comparativo..., the + Comparativo....* a más tardar = at the latest.* análisis más minucioso = closer examination.* aprender de la forma más difícil = learn + the hard way.* aún más = Verbo + further, even further, all the more, further, furthermore, beyond that, a fortiori.* bastante más = rather more.* cada vez más = ever-growing, ever-increasing, increasingly, more and more, progressively, ever more, mushrooming, ever greater, in increasing numbers, increasing.* cada vez más abultado = swelling.* cada vez más alto = constantly rising, steadily rising, steadily growing.* cada vez más amplio = ever-widening.* cada vez más estricto = tightening.* cada vez más extendido = spreading.* cada vez más fácil = ever easier.* cada vez más lejos = further and further.* cada vez más rápido = ever faster.* cada vez más tenue = fading.* cada vez más viejo = aging [ageing].* citado más arriba = above.* con el más sumo cuidado = with utmost care.* con más antigüedad = longest-serving.* con más detalle = in most detail, in more detail.* con más frecuencia = most frequently.* con más razón aún = a fortiori.* con más vigor aun = with a vengeance.* con más virulencia aun = with a vengeance.* con más vitalidad = revitalised [revitalized, -USA].* con un filo más pronunciado = sharper-edged.* correr más deprisa que = outrun [out-run].* costumbre cada vez más frecuente = growing practice.* cuanto más = all the more so, all the more, a fortiori.* cuanto más..., más... = the + Comparativo..., the + Comparativo....* cuantos más, mejor = the more the merrier, the more the better.* cuya fecha se anunciará más adelante = at a time to be announced later.* cuya fecha se determinará más adelante = at a time to be determined later.* dar a Algo más importancia de la que tiene = oversell.* dar más de sí = go further.* dar más explicaciones = elaborate on.* darse una situación más esperanzadora = sound + a note of hope.* decir la verdad, toda la verdad y nada más que la verdad = to tell the truth, the whole truth, and nothing but the truth.* de crecimiento más rápido = fastest-growing.* de esto, de lo otro y de lo de más allá = about this and that and everything else.* de forma que resulta más fácil de entender = in digestible form.* de la forma más difícil = the hard way.* de la forma más fácil = the easy way.* de lo más = very.* de lo más + Adjetivo = most + Adjetivo.* demandar cada vez más enérgicamente = build + pressure, build + pressure.* de más = extra, one too many.* de más arriba = topmost [top most].* desarrollar aun más = develop + further.* desde un punto de vista más amplio = in a broader sense.* desde un punto de vista más general = in a broader sense.* de una manera más sencilla = in digestible form.* dicho más arriba, lo = foregoing, the.* distanciar aun más = widen + the gap between... and.* dominio de las personas con más edad = senior power.* durante las horas de más calor = during the heat of the day.* durar más que = outlive.* el más = all-time.* el más adecuado = ideally suited.* el más + Adjetivo = the most + Adjetivo.* el más allá = hereafter.* el más bajo = rock-bottom.* el más favorito del mes = pick of the month.* el más leído = the most widely read.* el más recomendado = best of breed, the.* el + Nombre + más completo = the + Nombre + to end all + Nombre.* el no va más = the be all and end all, the bee's knees, the cat's pyjamas, the cat's meow, the cat's whiskers, the dog's bollocks.* el punto más bajo = rock-bottom.* el todo es más grande que la suma de sus partes = the whole is greater than the sum of its parts.* en el momento más débil de Alguien = at + Posesivo + weakest.* enfrascado en lo más difícil = in at the deep end.* enfrascar a Alguien de lleno en lo más difícil = throw in + at the deep end, throw in + at the deep end.* enfrascarse en lo más difícil = swim in + the deep end, jump in at + the deep end.* en lo más mínimo = not in the least + Nombre Negativo.* en más de una ocasión = on more than one occasion, in more than one instance, in more than one occasion.* en más de un sentido = in more ways than one.* en su forma más básica = at its most basic.* en su nivel más bajo = at its lowest ebb.* en su punto más álgido = at its height.* en su punto más bajo = at its lowest ebb.* en tiempos más recientes = in more recent times.* en un futuro más o menos cercano = in the near future, in the near future.* en un período más o menos lejano = in the near future, in the near future.* en un sentido más amplio = in a broader sense, in a larger sense.* en un sentido más general = in a broader sense.* es más = more important, moreover.* examen más minucioso = closer examination.* examinar más detenidamente = look + closer, take + a closer look at, take + a close look.* examinar más minuciosamente = examine + in greater detail.* explicar un Tema con más detalle = expand upon/on + Tema.* forma de la curva estadística en su valor más alto = peak-shape.* ganar cada vez más importancia = go from + strength to strength.* gastar más de la cuenta = overspend.* gastarse más dinero = dig + deep.* haber todavía más = there + be + more to it than that.* hacer las leyes más estrictas = tighten + laws.* hacerle la vida más simple a todos = simplify + life for everyone.* hacerlo más llevadero = make + life easier.* hacer más consciente de Algo = heighten + awareness.* hacer más copias de Algo = produce + additional copies.* hacer más estricto = tighten.* hacer más fuerte = toughen.* hacer más preciso = tightening up.* hacer más rico = add + richness to.* hacer más riguroso = tighten, tightening up.* hacer más sofisticado = dumb up.* hacer que tenga más valor = put + a premium on.* hacerse cada vez más importante = increase in + importance.* hacerse más complejo = grow in + complexity, gain in + complexity.* hacerse más corto = grow + shorter.* hacerse más fuerte = gain in + strength, grow in + strength.* hacerse más inteligente = smarten up.* herir en lo más profundo = cut to + the heart of, cut to + the quick.* horario de apertura más amplio = extended hours.* incluso yendo más lejos = even farther afield.* invertir más dinero = dig + deep.* ir aun más lejos = go + a/one step further.* ir más allá = go + one stage further.* ir más allá de = go beyond, transcend, get beyond, go far beyond, move + beyond, take + Nombre + a/one step further/farther, go + past.* ir más allá de las posibilidades de Alguien = be beyond + Posesivo + capabilities.* ir más lejos = go + one stage further.* ir poco más allá de + Infinitivo = go little further than + Gerundio.* ir todavía más lejos = go + a/one step further.* la parte más dura de = brunt of, the.* la parte más importante = the heart of.* ley del más fuerte, la = law of the jungle, the, survival of the fittest, survival of the strongest.* libro más vendido = bestseller [best seller/best-seller].* lista de más populares = chart.* lista de más vendidos = chart.* llegar más lejos = stretch + further.* llevar aún más lejos = carry + one step further.* llevar + Nombre + aún más lejos = take + Nombre + a/one step further/farther.* lo más cercano a = the nearest thing to.* lo más destacado = highlights.* lo más detestado = pet hate.* lo más importante = most of all.* lo más interesante = highlights.* lo más mínimo = so much as.* lo más novedoso = the last word.* lo más odiado = pet hate.* lo más parecido a = the nearest thing to.* lo más probable es que = most probably.* lo más recio de = brunt of, the.* lo más recóndito = nooks and crannies.* lo que es más = what is more, what's more.* lo que es más importante = most importantly, most of all, more importantly, most important.* los más necesitados = those most in need.* más acomodados, los = better off, the.* más adelante = later, further along, later on, in due time, at a later date.* más afilado que una navaja = as sharp as a knife.* más afilado que un cuchillo = as sharp as a knife.* más alegre que unas castañuelas = as happy as Larry.* más alejado = further afield, furthest away.* más allá = further than, farther, yonder, beyond that.* más allá de = beyond, beyond all, past, beyond the range of.* más allá de cualquier duda = beyond any doubt, beyond any doubt.* más allá de eso = beyond that.* más allá de la obligación = beyond the call of duty.* más allá del deber = beyond the call of duty.* más allá de ninguna duda = beyond doubt, beyond doubt, beyond any doubt.* más allá de toda duda = beyond doubt, beyond any doubt, without a shadow of a doubt, beyond a shadow of a doubt.* más allá de toda razón = beyond reason.* más allá, el = afterlife [after-life], land of the dead, the.* más antiguo = longest-serving.* más antiguo, el = seniormost, the.* más anunciado = best-publicised [best-publicized, -USA].* más apreciado = long-cherished.* más aun = nay, beyond that, furthermore.* más bien = if you like, instead.* más bien bajo = shortish.* más bien corto = shortish.* más bien pequeño = smallish.* más bien todo lo contrario = quite the opposite, quite the contrary, quite the reverse.* más borracho que una cuba = as drunk as a lord, as drunk as a newt, as drunk as a skunk.* más bueno que un pan = as good as gold.* más cerca de = more nearly.* más claro el agua = as clear as a bell.* más claro que el agua = as clear as a bell.* más complejo de lo que parece = more than meets the eye.* más complicado de lo que parece = more than meets the eye.* más común = mainstream.* más concretamente = more to the point.* más conocido = best known, best-publicised [best-publicized, -USA], mainstream.* más conocido como = better known as.* más contento que unas castañuela = as happy as Larry.* más contento que unas pascuas = as happy as Larry.* Posesivo + más cordial enhorabuena = Posesivo + heartiest congratulations.* más corto que las mangas de una chaleco = as daft as a brush.* más corto que las mangas de un chaleco = as thick as two (short) planks, as shy as shy can be, as thick as a brick, knucklehead.* más débil de la camada, el = runt of the litter, the.* más débil del grupo, el = runt of the litter, the.* más de + Cantidad = in excess of + Cantidad, over + Cantidad, more than + Cantidad, upwards of + Cantidad.* más del 10 por ciento = double digit, double figure.* más de la cuenta = one too many.* más de la mayoría de los + Nombre = more than most + Nombre.* más de lo mismo = more of the same.* más demandado = most demanded.* más dentro = further into.* más destacado = foremost.* más de una vez = more than once.* más de un ISBN = more than one ISBN.* más de un millón = million-plus.* más de unos cuantos + Nombre = not a few + Nombre.* más difundido = best-publicised [best-publicized, -USA].* más duradero = longer-lasting.* más duro que la suela de un zapato = as tough as leather, as tough as nails, as tough as nuts, as tough as old boots, as tough as shoe leather.* más duro que una piedra = as tough as nuts, as tough as nails, as tough as leather, as tough as old boots, as tough as shoe leather.* más exactamente = more nearly.* más fácil de entender para nosotros = closer to home.* más frío que el mármol = as cold as ice.* más frío que la nieve = as cold as ice.* más frío que un témpano (de hielo) = as cold as ice.* más fuerte que un roble = as strong as an ox.* más fuerte que un toro = as strong as an ox.* más granado de la sociedad, lo = cream of society, the.* más grande = greater.* más hambre que el perro de un ciego = as hungry as a wolf, as hungry as a bear, as hungry as a hunter.* más hambre que un maestro de escuela = as hungry as a wolf, as hungry as a bear, as hungry as a hunter.* más importante = foremost.* más importante aun = more significantly.* más información = further information, further details.* más íntimo = innermost.* más largo que un día sin pan = as long as (my/your) arm.* más lejos = further afield, further away, furthest away.* más meridional = southernmost.* más necesitado = most in need.* más occidental = westernmost.* más o menos = more or less, of a sort, or so, of sorts, after a fashion, round about, roughly speaking, give or take, ballpark.* más o menos + Adverbio = relatively + Adverbio.* más o menos cuadrado = squarish.* más perdedor = losingest.* más perenne = longer-lasting.* más permanente = longer-lasting.* más prestigioso = top-rated, top-ranked.* más profundo = innermost.* más que = more... than..., rather than.* más que antes = more than ever, more... than ever before, more than ever before.* más que la suma de sus partes = Comparativo + than the sum of its parts.* más quemado que la pipa (de) un indio = completely burned-out, totally burned-out.* más que muerto = dead and buried.* más que nada = more than anything else.* más que ninguna otra cosa = beyond all else.* más que nunca = more than ever before, more than ever.* más que nunca antes = more... than ever before, more than ever before, more than ever.* más que todo lo demás = beyond all else.* más que todos nosotros juntos = more than all of us put together.* más recientemente = in more recent times, more recently.* más recóndito = innermost.* más secreto = innermost.* más septentrional = northernmost.* Posesivo + más sinceras felicitaciones = Posesivo + heartiest congratulations.* más sincero + Nombre = deeply felt + Nombre.* más sordo que una tapia = as deaf as a post.* más suave que el terciopelo = as soft as velvet.* más suave que la seda = as soft as silk.* más tarde = later on.* más tarde o más temprano = sooner or later, at one time or another.* más todavía = all the more so.* más usado = most heavily used.* más vale malo conocido que bueno por conocer = better the devil you know (than the devil you don't).* más vale pájaro en mano que ciento volando = a bird in the hand is worth two in the bush.* más vale prevenir que curar = a stitch in time saves nine, better (to be) safe than sorry.* más vale que + Subjuntivo = might + as well + Verbo.* más vale tarde que nunca = better late than never.* más valorado = highly valued.* más vendido = best selling [bestselling/best-selling], top-selling.* más veterano, el = seniormost, the.* más viejo que Matusalén = as old as Methuselah, as old as the hills, as old as the hills.* más votado = top-rated, top-ranked.* materia más general = broader subject.* menos blandeces y más mano dura = less of the carrot, more of the stick.* meter a Alguien de lleno en lo más difícil = throw in + at the deep end, throw in + at the deep end.* meterse de lleno en lo más difícil = swim in + the deep end, jump in at + the deep end.* metido en lo más difícil = in at the deep end.* mientras más, mejor = the more the merrier, the more the better.* mirada más de cerca = closer look.* miseria más absoluta = abject poverty.* muchas otras cosas más = much else besides.* muchísimo más = a whole lot more, an awful lot more.* muchísimo más + Adjetivo = infinitely + Adjetivo.* mucho más = order of magnitude, much more, much more so, a lot more, lots more.* mucho más + Adjetivo = all the more + Adjetivo.* mucho más + Adverbio = far more + Adverbio/Adjetivo.* mucho más cerca = far closer.* mucho más de = well over + Expresión Numérica.* mucho más rápido = far faster.* muchos más = a great many more.* nada + estar + más apartado de la realidad = nothing + can + be further from the truth, nothing + can + be further from the truth.* nada + estar + más lejos de la realidad = nothing + can + be further from the truth.* nada + estar + más lejos de la verdad = nothing + can + be further from the truth.* nada más = anything else, nothing else.* nada más y nada menos = as much as + Expresión Numérica.* nada más y nada menos que = in the order of + Cantidad, nothing less than.* nada más y nada menos que de = to the tune of + Cantidad.* nada más y nada menos que desde + Expresión Temporal = from as far back as + Expresión Temporal.* nada más y nada menos que + Número = as many as + Número.* nada puede estar más alejado de la realidad = nothing can be further from the truth.* nadie más = nobody else.* ni más ni menos = nothing more, nothing less, no more, no less.* no aguantar más = have had enough.* no dar más de sí = stretch + Nombre + to the limit, overstretch.* no hacer más que = do + no more than.* no importar lo más mínimo = could not care less.* no más que = in any more than.* Nombre + más o menos = Nombre + of sorts.* no poder hacer más que = do + little more than.* no saber qué más hacer = be at + Posesivo + wit's end.* no ser lo más adecuado para = ill suited to/for.* no ser más que = be nothing more than, be nothing but.* no tener la más mínima idea sobre Algo = Negativo + have + the foggiest idea.* no tener más alternativa que = have + no other option but.* no tener más remedio que = be stuck with, be left with the need to, get + stuck with.* no tener ni la más mínima posibilidad = not to have a prayer.* no tener ni la más remota posibilidad = not to have a prayer.* no voy a aguantarlo más = not going to take it any more.* Número + de más = Número + too many.* Número + veces más = Número + times as many.* Número + veces más de = Número + times the number of.* nunca más = never again.* observar con más detalle = closer look.* optar por la solución más fácil = take + the easy way out.* otro + Nombre + más = further + Nombre, yet another + Nombre.* pagando un poco más = at additional cost.* pagar más de lo que se debería = overpay.* para complicar aun más las cosas = to add to the confusion.* para confundir aun más las cosas = to add to the confusion.* para hacer más fácil = for ease of.* para más información = for further details.* para más inri = to cap it all (off), on top of everything else, but to make things worse, but to make matters worse.* para que quede más claro = for main effects.* para ser más explícito = to elaborate a little further.* pasar a cosas más agradables = on a happier note.* poco más = little else.* poner más fuerte = crank up.* ¡por lo más quieras! = Not on your life!.* por más que lo intento = for the life of me.* Posesivo + más cordial enhorabuena = Posesivo + heartiest congratulations.* Posesivo + más sinceras felicitaciones = Posesivo + heartiest congratulations.* precio de coste más margen de beneficios = cost-plus pricing.* presupuesto cada vez más pequeño = shrinking budget.* pruebas cada vez más concluyentes = mounting evidence.* quedar mucho más por hacer = much more needs to be done.* qué más = what else.* que no da más de sí = overstretched.* ¿quién más...? = who else...?.* rechazar sin más = dismiss + out of hand.* redondear al número entero más cercano = round up to + the nearest whole number.* requerir más destreza = be more of an art.* sacar más partido = get + more for + Posesivo + money.* sentir más ganas de hacer Algo = grow in + appetite.* sentirse más seguro de = gain + confidence (with/in).* separar aun más = widen + the gap between... and.* ser aun más = be all the more.* ser cada vez más importante = increase in + importance.* ser el punto más débil de Alguien = be at + Posesivo + weakest.* ser el punto más flaco de Alguien = be at + Posesivo + weakest.* ser lo más parecido a = be as close as we come to.* ser lo que a Uno más le gusta = be + Posesivo + big scene.* ser más interno = inner being.* ser más un + Nombre = be more of a + Nombre.* ser mucho más = be all the more.* ser nada más y nada menos que = be nothing less than.* siempre querer más = enough + be + not/never + enough.* signo más (+) = addition sign (+), plus sign (+).* sin la más mínima duda = without the shadow of a doubt, beyond a shadow of a doubt.* sin más = out of hand, unceremoniously, unceremonious.* sin más dilación = without (any) further ado, without (any) more ado, without warning.* sin más ni más = unceremoniously, unceremonious, for the love of it, without much ado.* sin más preámbulos = without (any) further ado, without (any) more ado.* sino más bien = rather.* sino (que) más bien = but rather.* supervivencia del más fuerte = survival of the fittest, survival of the strongest.* tarifa especial más barata = discount charge.* tener más paciencia que un santo = have + the patience of a saint.* término más específico = narrower term.* todavía más + Adjetivo = all the more + Adjetivo.* tratar con más detalle = discuss + in greater detail.* una imagen vale más que mil palabras = a picture is worth more than ten thousand words.* una pieza más en la organización = a cog in the wheel.* una vez más = again, yet again.* uno de los + Nombre + más + Adjetivo = not the least + Adjetivo + Nombre, not the least of the + Adjetivo + Nombre.* uno de los + Nombre + más importante = not the least + Nombre, not the least of + Nombre.* uno de mas = one too many.* uno más = one of equals.* uno más de tantos en la organización = a cog in the machine.* unos días más tarde = a few days later.* véase + Nombre + para más información = refer to + Nombre + for details.* vender a un precio más barato que = undercut.* vender más barato = undercut.* venderse más que = outsell.* venta a un precio más barato = undercutting.* y Dios sabe qué más = and Heaven knows what else.* y más adelante = and beyond.* y más allá = and beyond.* y mucho más = and much more.* y mucho(s) más = and more.* y poco más = and little more.* ¡y qué más da! = so what!.* y unos cuantos más = and a few others.* * */mas/A (en Col) = Muerte a SecuestradoresB (en Ven) = Movimiento al Socialismo* * *
Multiple Entries:
mas
más
mas conjunción (liter) but
más adverbio
1a) ( comparativo):◊ ¿tiene algo más barato/moderno? do you have anything cheaper/more modern;
duran más they last longer;
me gusta más sin azúcar I prefer it without sugar;
ahora la vemos más we see more of her now;
tendrás que estudiar más you'll have to study harder;
más lejos/atrás further away/back;
el más allá the other world;
más que nunca more than ever;
me gusta más el vino seco que el dulce I prefer dry wine to sweet, I like dry wine better than sweet;
pesa más de lo que parece it's heavier than it looks;
es más complicado de lo que tú crees it's more complicated than you think;
eran más de las cinco it was after five o'clock;
más de 30 more than 30, over 30
2 ( superlativo):◊ la más bonita/la más inteligente the prettiest/the most intelligent;
el que más sabe the one who knows most;
el que más me gusta the one I like best;
estuvo de lo más divertido it was great fun
3 ( en frases negativas):
nadie más que ella nobody but her;
no tengo más que esto this is all I have;
no tuve más remedio I had no alternative;
no juego más I'm not playing any more;
nunca más never again
4 ( con valor ponderativo):◊ ¡cantó más bien…! she sang so well!;
¡qué cosa más rara! how strange!
■ adjetivo invariable
1 ( comparativo) more;
una vez más once more;
ni un minuto más not a minute longer;
hoy hace más calor it's warmer today;
son más que nosotros there are more of them than us
2 ( superlativo) most;
las más de las veces more often than not
3 ( con valor ponderativo):◊ ¡me da más rabia …! it makes me so mad!;
¡tiene más amigos …! he has so many friends!
4◊ ¿qué más? what else?;
nada/nadie más nothing/nobody else;
algo/alguien más something/somebody else;
¿quién más vino? who else came?;
¿algo más? — nada más gracias anything else? — no, that's all, thank you
■ pronombre
1 more;◊ ¿te sirvo más? would you like some more?
2 ( en locs)
a más no poder: corrimos a más no poder we ran as fast o hard as we could;
a más tardar at the latest;
cuanto más at the most;
de más: ¿tienes un lápiz de más? do you have a spare pencil?;
me dio cinco dólares de más he gave me five dollars too much;
no está de más repetirlo there's no harm in repeating it;
es más in fact;
más bien ( un poco) rather;
más o menos ( aproximadamente) more or less;
( no muy bien) so-so;
no más See Also→ nomás;
por más: por más que llores however much you cry;
por más que trataba however hard he tried;
¿qué más da? what does it matter?;
sin más (ni más) just like that
■ preposición
◊ 8+7 =15 (read as: ocho más siete (es) igual (a) quince) eight plus seven equals fifteen
◊ mil pesos, más los gastos a thousand pesos, plus expenses
■ sustantivo masculino
plus sign
mas conj frml but: sé que es difícil, mas no debes darte por vencido, I know it's hard, but you musn't give up
más
I adverbio & pron
1 (aumento) more: necesito comprar más, I need to buy more
me duele cada día más, it hurts more and more
parte dos trozos más, cut two more pieces
tendría que ser más barato, it should be cheaper
asistieron más de cien personas, more than a hundred people attended
(con pronombre interrogativo) else: ¿alguien más quiere repetir?, would anybody else like a second helping?
(con pronombre indefinido) añádele algo más, add something else
no sé nada más, I don't know anything else
2 (comparación) more: es más complicado que el primero, it's more complicated than the first one
eres más guapa que ella, you are prettier than her
3 (superlativo) most: ella es la más divertida, she's the funniest
lo más extraño del mundo, the strangest thing in the world
4 (otra vez) no me llames más, que estoy trabajando, don't call me again, I'm busy
no volví a verlo más, I never saw him again
5 (sobre todo) debiste llamar, y más sabiendo que estoy sola, you should have phoned me, especially knowing I'm alone
6 (otro) no tengo más cuchillo que éste, I have no other knife but this one
7 exclamación so..., such a..., what a...!
¡está más pesado!, he's such a pain!
¡qué cosa más fea!, what an ugly thing!
II prep Mat plus
dos más dos, two plus o and two ➣ Ver nota en sumar
♦ Locuciones: de más, (de sobra): su comentario estuvo de más, his remark was unnecessary
¿tienes unas medias de más?, do you have a spare pair of tights?
más bien, rather
más o menos, more or less
por más que, (aunque): por más que lo leo no logro entenderlo, no matter how many times I read it, I can't understand it
sin más (ni más), just like that
todo lo más, at most
Ten cuidado con las frases hechas del tipo más borracho que una cuba o más bueno que el pan. Se traducen empleando as... as...: as drunk as a lord o as good as gold.
' más' also found in these entries:
Spanish:
A
- abajo
- abundar
- acá
- actualidad
- adelante
- adentro
- aguantar
- alargarse
- algo
- allá
- alquilar
- alta
- alto
- amarre
- ámbito
- amortizar
- ampliar
- ancha
- ancho
- antes
- aparecer
- arriba
- arrimarse
- aunque
- avivar
- baja
- bajo
- bastante
- bien
- bilis
- bravucón
- bravucona
- bufido
- cada
- cargar
- cerca
- cerrarse
- ciudad
- colmo
- comodidad
- consolidar
- consolidarse
- construcción
- contaminante
- contestón
- contestona
- contraria
- contrario
- córcholis
English:
A
- aboard
- about
- above
- acceptable
- accomplished
- ado
- adopt
- advanced
- advantage
- advocate
- afterwards
- again
- agree
- agreeable
- airport
- all
- along
- aloud
- alternative
- always
- ample
- amplify
- another
- anticipate
- antsy
- anything
- appropriate
- arguable
- art form
- as
- ask
- awe-inspiring
- barrel
- basic
- bat
- become
- begin
- below
- besides
- best
- better
- beyond
- big
- bird
- bit
- bite
- blue
- bookshelf
- boot
* * *= left-wing political party in Argentina and Venezuela* * *conj but* * *mas conjpero: butmás adv1) : more¿hay algo más grande?: is there anything bigger?2) : mostLuis es el más alto: Luis is the tallest3) : longerel sabor dura más: the flavor lasts longer4) : rathermás querría andar: I would rather walk5)a mas : besides, in addition6)más allá : further7)qué... más... : what..., what a...¡qué día más bonito!: what a beautiful day!más adj1) : moredáme dos kilos más: give me two more kilos2) : mostla que ganó más dinero: the one who earned the most money3) : else¿quién más quiere vino?: who else wants wine?más n: plus signmás prep: plustres más dos es igual a cinco: three plus two equals fivemás pron1) : more¿tienes más?: do you have more?2)a lo más : at most3)de mas : extra, excess4)más o menos : more or less, approximately5)por más que : no matter how muchpor más que corras no llegarás a tiempo: no matter how fast you run you won't arrive on time* * *más1 adv1. (comparativo) more¿quieres más arroz? do you want some more rice?2. (superlativo) most¿quién tiene más caramelos? who's got the most sweets?3. (con números, cantidades) more / over4. (con pronombres) else¿quieres algo más? do you want anything else?¿quién más estaba? who else was there?¿nadie más? no one else?¡qué casa más bonita! what a pretty house!¡está más guapa! she's ever so pretty!más2 conj plus -
10 Á
* * *a negative suffix to verbs, not;era útmakligt, at it is not unmeet that.* * *1.á, prep., often used elliptically, or even adverbially, [Goth. ana; Engl. on; Germ. an. In the Scandinavian idioms the liquid n is absorbed. In English the same has been supposed to happen in adverbial phrases, e. g. ‘along, away, abroad, afoot, again, agate, ahead, aloft, alone, askew, aside, astray, awry,’ etc. It is indeed true that the Ormulum in its northern dialect freq. uses o, even in common phrases, such as ‘o boke, o land, o life, o slæpe, o strande, o write, o naht, o loft,’ etc., v. the glossary; and we may compare on foot and afoot, on sleep (Engl. Vers. of Bible) and asleep; A. S. a-butan and on-butan (about); agen and ongean (again, against); on bæc, aback; on life, alive; on middan, amid. But it is more than likely that in the expressions quoted above, as well as in numberless others, as well in old as in modern English, the English a- as well as the o- of the Ormulum and the modern Scottish and north of England o- are in reality remains of this very á pronounced au or ow, which was brought by the Scandinavian settlers into the north of England. In the struggle for supremacy between the English dialects after the Conquest, the Scandinavian form á or a won the day in many cases to the exclusion of the Anglo-Saxon on. Some of these adverbs have representatives only in the Scandinavian tongues, not in Anglo-Saxon; see below, with dat. B. II, C. VII; with acc. C. I. and VI. The prep. á denotes the surface or outside; í and ór the inside; at, til, and frá, nearness measured to or from an object: á thus answers to the Gr. επί; the Lat. in includes á and i together.]With dat. and acc.: in the first case with the notion of remaining on a place, answering to Lat. in with abl.; in the last with the notion of motion to the place, = Lat. in with acc.WITH DAT.A. Loc.I. generally on, upon; á gólfi, on the floor, Nj. 2; á hendi, on the hand (of a ring), 48, 225; á palli, 50; á steini, 108; á vegg, 115; á sjá ok á landi, on sea and land. In some instances the distinction between d and i is loose and wavering, but in most cases common sense and usage decide; thus ‘á bók’ merely denotes the letters, the penmanship, ‘í’ the contents of a book; mod. usage, however, prefers ‘í,’ lesa í bók, but stafr á bók. Old writers on the other hand; á bókum Enskum, in English books, Landn. 24, but í Aldafars bók, 23 (in the book De Mensurâ Temporum, by Bede), cp. Grág. i. 76, where á is a false reading instead of at; á bréfi, the contents of a letter: of clothing or arms, mítr á höfði, sverð á hlið, mitre on head, sword on side, Fms. i. 266, viii. 404; hafa lykil á sér, on one’s person, 655 xxvii. 22; möttull á tyglum, a mantle hanging on (i. e. fastened by) laces, Fms. vii. 201: á þingi means to be present at a meeting; í þingi, to abide within a jurisdiction; á himni, á jörðu, on (Engl. in) heaven and earth, e. g. in the Lord’s Prayer, but í helviti, in hell; á Gimli, Edda (of a heavenly abode); á báti, á skipi denote crew and cargo, ‘í’ the timber or materials of which a ship is built, Eg. 385; vera í stafni á skipi, 177: á skógi, to be abroad in a wood (of a hunter, robber, deer); but to be situated (a house), at work (to fell timber), í skógi, 573, Fs. 5, Fms. iii. 122, viii. 31, xi. 1, Glúm. 330, Landn. 173; á mörkinni, Fms. i. 8, but í mörk, of a farm; á firðinum means lying in a firth, of ships or islands (on the surface of the water), þær eyjar liggja á Breiðafirði, Ld. 36; but í firði, living in a district named Firth; á landi, Nj. 98, Fms. xi. 386.II. á is commonly used in connection with the pr. names or countries terminating in ‘land,’ Engl. in, á Englandi, Írlandi, Skotlandi, Bretlandi, Saxlandi, Vindlandi, Vínlandi, Grænalandi, Íslandi, Hálogalandi, Rogalandi, Jótlandi, Frakklandi, Hjaltlandi, Jamtalandi, Hvítramannalandi, Norðrlöndum, etc., vide Landn. and the index to Fms. xii. In old writers í is here very rare, in modern authors more frequent; taste and the context in many instances decide. An Icelander would now say, speaking of the queen or king, ‘á Englandi,’ ruling over, but to live ‘í Englandi,’ or ‘á Englandi;’ the rule in the last case not being quite fixed.2. in connection with other names of countries: á Mæri, Vörs, Ögðum, Fjölum, all districts of Norway, v. Landn.; á Mýrum (in Icel.), á Finnmörk, Landn., á Fjóni (a Danish island); but í Danmörk, Svíþjóð (á Svíþjóðu is poët., Gs. 13).3. before Icel. farms denoting open and elevated slopes and spaces (not too high, because then ‘at’ must be used), such as ‘staðr, völlr, ból, hjalli, bakki, heimr, eyri,’ etc.; á Veggjum, Landn. 69; á Hólmlátri, id.: those ending in ‘-staðr,’ á Geirmundarstöðum, Þórisstöðum, Jarðlangsstöðum…, Landn.: ‘-völlr,’ á Möðruvöllum: á Fitjum (the farm) í Storð (the island), í Fenhring (the island) á Aski (the farm), Landn., Eg.: ‘-nes’ sometimes takes á, sometimes í (in mod. usage always ‘í’), á Nesi, Eb. 14, or í Krossnesi, 30; in the last case the notion of island, νησος, prevails: so also, ‘fjörðr,’ as, þeir börðust á Vigrafirði (of a fight o n the ice), Landn. 101, but orusta í Hafrsfirði, 122: with ‘-bær,’ á is used in the sense of a farm or estate, hón sa á e-m bæ mikit hús ok fagrt, Edda 22; ‘í bæ’ means within doors, of the buildings: with ‘Bær’ as pr. name Landn. uses ‘í,’ 71, 160, 257, 309, 332.4. denoting on or just above; of the sun, when the time is fixed by regarding the sun in connection with points in the horizon, a standing phrase in Icel.; sól á gjáhamri, when the sun is on the crag of the Rift, Grág. i. 26, cp. Glúm. 387; so, brú á á, a bridge on a river, Fms. viii. 179, Hrafn. 20; taka hús á e-m, to surprise one, to take the house over his head, Fms. i. 11.III. á is sometimes used in old writers where we should now expect an acc., esp. in the phrase, leggja sverði (or the like) á e-m, or á e-m miðjum, to stab, Eg. 216, Gísl. 106, Band. 14; þá stakk Starkaðr sprotanum á konungi, then Starkad stabbed the king with the wand, Fas. iii. 34; bíta á kampi (vör), to bite the lips, as a token of pain or emotion, Nj. 209, 68; taka á e-u, to touch a thing, lay hold of it, v. taka; fá á e-u, id. (poët.); leggja hendr á (better at) síðum, in wrestling, Fms. x. 331; koma á úvart á e-m, to come on one unawares, ix. 407 (rare).B. TEMP. of a particular point or period of time, at, on, in:I. gener. denoting during, in the course of; á nótt, degi, nætrþeli …, Bs. i. 139; or spec. adding a pron. or an adject., á næsta sumri, the next summer; á því ári, þingi, misseri, hausti, vári, sumri …, during, in that year …, Bs. i. 679, etc.; á þrem sumrum, in the course of three summers, Grág. i. 218; á þrem várum, Fms. ii. 114; á hálfs mánaðar fresti, within half a month’s delay, Nj. 99; á tvítugs, sextugs … aldri, á barns, gamals aldri, etc., at the age of …, v. aldr: á dögum e-s, in the days of, in his reign or time, Landn. 24, Hrafn. 3, Fms. ix. 229.II. used of a fixed recurrent period or season; á várum, sumrum, haustum, vetrum, á kveldum, every spring, summer …, in the evenings, Eg. 711, Fms. i. 23, 25, vi. 394, Landn. 292: with the numeral adverbs, cp. Lat. ter in anno, um sinn á mánuði, ári, once a month, once a year, where the Engl. a is not the article but the preposition, Grág. i. 89.III. of duration; á degi, during a whole day, Fms. v. 48; á sjau nóttum, Bárð. 166; á því meli, during that time, in the meantime, Grág. i. 259.IV. connected with the seasons (á vetri, sumri, vári, hausti), ‘á’ denotes the next preceding season, the last winter, summer, autumn, Eb. 40, 238, Ld. 206: in such instances ‘á’ denotes the past, ‘at’ the future, ‘í’ the present; thus í vetri in old writers means this winter; á vetri, last winter; at vetri, next winter, Eb. 68 (in a verse), etc.C. In various other relations, more or less metaphorically, on, upon, in, to, with, towards, against:I. denoting object, in respect of, against, almost periphrastically; dvelja á náðum e-s, under one’s protection, Fms. i. 74; hafa metnað á e-u, to be proud of, to take pride in a thing, 127.2. denoting a personal relation, in; bæta e-t á e-m, to make amends, i. e. to one personally; misgöra e-t á e-m, to inflict wrong on one; hafa elsku (hatr) á e-m, to bear love ( hatred) to one, Fms. ix. 242; hefna sín á e-m, to take revenge on one’s person, on anyone; rjúfa sætt á e-m, to break truce on the person of any one, to offend against his person, Nj. 103; hafa sár á sér, 101; sjá á e-m, to read on or in one’s face; sér hann á hverjum manni hvárt til þín er vel eðr illa, 106; var þat brátt auðséð á hennar högum, at …, it could soon be seen in all her doings, that …, Ld. 22.3. also generally to shew signs of a thing; sýna fáleika á sér, to shew marks of displeasure, Nj. 14, Fs. 14; taka vel, illa, lítt, á e-u, to take a thing well, ill, or indifferently, id.; finna á sér, to feel in oneself; fann lítt á honum, hvárt …, it could hardly be seen in his face, whether …, Eb. 42; líkindi eru á, it is likely, Ld. 172; göra kost á e-u, to give a choice, chance of it, 178; eiga vald á e-u, to have power over …, Nj. 10.II. denoting encumbrance, duty, liability; er fimtardómsmál á þeim, to be subject to …, Nj. 231; the phrase, hafa e-t á hendi, or vera á hendi e-m, on one’s hands, of work or duty to be done; eindagi á fé, term, pay day, Grág. i. 140; ómagi (skylda, afvinna) á fé, of a burden or encumbrance, D. I. and Grág. in several passages.III. with a personal pronoun, sér, mér, honum …, denoting personal appearance, temper, character, look, or the like; vera þungr, léttr … á sér, to be heavy or light, either bodily or mentally; þungr á sér, corpulent, Sturl. i. 112; kátr ok léttr á sér, of a gay and light temper, Fms. x. 152; þat bragð hafði hann á sér, he looked as if, … the expression of his face was as though …, Ld., cp. the mod. phrase, hafa á sér svip, bragð, æði, sið, of one’s manner or personal appearance, to bear oneself as, or the like; skjótr (seinn) á fæti, speedy ( slow) of foot, Nj. 258.IV. as a periphrasis of the possessive pronoun connected with the limbs or parts of the body. In common Icel. such phrases as my hands, eyes, head … are hardly ever used, but höfuð, eyru, hár, nef, munnr, hendr, fætr … á mér; so ‘í’ is used of the internal parts, e. g. hjarta, bein … í mér; the eyes are regarded as inside the body, augun í honum: also without the possessive pronoun, or as a periphrasis for a genitive, brjóstið á e-m, one’s breast, Nj. 95, Edda 15; súrnar í augum, it smarts in my eyes, my eyes smart, Nj. 202; kviðinn á sér, its belly, 655 xxx. 5, Fms. vi. 350; hendr á henni, her hands, Gísl. (in a verse); í vörunum á honum, on his lips, Band. 14; ristin á honum, his step, Fms. viii. 141; harðr í tungu, sharp of tongue, Hallfred (Fs. 114); kalt (heitt) á fingrum, höndum, fótum …, cold ( warm) in the fingers, hands, feet …, i. e. with cold fingers, etc.; cp. also the phrase, verða vísa (orð) á munni, of extemporising verses or speeches, freq. in the Sagas; fastr á fótum, fast by the leg, of a bondsman, Nj. 27: of the whole body, díla fundu þeir á honum, 209. The pers. pron. is used only in solemn style (poetry, hymns, the Bible), and perhaps only when influenced by foreign languages, e. g. mitt hjarta hví svo hryggist þú, as a translation of ‘warumb betrübst du dich mein Herz?’ the famous hymn by Hans Sachs; instead of the popular hjartað í mér, Sl. 43, 44: hjartað mitt is only used as a term of endearment, as by a husband to his wife, parents to their child, or the like, in a metaphorical sense; the heart proper is ‘í mér,’ not ‘mitt.’2. of other things, and as a periphrasis of a genitive, of a part belonging to the whole, e. g. dyrr á husi = húsdyrr, at the house-doors; turn á kirkju = kirkju turn; stafn, skutr, segl, árar … á skipi, the stem, stern, sail … of a ship, Fms. ix. 135; blöð á lauk, á tré …, leaves of a leek, of a tree …, Fas. i. 469; egg á sverði = sverðs egg; stafr á bók; kjölr á bók, and in endless other instances.V. denoting instrumentality, by, on, or a-, by means of; afla fjár á hólmgöngum, to make money a-duelling, by means of duels, Eg. 498; á verkum sínum, to subsist on one’s own work, Njarð. 366: as a law term, sekjast á e-ju, to be convicted upon …, Grág. i. 123; sekst maðr þar á sínu eigini ( a man is guilty in re sua), ef hann tekr af þeim manni er heimild ( possessio) hefir til, ii. 191; falla á verkum sínum, to be killed flagranti delicto, v. above; fella e-n á bragði, by a sleight in wrestling; komast undan á flótta, to escape by flight, Eg. 11; á hlaupi, by one’s feet, by speed, Hkr. ii. 168; lifa á e-u, to feed on; bergja á e-u, to taste of a thing; svala sér á e-u, to quench the thirst on.VI. with subst. numerals; á þriðja tigi manna, up to thirty, i. e. from about twenty to thirty, Ld. 194; á öðru hundraði skipa, from one to two hundred sail strong, Fms. x. 126; á níunda tigi, between eighty and ninety years of age, Eg. 764, v. above: used as prep., á hendi, on one’s hand, i. e. bound to do it, v. hönd.VII. in more or less adverbial phrases it may often be translated in Engl. by a participle and a- prefixed; á lopti, aloft; á floti, afloat; á lífi, alive; á verðgangi, a-begging; á brautu, away; á baki, a-back, behind, past; á milli, a-tween; á laun, alone, secretly; á launungu, id.; á móti, against; á enda, at an end, gone; á huldu, hidden; fara á hæli, to go a-heel, i. e. backwards, Fms. vii. 70;—but in many cases these phrases are transl. by the Engl. partic. with a, which is then perh. a mere prefix, not a prep., á flugi, a-flying in the air, Nj. 79; vera á gangi, a-going; á ferli, to be about; á leiki, a-playing, Fms. i. 78; á sundi, a-swimming, ii. 27; á verði, a-watching, x. 201; á hrakningi, a-wandering; á reiki, a-wavering; á skjálfi, a-shivering; á-hleri, a-listening; á tali, a-talking, Ísl. ii. 200; á hlaupi, a-running, Hkr. ii. 268; á verki, a-working; á veiðum, a-hunting; á fiski, a-fishing; á beit, grazing: and as a law term it even means in flagranti, N. G. L. i. 348.VIII. used absolutely without a case in reference to the air or the weather, where ‘á’ is almost redundant; þoka var á mikil, a thick fog came on, Nj. 267; niðamyrkr var á, pitch darkness came on, Eg. 210; allhvast á norðan, a very strong breeze from the north, Fms. ix. 20; þá var á norðrænt, a north wind came on, 42, Ld. 56; hvaðan sem á er, from whatever point the wind is; var á hríð veðrs, a snow storm came on, Nj. 282; görði á regn, rain came on, Fms. vi. 394, xi. 35, Ld. 156.WITH ACC.A. Loc.I. denoting simple direction towards, esp. connected with verbs of motion, going, or the like; hann gékk á bergsnös, Eg. 389; á hamar, Fas. ii. 517.2. in phrases denoting direction; liggja á útborða, lying on the outside of the ship, Eg. 354; á annat borð skipinu, Fms. vii. 260; á bæði borð, on both sides of the ship, Nj. 124, Ld. 56; á tvær hliðar, on both sides, Fms. v. 73. Ísl. ii. 159; á hlið, sidewards; út á hlið, Nj. 262, Edda 44; á aðra hönd henni, Nj. 50, Ld. 46; höggva á tvær hendr, to hew or strike right and left, Ísl. ii. 368, Fas. i. 384, Fms. viii. 363, x. 383.3. upp á, upon; hann tók augu Þjaza ok kastaði upp á himin, Edda 47: with verbs denoting to look, see, horfa, sjá, líta, etc.; hann rak skygnur á land, he cast glances towards the land, Ld. 154.II. denoting direction with or without the idea of arriving:1. with verbs denoting to aim at; of a blow or thrust, stefna á fótinn, Nj. 84; spjótið stefnir á hann miðjan, 205: of the wind, gékk veðrit á vestr, the wind veered to west, Fms. ix. 28; sigla á haf, to stand out to sea, Hkr. i. 146, Fms. i. 39: with ‘út’ added, Eg. 390, Fms. x. 349.2. conveying the notion of arriving, or the intervening space being traversed; spjótið kom á miðjan skjöldinn, Eg. 379, Nj. 96, 97; langt upp á land, far up inland, Hkr. i. 146: to reach, taka ofan á belti, of the long locks of a woman, to reach down to the belt, Nj. 2; ofan á bringu, 48; á þa ofan, 91.III. without reference to the space traversed, connected with verbs denoting to go, turn, come, ride, sail, throw, or the like, motion of every kind; hann kastar honum á völlinn, he flings him down, Nj. 91; hlaupa á skip sitt, to leap on board his ship, 43; á hest, to mount quickly, Edda 75; á lend hestinum, Nj. 91; hann gengr á sáðland sitt, he walks on to his fields, 82: on, upon, komast á fætr, to get upon one’s legs, 92; ganga á land, to go a-shore, Fms. i. 40; ganga á þing, vii. 242, Grág. (often); á skóg, á merkr ok skóga, into a wood, Fb. i. 134, 257, Fms. xi. 118, Eg. 577, Nj. 130; fara á Finnmörk, to go travelling in Finmark, Fms. i. 8; koma, fara á bæ, to arrive at the farm-house; koma á veginn, Eg. 578; stíga á bát, skip, to go on board, 158; hann gékk upp á borg, he went up to the burg (castle), 717; en er þeir komu á loptriðið, 236; hrinda skipum á vatn, to float the ships down into the water, Fms. i. 58; reka austr á haf, to drift eastwards on the sea, x. 145; ríða ofan á, to ride down or over, Nj. 82.IV. in some cases the acc. is used where the dat. would be used, esp. with verbs denoting to see or hear, in such phrases as, þeir sá boða mikinn inn á fjörðinn, they saw great breakers away up in the bight of the firth, the acc. being due perhaps to a motion or direction of the eye or ear towards the object, Nj. 124; sá þeir fólkit á land, they saw the people in the direction of land, Fas. ii. 517: in phrases denoting to be placed, to sit, to be seated, the seat or bench is freq. in the acc. where the dat. would now be used; konungr var þar á land upp, the king was then up the country, the spectator or narrator is conceived as looking from the shore or sea-side, Nj. 46; sitja á miðjan bekk, to be seated on the middle bench, 50; skyldi konungs sæti vera á þann bekk … annat öndvegi var á hinn úæðra pall; hann setti konungs hásæti á miðjan þverpall, Fms. vi. 439, 440, cp. Fagrsk. l. c., Sturl. iii. 182; eru víða fjallbygðir upp á mörkina, in the mark or forest, Eg. 58; var þar mörk mikil á land upp, 229; mannsafnaðr er á land upp (viewed from the sea), Ld. 76; stóll var settr á mótið, Fas. i. 58; beiða fars á skip, to beg a passage, Grág. i. 90.V. denoting parts of the body; bíta e-n á barka, to bite one in the throat, Ísl. ii. 447; skera á háls, to cut the throat of any one, Nj. 156; brjóta e-n á háls, to break any one’s neck; brjóta e-n á bak, to break any one’s back, Fms. vii. 119; kalinn á kné, frozen to the knees with cold, Hm. 3.VI. denoting round; láta reipi á háls hesti, round his horse’s neck, 623. 33; leggja söðul á hest, Nj. 83; and ellipt., leggja á, to saddle; breiða feld á hofuð sér, to wrap a cloak over his head, 164; reyta á sik mosa, to gather moss to cover oneself with, 267; spenna hring á hönd, á fingr, Eg. 300.VII. denoting a burden; stela mat á tvá hesta, hey á fimtán hesta, i. e. a two, a fifteen horse load, Nj. 74: metaph., kjósa feigð á menn, to choose death upon them, i. e. doom them to death, Edda 22.B. TEMP.I. of a period of time, at, to; á morgun, to-morrow (í morgun now means the past morning, the morning of to-day), Ísl. ii. 333.II. if connected with the word day, ‘á’ is now used before a fixed or marked day, a day of the week, a feast day, or the like; á Laugardag, á Sunnudag …, on Saturday, Sunday, the Old Engl. a-Sunday, a-Monday, etc.; á Jóladaginn, Páskadaginn, on Yule and Easter-day; but in old writers more often used ellipt. Sunnudaginn, Jóladaginn …, by dropping the prep. ‘á,’ Fms. viii. 397, Grág. i. 18.III. connected with ‘dagr’ with the definite article suffixed, ‘á’ denotes a fixed, recurring period or season, in; á daginn, during the day-time, every day in turn, Grett. 91 A.IV. connected with ‘evening, morning, the seasons,’ with the article; á kveldit, every evening, Ld. 14; á sumarit, every summer, Vd. 128, where the new Ed. Fs. 51 reads sumrum; á haust, every autumn, Eg. 741 (perh. a misprint instead of á haustin or á haustum); á vetrinn, in the winter time, 710; á várit, every spring, Gþl. 347; the sing., however, is very rare in such cases, the old as well as mod. usage prefers the plur.; á nætrnar, by night, Nj. 210; á várin, Eg. 710; á sumrin, haustin, á morgnana, in the morning (á morgin, sing., means to-morrow); á kveldin, in the evening, only ‘dagr’ is used in sing., v. above (á daginn, not á dagana); but elliptically and by dropping the article, Icelanders say, kveld og morgna, nótt og dag, vetr sumar vor og haust, in the same sense as those above mentioned.V. denoting duration, the article is dropped in the negative phrase, aldri á sinn dag, never during one’s life; aldri á mína daga, never in my life, Bjarn. 8, where a possess. pron. is put between noun and prep., but this phrase is very rare. Such phrases as, á þann dag, that day, and á þenna dag, Stj. 12, 655 xxx. 2. 20, are unclassical.VI. á dag without article can only be used in a distributive sense, e. g. tvisvar á dag, twice a-day; this use is at present freq. in Icel., yet instances from old writers are not on record.VII. denoting a movement onward in time, such as, liðið á nótt, dag, kveld, morgun, sumar, vetr, vár, haust (or nóttina, daginn …), jól, páska, föstu, or the like, far on in the night, day …, Edda 33; er á leið vetrinn, when the winter was well on, as the winter wore on, Nj. 126; cp. áliðinn: also in the phrase, hniginn á inn efra aldr, well stricken in years, Ld. 68.C. Metaph. and in various relations:I. somewhat metaphorically, denoting an act only (not the place); fara á fund, á vit e-s, to call for one, Eg. 140; koma á ræðu við e-n, to come to a parley with, to speak, 173; ganga á tal, Nj. 103; skora á hólm, to challenge to a duel on an island; koma á grið, to enter into a service, to be domiciled, Grág. i. 151; fara á veiðar, to go a-hunting, Fms. i. 8.β. generally denoting on, upon, in, to; bjóða vöxtu á féit, to offer interest on the money, Grág. i. 198; ganga á berhögg, to come to blows, v. berhögg; fá á e-n, to make an impression upon one, Nj. 79; ganga á vápn e-s, to throw oneself on an enemy’s weapon, meet him face to face, Rd. 310; ganga á lagið, to press on up the spear-shaft after it has passed through one so as to get near one’s foe, i. e. to avail oneself of the last chance; bera fé á e-n, to bribe, Nj. 62; bera öl á e-n, to make drunk, Fas. i. 13; snúinn á e-t, inclined to, Fms. x. 142; sammælast á e-t, to agree upon, Nj. 86; sættast, verða sáttr á e-t, in the same sense, to come to an agreement, settlement, or atonement, 78, Edda 15, Eb. 288, Ld. 50, Fms. i. 279; ganga á mála, to serve for pay as a soldier, Nj. 121; ganga á vald e-s, to put oneself in his power, 267; ganga á sætt, to break an agreement; vega á veittar trygðir, to break truce, Grág. ii. 169.II. denoting in regard to, in respect to:1. of colour, complexion, the hue of the hair, or the like; hvítr, jarpr, dökkr … á hár, having white, brown, or dark … hair, Ísl. ii. 190, Nj. 39; svartr á brún ok brá, dark of brow and eyebrow; dökkr á hörund, id., etc.2. denoting skill, dexterity; hagr á tré, a good carpenter; hagr á járn, málm, smíðar …, an expert worker in iron, metals …, Eg. 4; fimr á boga, good at the bow: also used of mastership in science or arts, meistari á hörpuslátt, a master in striking the harp, Fas. iii. 220; fræðimaðr á kvæði, knowing many poems by heart, Fms. vi. 391; fræðimaðr á landnámssögur ok forna fræði, a learned scholar in histories and antiquities (of Are Frode), Ísl. ii. 189; mikill á íþrótt, skilful in an art, Edda (pref.) 148; but dat. in the phrase, kunna (vel) á skíðum, to be a cunning skater, Fms. i. 9, vii. 120.3. denoting dimensions; á hæð, lengd, breidd, dýpt …, in the heighth, length, breadth, depth …, Eg. 277; á hvern veg, on each side, Edda 41 (square miles); á annan veg, on the one side, Grág. i. 89.β. the phrase, á sik, in regard to oneself, vel (illa) á sik kominn, of a fine ( ugly) appearance, Ld. 100, Fas. iii. 74.III. denoting instrumentality; bjargast á sínar hendr, to live on the work of one’s own hands, (á sínar spýtur is a mod. phrase in the same sense); (vega) á skálir, pundara, to weigh in scales, Grág. ii. 370; at hann hefði tvá pundara, ok hefði á hinn meira keypt en á hinn minna selt, of a man using two scales, a big one for buying and a little one for selling, Sturl. i. 91; á sinn kostnað, at one’s own expense; nefna e-n á nafn, by name, Grág. i. 17, etc. The Icel. also say, spinna á rokk, snældu, to spin on or with a rock or distaff; mala á kvern, to grind in a ‘querne,’ where Edda 73 uses dat.; esp. of musical instruments, syngja, leika á hljóðfæri, hörpu, gígju …; in the old usage, leika hörpu …, Stj. 458.IV. denoting the manner or way of doing:1. á þessa lund, in this wise, Grág. ii. 22; á marga vega, á alla, ymsa vega, in many, all, respects, Fms. i. 114; á sitt hóf, in its turn, respectively, Ld. 136, where the context shews that the expression answers to the Lat. mutatis mutandis; á Þýðersku, after German fashion, Sks. 288.2. esp. of language; mæla, rita á e-a tungu, to speak, write in a tongue; á Írsku, in Irish, Ld. 76; Norrænu, in Norse, Eb. 330, Vm. 35; a Danska tungu, in Danish, i. e. Scandinavian, Norse, or Icelandic, Grág. i. 18; á Vára tungu, i. e. in Icelandic, 181; rita á Norræna tungu, to write in Norse, Hkr. (pref.), Bs. i. 59:—at present, dat. is sometimes used.3. in some phrases the acc. is used instead of the dat.; hann sýndi á sik mikit gaman, Fms. x. 329; hann lét ekki á sik finna, he shewed no sign of motion, Nj. 111; skaltú önga fáleika á þik gera (Cod. Kalf.), 14.V. used in a distributive sense; skal mörk kaupa gæzlu á kú, eðr oxa fim vetra gamlan, a mark for every cow, Grág. i. 147; alin á hvert hross, 442; á mann, per man (now freq.): cp. also á dag above, lit. B.VI. connected with nouns,1. prepositional; á hendr (with dat.), against; á hæla, at heel, close behind; á bak, at back, i. e. past, after; á vit (with gen.), towards.2. adverbially; á braut, away, abroad; á víxl, in turns; á mis, amiss; á víð ok dreif, a-wide and a-drift, i. e. dispersedly.3. used almost redundantly before the following prep.; á eptir, after, behind; á undan, in front of; á meðal, á milli, among; á mót, against; á við, about, alike; á frá (cp. Swed. ifrån), from (rare); á fyrir = fyrir, Haustl. 1; á hjá, beside (rare); á fram, a-head, forwards; á samt, together; ávalt = of allt, always: following a prep., upp á, upon; niðr á, down upon; ofan á, eptir á, post eventum, (temp.) á eptir is loc., id., etc.VII. connected with many transitive verbs, answering to the Lat. ad- or in-, in composition, in many cases periphrastically for an objective case. The prep. generally follows after the verb, instead of being prefixed to it as in Lat., and answers to the Engl. on, to; heita kalla, hrópa á, to call on; heyra, hlusta, hlyða á, to hearken to, listen to; hyggja, hugsa á, to think on; minna á, to remind; sjá, líta, horfa, stara, mæna, glápa, koma auga … á, to look on; girnast á, to wish for; trúa á, to believe on; skora á, to call on any one to come out, challenge; kæra á, to accuse; heilsa á, to greet; herja, ganga, ríða, hlaupa, ráða … á, to fall on, attack, cp. ágangr, áreið, áhlaup; ljúga á, to tell lies of, to slander; telja á, to carp at; ausa, tala, hella, kasta, verpa … á, to pour, throw on; ríða, bera, dreifa á, to sprinkle on; vanta, skorta á, to fall short of; ala á, to plead, beg; leggja á, to throw a spell on, lay a saddle on; hætta á, to venture on; gizka á, to guess at; kveða á, to fix on, etc.: in a reciprocal sense, haldast á, of mutual strife; sendast á, to exchange presents; skrifast á, to correspond (mod.); kallast á, to shout mutually; standast á, to coincide, so as to be just opposite one another, etc.2.f. [Lat. aqua; Goth. ahva; Hel. aha; A. S. eâ; O. H. G. aha, owa; cp. Germ. ach and aue; Fr. eau, eaux; Engl. Ax-, Ex-, etc., in names of places; Swed.-Dan. å; the Scandinavians absorb the hu, so that only a single vowel or diphthong remains of the whole word]:—a river. The old form in nom. dat. acc. sing. is , v. the introduction to A, page 1, Bs. i. 333 sq., where ́n, ́ (acc.), and ́na; so also Greg. 677; the old fragm. of Grág. ii. 222, 223, new Ed. In the Kb. of the Edda the old form occurs twice, viz. page 75, ́na (acc.), (but two lines below, ána), í ́nni (dat.) The old form also repeatedly occurs in the Kb. and Sb. of the Grág., e. g. ii. 266, 267: gen. sing. ár; nom. pl. ár, gen. á contracted, dat. ám, obsolete form ́m; Edda 43, Eg. 80, 99, 133, 185: proverbs, at ósi skal á stemma, answering to the Lat. principiis obsta, Edda 60; hér kemr á til sæfar, here the river runs into the sea, metaph. = this is the very end, seems to have been a favourite ending of old poems; it is recorded in the Húsdrápa and the Norðsetadrápa, v. Edda 96, Skálda 198; cp. the common saying, oil vötn renna til sævar, ‘all waters run into the sea.’ Rivers with glacier water are in Icel. called Hvítá, White river, or Jökulsá: Hitá, Hot river, from a hot spring, opp. to Kaldá, v. Landn.: others take a name from the fish in them, as Laxá, Lax or Salmon river (freq.); Örriða á, etc.: a tributary river is þverá, etc.: ár in the Njála often means the great rivers Ölfusá and Þjórsá in the south of Iceland. Áin helga, a river in Sweden, Hkr. ii: á is also suffixed to the names of foreign rivers, Tempsá = Thames; Dóná, Danube (Germ. Don-au), (mod.), etc. Vide Edda (Gl.) 116, 117, containing the names of over a hundred North-English and Scottish rivers.COMPDS: áráll, árbakki, árbrot, ardjúp, árfarvegr, árfors, árgljúfr, árhlutr, ármegin, árminni, ármót, áróss, árreki, árstraumr, árströnd, árvað, árvegr, árvöxtr. -
11 GÖRA
ð, also spelt görva, giörva, geyra, giora, gera: prop. gøra, not gra (the ø was sounded nearly as y or ey), so that the g is to be sounded as an aspirate, however the word is spelt; and the insertion of i or j (giöra, gjöra), which is usual in mod. writing, and often occurs in old, is phonetic, not radical, and göra and gjöra represent the same sound. The word in the oldest form had a characteristic v, and is spelt so on the Runic stones in the frequent Runic phrase, gaurva kubl, Baut., and Danske Runemind. passim; but also now and then in old Icel. MSS., e. g. the Kb. of Sæm. (cited from Bugge’s Edit.), gorva, Am. 75, Skv. 1. 34, 3. 20, Hm. 123, Og. 29; gerva, Am. 64, Bkv. 3; giorva, Rm. 9; giorfa, 28; gorvir, Hkv. Hjörv. 41; gørvom, Hým. 6; gorviz, Am. 35; gerviz, Merl. 2. 89:—this characteristic v has since been dropped, and it is usually spelt without it in MSS., gora, Hým. 1, Og. 23, Ls. 65; gera, Am. 85; gorir, Hm. 114: the pret. always drops the v, gorþi, Hym. 21; gorðo or gorþo, fecerunt, Hm. 142, Am. 9; gorðumz, Hðm. 28; gerþi, Am. 74; gerþit, 26:—with i inserted, Rm. 9, 22; giordu, 11; in the Mork. freq. giavra. The ö is still sounded in the east of Icel., whereas gera is the common form in speech, gjöra in writing:—the old pres. indic. used by the poets and in the laws is monosyllabic görr, with suffixed negative, görr-a, Hkr. i. (in a verse); mod. bisyllabic görir, which form is also the usual one in the Sagas:—the old part. pass. was görr or gerr, geyrr, Fms. ix. 498, x. 75, where the v was kept before a vowel, and is often spelt with f, gorvan, gorvir, and gorfan, gorfir: dat. so-goro or so-guru adverbially = sic facto: the mod. part. gjörðr, gerðr, görðr, as a regular part. of the 2nd weak conjugation, which form occurs in MSS. of the 15th century, e. g. Bs. i. 877, l. 21. [This is a Scandin. word; Dan. gjöre; Swed. göra; Old Engl. and Scot. gar, which is no doubt of Scandin. origin, the Saxon word being do, the Germ. thun, neither of which is used in the Scandin.; the word however is not unknown to the Teut., though used in a different sense; A. S. gervan and gearvjan = parare; O. H. G. karwan; Germ. gerben, garben, but esp. the adj. and adv. gar, vide above s. v. gör-.] To make, to do; the Icel. includes both these senses.A. To make:I. to build, work, make, etc.; göra himin ok jörð, 623. 36, Hom. 100; göra hús, to build a house, Fms. xi. 4, Rb. 384; göra kirkju, Bjarn. 39; göra skip, N. G. L. i. 198; göra langskip, Eg. 44; göra stólpa, Al. 116; göra tól (= smíða), Vsp. 7; göra (fingr)-gull, Bs. i. 877; göra haug, to build a cairn, Eg. 399; göra lokhvílu, Dropl. 27; göra dys, Ld. 152; göra kistu ( coffin), Eg. 127; göra naust, N. G. L. i. 198; göra jarðhús, Dropl. 34; göra veggi, Eg. 724: also, göra bók, to write a book, Íb. 1, Rb. 384; göra kviðling, to make a song, Nj. 50; göra bréf, to draw up a deed ( letter), Fms. ix. 22; göra nýmæli, to frame a law, Íb. 17.2. adding prep.; göra upp, to repair, rebuild, restore, Fb. ii. 370; göra upp Jórsala-borg, Ver. 43; göra upp skála, Ld. 298; göra upp leiði, to build up a grave.II. to make, prepare, get ready; göra veizlu, drykkju, brúðkaup, erfi, and poët. öl, öldr, to make a feast, brew bridal ale, Fs. 23, Fms. xi. 156, Dropl. 6, Am. 86; göra seið, blót, to perform a sacrifice, Ld. 152; göra bú, to set up a house, Grág. i. 185, Ld. 68; göra eld, to make a fire, Fs. 100, K. Þ. K. 88; göra rekkju, to make one’s bed, Eg. 236; göra upp hvílur, Sturl. ii. 124; göra graut, to make porridge, Eg. 196, N. G. L. i. 349; göra drykk, to make a drink, Fms. i. 8; göra kol, or göra til kola, to make charcoal, Ölk. 35.III. in somewhat metaph. phrases; göra ferð, to make a journey, Fms. x. 281; görði heiman för sína, he made a journey from home, Eg. 23; göra sinn veg, to make one’s way, travel, Mar.; göra uppreisn, to make an uprising, to rebel, Rb. 384, Fms. ix. 416; göra úfrið, to make war, 656 C. 15; göra sátt, göra frið, to make peace, Hom. 153, Bs. i. 24; göra féskipti, Nj. 118; göra tilskipan, to make an arrangement, Eg. 67; göra ráð sitt, to make up one’s mind, Nj. 267, Fms. ix. 21; göra hluti, to cast lots, Fms. x. 348.2. to make, give, pay, yield; göra tíund, to pay tithes, Hom. 180; hann skal göra Guði tíunda hlut verðsins, id.; göra ölmusu, to give alms, 64; göra ávöxt, to yield fruit, Greg. 48; gefa né göra ávöxt, Stj. 43; göra konungi skatt eða skyld, Fms. xi. 225.3. to contract; göra vináttu, félagskap, to contract friendship, Nj. 103, Eg. 29; göra skuld, to contract a debt, Grág. i. 126: göra ráð með e-m, to take counsel with, advise one, Eg. 12; göra ráð fyrir, to suppose, Nj. 103, Fms. ix. 10; göra mun e-s, to make a difference, i. 255, Eb. 106.4. to make, make up, Lat. efficere; sex tigir penninga göra eyri, sixty pence make an ounce, Grág. i. 500, Rb. 458.5. to grant, render; göra kost, to make a choice, to grant, Nj. 130, Dropl. 6, Fms. xi. 72, (usually ellipt., kostr being understood); vil ek at þér gerit kostinn, Nj. 3; ok megit þér fyrir því göra ( grant) honum kostinn, 49, 51; göra e-m lög, to grant the law to one, 237; göra guðsifjar, to make ‘gossip’ with one, to be one’s godfather, Fms. ii. 130.6. special usages; göra spott, háð, gabb, … at e-u, to make sport, gibes, etc. at or over a thing, Fms. x. 124; göra iðran, to do penance, Greg. 22; göra þakkir, to give thanks, Hom. 55; göra róm at máli e-s, to cheer another’s speech, shout hear, hear! var görr at máli hans mikill rómr ok góðr, his speech was much cheered, Nj. 250,—a parliamentary term; the Teutons cheered, the Romans applauded (with the hands), cp. Tacit. Germ.7. with prepp.; gera til, to make ready or dress meat; láta af ( to kill) ok göra til ( and dress), K. Þ. K. 80, Ísl. ii. 83, 331, Fs. 146, 149, Bjarn. 31, Finnb. 228; göra til nyt, to churn milk, K. Þ. K. 78; göra til sverð, to wash and clean the sword, Dropl. 19; máttu þeir eigi sjá, hversu Þorvaldr var til gerr, how Th. got a dressing, Nj. 19.β. göra at e-u, to mend, make good, put right (at-görð), ek skal at því gera, Fms. xi. 153, Eg. 566, Nj. 130: to heal, Bárð. 171, Eg. 579, Grág. i. 220; göra at hesti, K. Þ. K. 54, Nj. 74: göra við e-u, vide B. II.8. adding acc. of an adj., part., or the like; göra mun þat margan höfuðlausan, Nj. 203; göra mikit um sik, to make a great noise, great havoc, Fb. i. 545, Grett. 133, Fms. x. 329; göra e-n sáttan, to reconcile one, Grág. i. 336; göra sér e-n kæran, to make one dear to oneself, Hkr. i. 209; göra sik líkan e-m, to make oneself like to another, imitate one, Nj. 258; göra sik góðan, to make oneself good or useful, 74, 78; göra sik reiðan, to take offence, 216; göra sér dælt, to make oneself at home, take liberties, Ld. 134, Nj. 216; göra langmælt, to make a long speech, Sks. 316; göra skjót-kjörit, to make a quick choice, Fms. ii. 79; göra hólpinn, to ‘make holpen,’ to help, x. 314; göra lögtekit, to make a law, issue a law, xi. 213, Bs. i. 37; hann gerði hann hálshöggvinn, he had him beheaded, Fms. ix. 488, v. l.; ok görðu þá handtekna alla at minsta kosti, Sturl. i. 40; várir vöskustu ok beztu menn era görfir handteknir, 41.β. göra sér mikit um e-t, to make much of, admire, Eg. 5, Fms. x. 254, 364; göra e-t at ágætum, to make famous, extol a thing, vii. 147; göra at orðum, to notice as remarkable, Fas. i. 123; göra at álitum, to take into consideration, Nj. 3; göra sér úgetið at e-u, to be displeased with, Ld. 134; göra vart við sik, to make one’s presence noticed, Eg. 79; göra sér mikit, lítið fyrir, to make great, small efforts, Finnb. 234; göra sér í hug, to brood over; hann gerði sér í hug at drepa jarl, Fs. 112; göra sér í hugar lund, to fancy, think: göra af sér, to exert oneself, ef þú gerir eigi meira af þér um aðra leika, Edda 32; hvárt hann var með Eiríki jarli, eðr görði hann annat af sér, or what else he was making of himself, Fms. xi. 157.9. phrases, gera fáleika á sik, to feign, make oneself look sad, Nj. 14; esp. adding upp, gera sér upp veyki, to feign sickness, (upp-gerð, dissimulation); göra sér til, to make a fuss, (hence, til-gerð, foppishness.)B. To do:I. to do, act; allt þat er hann gerir síðan ( whatever he does), þat á eigandi at ábyrgjask, Gþl. 190; þér munut fátt mæla eðr gera, áðr yðr munu vandræði af standa, i. e. whatsoever you say or do will bring you into trouble, Nj. 91; göra e-t með harðfengi ok kappi, 98; ger svá vel, ‘do so well,’ be so kind! 111; gerit nú svá, góði herra (please, dear lord!), þiggit mitt heilræði, Fms. vii. 157: and in mod. usage, gerið þér svo vel, gerðu svo vel, = Engl. please, do! sagði, at hann hafði með trúleik gört, done faithfully, Eg. 65; göra gott, to do good; göra íllt, to do evil, (góð-görð, íll-görð); ok þat var vel gört, well done, 64; geyrða ek hotvetna íllt, I did evil in all things, Niðrst. 109; hefir hann marga hluti gört stór-vel til mín, he has done many things well towards me, I have received many great benefits at his hands, Eg. 60: with dat., svá mikit gott sem jarl hefir mér gert, Nj. 133; þér vilda ek sízt íllt göra, I would least do harm to thee, 84: göra fúlmennsku, to do a mean act, 185; göra vel við e-n, to do well to one, Fs. 22; göra stygð við e-n, to offend one, Fms. x. 98; göra sæmiliga til e-s, to do well to one, Ld. 62, Nj. 71; göra sóma e-s, to do honour to one, Fms. vii. 155; göra e-m gagn, to give help to one, Nj. 262; göra e-m sæmd, skomm, to do ( shew) honour, dishonour, to one, 5, Fms. x. 43; göra háðung, xi. 152; göra styrk, to strengthen one, ix. 343; göra e-m skapraun, to tease one; göra ósóma, Vápn. 19; göra skaða ( scathe), Eg. 426; göra óvina-fagnað, to give joy to one’s enemies, i. e. to do just what they want one to do, Nj. 112; göra til skaps e-m, to conform to one’s wishes, 80; gerum vér sem faðir vár vill, let us do as our father wishes, 198; vel má ek gera þat til skaps föður míns at brenna inni með honum, id.; göra at skapi e-s, id., 3; var þat mjök gert móti mínu skapi, Fms. viii. 300; gera til saka við e-n, to offend, sin against one, Nj. 80; gera á hluta e-s, to wrong one, Vígl. 25; göra ílla fyrir sér, to behave badly, Fms. vii. 103.II. adding prep.; göra til e-s, to deserve a thing (cp. til-görð, desert, behaviour); hvat hafðir þú til gört, what hast thou done to deserve it? Nj. 130; framarr en ek hefi til gört, more than I have deserved, Fms. viii. 300; ok hafit þér Danir heldr til annars gört, ye Danes have rather deserved the reverse, xi. 192, Hom. 159:—göra eptir, to do after, imitate, Nj. 90:—göra við e-u (cp. við-görð, amendment), to provide for, amend, ok mun úhægt vera at göra við forlögum þeirra, Ld. 190; er úhægt at göra við ( to resist) atkvæðum, Fs. 22; ok mun ekki mega við því gera, Nj. 198:—göra af við e-n (cp. af-görð, evil doing), to transgress against one, ek hefi engan hlut af gört við þik, Fms. vii. 104, viii. 241; ok iðrask nú þess er hann hefir af gert, 300; göra af við Guð, to sin against God, Hom. 44.2. special usages; göra … at, to do so and so; spurði, hvat hann vildi þá láta at gera, he asked what he would have done, Nj. 100; hann gerði þat eina at, er hann átti, he did only what be ought, 220; þeir Flosi sátu um at rengja, ok gátu ekki at gert, F. tried, and could do nothing, 115, 242; þér munut ekki fá at gert, fyrr en …, 139; Flosi ok hans menn fengu ekki at gert, 199; mikit hefir þú nú at gert, much hast thou now done ( it is a serious matter), 85; er nú ok mikit at gert um manndráp siðan, 256; hann vildi taka vöru at láni, ok göra mikit at, and do great things, Ld. 70; Svartr hafði höggit skóg ok gert mikit at, Nj. 53; slíkt gerir at er sölin etr, so it happens with those who eat seaweed, i. e. that (viz. thirst) comes of eating seaweed, Eg. 605.β. göra af e-u, to do so and so with a thing; hvat hafið ér gert af Gunnari, Njarð. 376; ráð þú draumana, vera má at vér gerim af nokkut, may be that we may make something out of it, Ld. 126; gör af drauminum slíkt er þér þykkir líkligast, do with the dream ( read it) as seems to thee likeliest, Ísl. ii. 196: göra við e-n, to do with one; þá var um rætt, hvað við þá skyldi göra, what was to be done with them? Eg. 232; ærnar eru sakir til við Egil, hvat sem eg læt göra við hann, 426; eigi veit ek hvat þeir hafa síðan við gört, 574: göra fyrir e-t, to provide; Jón var vel fjáreigandi, ok at öllu vel fyrir gört, a wealthy and well-to-do man, Sturl. iii. 195; þótt Björn sé vel vígr maðr, þá er þar fyrir gört, því at …, but that is made up, because …: fyrir göra (q. v.), to forfeit.C. METAPH. AND SPECIAL USAGES:I. to do, help, avail; nú skulum vér ganga allir á vald jarlsins, því at oss gerir eigi annat, nothing else will do for us, Nj. 267; þat mun ekki gera, that wont do, 84; en ek kann ekki ráð til at leggja ef þetta gerir ekki, Fms. ii. 326; konungr vill þat eigi, þvi at mér gerir þat eigi ( it will not do for me) at þér gangit hér upp, x. 357; þat gerir mér ekki, at þér gangit á Orminn, … en hitt má vera at mér komi at gagni, ii. 227; þóttisk þá vita, at honum mundi ekki gera ( it would do nothing) at biðja fyrir honum, Fb. i. 565; engum gerði við hann at keppa, 571; ekki gerði þeim um at brjótask, Bárð. 10 new Ed.; sagða ek yðr eigi, at ekki mundi gera at leita hans, Sks. 625; hvat gerir mér nú at spyrja, Stj. 518; ekki gerir at dylja, no use hiding it, Fbr. 101 new Ed.; ætla þat at fáir þori, enda geri engum, Band. 7; bæði var leitað til annarra ok heima, ok gerði ekki, but did no good, 4; hét hann þeim afarkostum, ok gerði þat ekki, but it did no good, Fms. ii. 143.II. to send, despatch, cp. the Engl. to ‘do’ a message; hann gerði þegar menn frá sér, Eg. 270; hann hafði gört menn sex á skóginn fyrir þá, 568; þá gerði Karl lið móti þeim, Fms. i. 108; jarl gerði Eirík at leita Ribbunga, ix. 314; hann gerði fram fyrir sik Álf á njósn, 488; hann gerði menn fyrir sér at segja konunginum kvámu sína, x. 10; hleypi-skúta var gör norðr til Þrándheims, vii. 206; jafnan gerði jarl til Ribbunga ok drap menn af þeim, ix. 312; vilja Ósvífrs-synir þegar gera til þeirra Kotkels, despatch them to slay K., Ld. 144; skulu vér nú göra í mót honum, ok láta hann engri njósn koma, 242:—göra eptir e-m, to send after one, Nero bað göra eptir postulunum ok leiða þangat, 656 C. 26; nú verðr eigi eptir gört at miðjum vetri, Grág. i. 421; frændr Bjarnar létu göra eptir (Germ. abholen) líki hans, Bjarn. 69; síðan gerðu þeir til klaustrs þess er jómfrúin var í, Fms. x. 102:—gera e-m orð, njósn, to do a message to one; hann gerði orð jörlum sínum, Eg. 270; ætluðu þeir at göra Önundi njósn um ferðir Egils, 386, 582; vóru þangat orð gör, word was sent thither, Hkr. ii. 228.III. with infin. as an auxiliary verb, only in poetry and old prose (laws); ef hón gerði koma, if she did come, Völ. 5; gerðit vatn vægja, Am. 25; gramr gørr-at sér hlífa, he does not spare himself, Hkr. i. (in a verse); gerðut vægjask, id., Fs. (in a verse); hann gerðisk at höggva, Jb. 41; görðir at segja, Bkv. 15; görðisk at deyja, Gkv. 1. 1: in prose, eigi gerir hugr minn hlægja við honum, Fas. i. 122; góðir menn göra skýra sitt mál með sannsögli, 677. 12; Aristodemus görði eigi enn at trúa, Post.: esp. in the laws, ef þeir göra eigi ganga í rúm sín, Grág. i. 8; ef goðinn gerr eigi segja, 32; ef hann gerr eigi í ganga, 33; ef þeir göra eigi hluta meðr sér, 63; ef dómendr göra eigi dæma, 67; ef dómendr göra eigi við at taka, id.; ef goðinn gerr eigi ( does not) nefna féráns-dóm, 94; nú göra þeir menn eigi úmaga færa, 86; ef þeir göra eigi nefna kvöðina af búanum, Kb. ii. 163; ef þeir göra eigi segja, hvárt …, Sb. ii. 52; nú gerr sá eigi til fara, Kb. ii. 96; göra eigi koma, 150; ef hann gerr eigi kjósa, § 113.IV. a law term, göra um, or gera only, to judge or arbitrate in a case; fékksk þat af, at tólf menn skyldu göra um málit, Nj. 111; villt þú göra um málit, 21; bjóða mun ek at göra um, ok lúka upp þegar görðinni, 77; mun sá mála-hluti várr beztr, at góðir menn geri um, 88; málin vóru lagið í gerð, skyldu gera um tólf menn, var þá gert um málin á þingi, var þat gert, at … (follows the verdict), 88; vil ek at þú sættisk skjótt ok látir góða menn gera um …, at hann geri um ok enir beztu menn af hvárra liði lögliga til nefndir, 188; Njáll kvaðsk eigi gera mundu nema á þingi, 105; þeir kváðusk þat halda mundu, er hann gerði, id.; skaltú gera sjálfr, 58; fyrr en gert var áðr um hitt málit, 120; ek vil bjóðask til at göra milli ykkar Þórðar um mál yðar, Bjarn. 55; Þorsteinn kvað þat þó mundi mál manna, at þeir hefði góða nefnd um sættir þótt hann görði, 56; nú er þegar slegit í sætt málinu með því móti, at Áskell skal göra um þeirra í milli, Rd. 248; er nú leitað um sættir milli þeirra, ok kom svá at þeir skulu göra um málin Þorgeirr goði frá Ljósa-vatni ok Arnórr ór Reykjahlíð, sú var görð þeirra at …, 288; svá kemr at Ljótr vill at Skapti görði af hans hendi, en Guðmundr vill sjálfr göra fyrir sína hönd, skyldi Skapti gerð upp segja, Valla L. 225; eigi hæfir þat, leitum heldr um sættir ok geri Þorgeirr um mál þessi, Lv. 12; var jafnt gört sár Þórðar ok sár Þórodds, Eb. 246; þær urðu mála-lyktir at Þórðr skyldi göra um …, 24; ok vóru þá görvar miklar fésektir, 128; var leitað um sættir, ok varð þat at sætt, at þeir Snorri ok Steindórr skyldi göra um, 212; þit erut gerfir héraðs-sekir sem íllræðis-menn, Fs. 58: göra görð, Sturl. i. 63, 105: adding the fine, to fix the amount, þat er gerð mín, at ek geri verð húss ok matar, I fix the amount of the value of the house and (stolen) stores, Nj. 80; gerði Njáll hundrað silfrs, N. put it at a hundred silver pieces, 58; margir mæltu, at mikit vaeri gert, that the amount was high, id.; slíkt fégjald sem gert var, 120; vilit ér nokkut héraðs-sektir göra eða utanferðir, 189; hann dæmdi þegar, ok görði hundrað silfrs, 6l; síðan bauð Bjarni Þorkatli sætt ok sjálfdæmi, görði Bjarni hundrað silfrs, Vápn. 31; ek göri á hönd Þóri hundrað silfrs, Lv. 55; ek göri á hönd þér hundrað silfrs, id.; vilit þér, at ek göra millum ykkar? síðan görði konungr konuna til handa Þórði ok öll fé hennar, Bjarn. 17; Rafn kvað hann mikit fé annat af sér hafa gört, at eigi þætti honum þat betra, Fs. 30; Gellir görði átta hundrað silfrs, Lv. 97; fyrir þat gerði Börkr hinn digri af honum eyjarnar, B. took the isles from him as a fine, Landn. 123: adding the case as object, Gunnarr gerði gerðina, G. gave judgment in the case, Nj. 80; fyrr en gert var áðr um hitt málit, till the other case was decided, 120; þá sætt er hann görði Haraldi jarli, that settlement which he made for earl Harold, Fms. viii. 300: Flosi var görr utan ok allir brennu-menn, F. was put out ( banished) and all the burners, Nj. 251: metaph., nema þau vili annat mál á gera, unless they choose to settle it otherwise, Grág. i. 336.2. in the phrase, göra sekð, to make a case of outlawry, Grág. i. 118; eigi um görir sekð manns ella, else the outlawry takes no effect; en hann um görir eigi ella sekðina, else he cannot condemn him, 119.3. to perform; eptir-gerðar þeirrar sem hverr nennti framast at gera eptir sinn náung, Fms. viii. 103; en þat grunaði konung, at hann mundi ætla at göra eptir sumar sættir, i. e. that he had some back door to escape by, Orkn. 58 (cp. Ó. H.); allt þat er þér gerit nú fyrir þeirra sálum, id.V. special usages, to make allowance for; gera fóðr til fjár, to make an arbitrary allowance for, Ísl. ii. 138; hence, to suppose, en ef ek skal göra til fyrir fram ( suggest) hvat er hón (the code) segir mér, þá segi ek svá, at …, Fms. ix. 331; gera sér í hug, Fs. 112; göra sér í hugar-lund, to fancy; göra e-m getsakir, to impute to one; gera orð á e-u, to report a thing; þat er ekki orð á því geranda, ‘tis not worth talking about; eigi þarf orð at göra hjá því (‘tis not to be denied), sjálfan stólkonunginn blindaði hann, Mork. 14 (cp. Fms. vi. 168, l. c.); gera sér létt, to take a thing lightly, Am. 70; göra sér far um, to take pains; göra sér í hug, hugar-lund, to suppose.D. IMPERS. it makes one so and so, one becomes; hann görði fölvan í andliti, he turned pale, Glúm. 342; leysti ísinn ok görði varmt vatnið, the water became warm, 623. 34; veðr görði hvast, a gale arose, Eg. 128; hríð mikla gerði at þeim, they were overtaken by a storm, 267; þá gerði ok á hríð (acc.) veðrs, 281; féll veðrit ok gerði logn (acc.), and became calm, 372; görði þá stórt á firðinum, the sea rose high, 600; til þess er veðr lægði ok ljóst gerði, and till it cleared up, 129; um nóttina gerði á æði-veðr ok útsynning, 195; görir á fyrir þeim hafvillur, they lost their course (of sailors), Finnb. 242; mér gerir svefnhöfugt, I grow sleepy, Nj. 264; þá görði vetr mikinn þar eptir hinn næsta, Rd. 248.E. REFLEX, to become, grow, arise, and the like; þá görðisk hlátr, then arose laughter, Nj. 15; görðisk bardagi, it came to a fight, 62, 108; sá atburðr görðisk, it came to pass, Fms. x. 279; þau tíðendi er þar höfðu görzt, Ld. 152; gerðisk með þeim félagskapr, they entered into fellowship, Eg. 29; gerðisk svá fallit kaup, Dipl. ii. 10; Sigurðr konungr gerðisk ( grew up to be) ofstopa-maðr …, görðisk mikill maðr ok sterkr, Fms. vii. 238; hann görðisk brátt ríkr maðr ok stjórnsamr, xi. 223; Unnr görðisk þá mjök elli-móð, U. became worn with age, Ld. 12; sár þat er at ben görðisk, a law term, a wound which amounted to a bleeding wound, Nj. passim:—to be made, to become, görask konungr, to become king, Eg. 12; ok görðisk skáld hans, and became his skáld, 13; görðisk konungs hirðmaðr, 27; görask hans eigin-kona, to become his wedded wife, Fms. i. 3; at hann skyldi görask hálf-konungr yfir Dana-veldi, 83; vill Hrútr görask mágr þinn, Nj. 3; hann gerðisk síðan óvarari, he became less cautious, Fms. x. 414.2. with the prep. svá, to happen, come to pass so and so; svá görðisk, at …, it so happened, that …, Nj. 167; görðisk svá til, at …, Fms. x. 391; þá görðisk svá til um síðir, at…, at last it came to pass. that …, 392; enda vissi hann eigi, at þingför mundi af görask, in case he knew not that it would entail a journey to parliament, Grág. i. 46: with at added, to increase, þá görðisk þat mjök at um jarl ( it grew even worse with the earl) at hann var úsiðugr um kvenna-far, görðisk þat svá mikit, at …, it grew to such a pitch, that …, Hkr. i. 245; hence the mod. phrase, e-ð á-görist, it increases, gains, advances, esp. of illness, bad habits, and the like, never in a good sense.3. impers. with dat., honum gerðisk ekki mjök vært, he felt restless, Ld. 152; næsta gerisk mér kynlegt, I feel uneasy, Finnb. 236.4. to behave, bear oneself; Páll görðisk hraustliga í nafni Jesu, Post. 656 C. 13.5. to set about doing, be about; fám vetrum síðan görðisk hann vestr til Íslands, Fms. x. 415; maðr kom at honum ok spurði, hvat hann gerðisk, what he was about, Ó. H. 244; görðisk jarl til Ribbunga, Fms. ix. 312, v. l.; tveir menn görðusk ferðar sinnar, two men set out for a journey, x. 279; görðusk menn ok eigi til þess at sitja yfir hlut hans, Eg. 512; at þessir menn hafa görzk til svá mikils stórræðis, Fms. xi. 261; eigi treystusk menn at görask til við hann, Bárð. 160.6. (mod.) to be; in such phrases as, eins og menn nú gerast, such as people now are; eins og flestir menn gerast.F. PART. PASS. görr, geyrr (Fms. ix. 498, x. 75), gjörr, gerr, as adj., compar. görvari, superl. görvastr; [A. S. gearu; gare, Chaucer, Percy’s Ballads; O. H. G. garwe; Germ. gar]:—skilled, accomplished; vaskligr, at sér görr, Ld. 134; vel at sér görr, Ísl. ii. 326, Gísl. 14; gerr at sér um allt, Nj. 51; hraustir ok vel at sér görvir, Eg. 86; at engi maðr hafi gervari at sér verit en Sigurðr, Mork. 221; allra manna snjallastr í máli ok görvastr at sér, Hkr. iii. 360: the phrase, leggja görva hönd á e-t, to set a skilled hand to work, to be an adept, a master in a thing; svá hagr, at hann lagði allt á görva hönd, Fas. i. 391, (á allt görva hönd, iii. 195.)2. ready made, at hand; in the saying, gott er til geyrs (i. e. görs, not geirs) at taka, ‘tis good to have a thing at hand, Hkm. 17; ganga til görs, to have it ready made for one, Ld. 96; gör gjöld, prompt punishment, Lex. Poët.:—with infin., gerr at bjóða, ready to offer, Gh. 17; gervir at eiskra, in wild spirits, Hom. 11; görvar at ríða, Vsp. 24: with gen. of the thing, gerr ílls hugar, prone to evil, Hým. 9; gerr galdrs, prone to sorcery, Þd. 3; skulut þess görvir, be ready for that! Am. 55.II. [cp. görvi, Engl. gear], done, dressed; svá görvir, so ‘geared,’ so trussed, Am. 40.III. adverb. phrases, so-gurt, at soguru, so done; verða menn þat þó so-gurt at hafa, i. e. there is no redress to be had, Hrafn. 9; hafi hann so-gurt, N. G. L. i. 35, Nj. 141; kvað eigi so-gort duga, 123, v. l.; at (með) so-guru, this done, quo facto, Skv. 1. 24, 40; freq. with a notion of being left undone, re infecta. Germ. unverrichteter sache, Eg. 155, Glúm. 332, Ó. H. 202; enda siti um so-gort, and now let it stand, Skálda 166; við so-gurt, id., 655 vii. 4; á so-gurt ofan, into the bargain, Bs. i. 178, Ölk. 36, Fas. i. 85. -
12 HAFA
* * *(hefi; hafða, höfðum; hafðr), v.1) to have (þeir höfðu sjau skip ok flest stór);hafa elda, to keep up a five;2) to hold, celebrate (hafa vinaboð, blót, þing);3) to keep, retain (rifu þær vefinn í sundr, ok hafði hverr þat er hélt á);4) to use (tvau net eru rý, ok hafa eigi höfð verit);orð þau sem hann hafði um haft, which he had made use of;hafa fagrmæli við e-n, to flatter one;hafa hljóðmæli við e-n, to speak secretly to one;hafa tvimæli á e-u, to speak doubtfully of a thing;hafa viðrmæli um e-t, to use mocking words;hann var mjök hafðr við mál manna, much used to, versed in, lawsuits;5) to have, hold, maintain;hafa vináttu við e-n, to maintain friendship with one;hafa hættumikit, to run a great risk;hafa heilindi, to have good health;6) to bring, carry;hafa e-n heim með sér, to bring one home;hann hafði lög, út hingat ór Noregi, he brought laws hither from Norway;hafa sik (to betake oneself) til annara landa;7) to take, carry off;troll hafi þik, the trolls take thee;8) to get, gain, win;hann hafði eigi svefn, he got no sleep;hefir sá jafnan, er hættir, he wins that ventures;hafa gagn, sigr, to gain victor;hafa meira hlut, to get the upper hand, gain the day;hafa betr (verr), to get the better (worse) of it;hafa sitt mál, to win one’s suit;hafa tafl, to win the game;hafa erendi, to do one’s errand, succeed;hafa bana, to suffer death, to die;hafa sigr, to be worsted;hafa góðar viðtökur, to be well received;hafa tíðindi af e-m, to get tidings of, or from, one;hafa sœmd, óvirðing af e-m, to get honour, disgrace from one;with gen., hafa e-s ekki, to fail to catch one (hann kemst á skóg undan, ok höfðu þeir hans ekki);ekki munu vér hans hafa at sinni, we shall not catch him at present;9) to wear carry (clothes, weapons);hann hafði blán kyrtil, he wore a blue kirtle;hafa kylfu í hendi sér, to have a club in one’s hand;10) to behave, do, or fare, so an so esp. with an adv.;hafa vel, illa, vetr, to behave (do) well, badly, be worse;hafa sik vel, to behave;hafa vel, to be well off or happy;hafa hart, to be in a wretched plight;11) with infin., hafa at varðveita, to have in keeping at selja, to have on sale;lög hafið þér at mæla, you are right;12) hafa e-n nær e-u, to expose one to (þú hafðir svá nær haft oss úfœru);hafa nær e-u, to come near to, esp. impers.;nær hafði okkr nú, it was a narrow escape;svá nær hafði hausinum, at, the shot so nearly touched the head, that;ok er nær hafði, skipit mundi fljóta, when the ship was on the point of flloating;13) as an auxiliary verb, in the earliest time with the pp. of transitive verbs in acc.;hefir þú hamar um fólginn, hast thou hidden the hammer?;ek hefi sendan mann, I have sent a man;later with indecl. neut. pp.;hefir þú eigi sét mik, hast thou not seen me?;14) with preps.:hafa e-t at, to do, act;hann tók af þér konuna, en þú hafðir ekki at, but thou didst not stir, didst take it tamely;absol., viltu þess freista, ok vita hvat at hafi, wilt thou try and see what happens?;hafa e-t at hlífiskildi (skotspœni), to use as a shield (as a target);hafa e-n háði, hlátri, to mock, laugh at;hafa e-t at engu, vettugi, to hold for naught, take no notice of;hafa sakir á e-n have charges against one;hafa á rás, to take to one’s heels, run off;hafa e-t eptir, to do or repeat a thing after one;hafa e-t fram, to produce (vápn þorgils vóru fram höfð); to carry out, hold forth;hafa mál fram, to proceed with a suit;var um búit, ekki fram haft, all was made ready but nothing done;hafa e-t frammi, í frammi, to use, make use of (hafa í frammi kúgan);ok öll lögmæt skil frammi hafa, and discharge all on official duties;hafa e-t fyrir satt, to hold for true;eigi em ek þar fyrir sönnu hafðr, I am not truly aimed for that, it is a false charge;hafa e-n fyrir sökum um e-t, to charge one with;hafa í hótum við e-n, to threaten one;hafa e-t með höndum, to have in hand;höfum eiai sigrinn ór hendi, let not victory slip out of our hands;hafa ór við e-n, to behave so and so towards one (hefir þú illa ór haft við mik);hafa e-t til e-s to use for (höfðu þeir til varnar skot ok spjót); to be a reason or ground for;vér hyggjum þat til þess haft vera, at þar hafi menn sézt, we believe the foundation of the story is that men have been seen there;hafa mikit (lítit) til síns máls, to have much (little) in support of one’s case;hafa e-t til, to have at hand, possess;orð þau, sem hann hafði um haft, the words which he had used;keisari hafði fátt um, did not say much;hafa e-n undir, to get one under, subdue one;hafa e-t uppi, to take (heave) up (hafa uppi fœri, net);Skarpheðinn hafði uppi øxina, S. heaved up the axe;hafa flokk uppi, to raise a party, to rebel;hafa uppi tafl, to play at a game;hafa e-n uppi, to bring one to light;hafa uppi rœður, to begin a discussion;hafa e-t úti, to have done, finished (hafa úti sitt dagsverk);hafa við e-m, to be a match for one;hafa sik við, to exert oneself;hafa mikit (lítit) við, to make a great (little) display;hann söng messu ok bafði mikit við, and made much of it;hann bad jarl leita, bann hafði lítit við þat, he did it lightly;haf ekki slíkt við, do not say so;haf þú lítit við at eggja sonu þina, refrain from egging on thy sons;15) refl., hafast.* * *pret. hafði; subj. hefði; pres. sing. hefi (less correctly hefir), hefir, hefir; plur. höfum, hafit, hafa: the mod. pres. sing. is monosyllabic hefr or hefur, and is used so in rhymes—andvara engan hefur | … við glys heims gálaus sefur, Pass. 15. 6, but in print the true old form hefir is still retained; the monosyllabic present is used even by old writers in the 1st pers. before the personal or negative suffix, e. g. hef-k and hef-k-a ek for hefi-g and hefig-a ek, see e. g. Grág. (Kb.) 79, 82, in the old oath formula, hef-k eigi, Hallfred; hef ek, Fms. iii. 10 (in a verse); but not so in 3rd pers., e. g. hefir-a or hefir-at, Grág. l. c.: imperat. haf, hafðu: part. pass. hafðr, neut. haft;—hafat is an απ. λεγ., Vsp. 16, and is prob. qs. hafit from hefja, to heave, lift: [Ulf. haban; A. S. habban; Engl. have; Hel. hebben; Germ. haben; Dutch hebben; Dan. have, Swed. hafva: it is curious the Lat. form habere retains the consonant unchanged, cp. the Romance forms, Ital. avere, Fr. avoir, Span. haber, etc. ☞ Hafa is a weak verb, and thus distinguished from hefja (to lift, begin), which is a strong verb, answering to Lat. capere, incipere; but in sundry cases, as will be seen below, it passes into the sense of this latter word; as also in some instances into that of another lost strong verb, hafa, hóf, to behave, and hœfa, to hit]:—to have.A. To have; hann hafði með sér ekki meira lið, Fms. i. 39; hafði hverr hirð um sik, 52; höfðu þeir áttján skip, viii. 42; Sverrir hafði tvau hundrað manna, … þeir höfðu annan samnað á landi, 328; hann hafði mikit lið ok frítt, x. 36; þeir höfðu sjau skip ok flest stór, 102; hafa fjölmennar setur, Eb. 22; hann hafði menn sína í síldveri, Eg. 42; mun ek naut hafa þar sem mér þykkir hagi beztr, 716.II. to hold:1. to keep, celebrate; hafa ok halda, Dipl. i. 6; hafa átrúnað, 10; hafa dóma, 12; hafa blót, Fms. iv. 254; hafa vina-veizlu, id.; hafa vina-boð, Nj. 2; hafa Jóla-boð, Eg. 516; hafa þing, Fms. ix. 449; hafa haust-boð, Gísl. 27; hafa drykkju, Eb. 154; hafa leik, Fms. x. 201, passim.2. to hold, observe; hlýðir þat hvergi at hafa eigi lög í landi, Nj. 149; skal þat hafa, er stendr …, Grág. i. 7; skal þat allt hafa er finsk á skrá þeirri …, id.; en hvatki es mis-sagt es í fræðum þessum, þá es skylt at hafa þat (to keep, hold to be true) es sannara reynisk, Íb. 3; ok hafða ek (I kept, selected) þat ór hvárri er framarr greindi, Landn. 320, v. l.3. to hold, keep, retain; ef hann vill hafa hann til fardaga, Grág. i. 155; skal búandinn hafa hann hálfan mánuð, 154; ok hafði hvárr þat er hélt á, Nj. 279; hitt skal hafa er um fram er, Rb. 56; kasta í burt þrjátigi ok haf þat sem eptir verðr, 494.4. to hold an office; hafa lögsögu, to hold the office of lögsaga, Íb. passim; hafa jarldóm, konungdóm, passim; þat höfðu haft at fornu Dana-konungar, Eg. 267; þér berit konunga-nöfn svá sem fyrr hafa haft ( have had) forfeðr yðrir, en hafit lítið af ríki, Fms. i. 52; hafa ríki, to reign, Hkr. pref.5. phrases, hafa elda, to keep a fire, cook, Fms. xi. 129; hafa fjárgæzlu, to tend sheep, Eg. 740; hafa embætti með höndum, Stj. 204; hafa gæzlur á e-u, Fms. ix. 313; hafa … vetr, to have so many winters, be of such an age (cp. Fr. avoir … ans), Íb. 15; margir höfðu lítið fátt þúsund ára, Ver. 7: hafa vörn í máli, Nj. 93; hafa e-t með höndum, to have in hand, Fms. viii. 280, ix. 239; hafa e-t á höndum, Grág. i. 38; hafa fyrir satt, to hold for true, Fms. xi. 10; hafa við orð, to intimate, suggest, Nj. 160; hafa e-t at engu, vettugi, to hold for naught, take no notice of, Fas. i. 318.6. with prepp. or infin.,α. with prep.; hafa til, to have, possess; ef annarr þeirra hefir til enn annarr eigi, þá er sá skyldr til at fá honum er til hefir, Grág. i. 33; ef annarr hefir til …, id.; þér ætlið at ek muna eigi afl til hafa, Ld. 28.β. with infin.; hafa at varðveita, to have in keeping, Eg. 500; lög hafit þér at mæla, you have the law on your tongue, i. e. you are right, Nj. 101; hörð tíðindi hefi ek at segja þér, 64; sá er gripinn hefir at halda, Grág. i. 438; hafa at selja, to have on sale, Ld. 28.III. to use; var haft til þess sker eitt, Eb. 12; þá höfðu þeir til varnar skot ok spjót, Fms. vii. 193; er þín ráð vóru höfð, that thy advice was taken, Fs. 57; Gríss hafði þessi ráð, Fms. iii. 21; ek vil at þat sé haft er ek legg til, x. 249; þykki mér þú vel hafa ( make good use of) þau tillög er ek legg fyrir þik, xi. 61; til þess alls er jarli þótti skipta, þá hafði hann þessa hluti, 129; tvau ný (net), ok hafa eigi höfð verit ( which have not been used), haf þú ( take) hvárt er þú vilt, Háv. 46; þær vil ek hafa enar nýju, en ek vil ekki hætta til at hafa enar fornu, id.; önnur er ný ok mikil ok hefir ( has) til einskis höfð ( used) verið, id.; buðkr er fyrir húslker er hafðr, Vm. 171; gjalda vápn þau er höfð eru, N. G. L. i. 75; þat hafði hann haft ( used) fyrir skála, Edda 29; þeir vóru hafðir til at festa með hús jafnan, Nj. 118; sá hólmr var hafðr til at …, Fms. i. 218; hann skyldi hafa hinn sama eið, x. 7; orð þau sem hann hafði ( had) um haft ( used), Nj. 56; orð þau er hann hafði ( made use of) í barnskírn, K. Þ. K. 14.2. more special phrases; hafa fagrmæli við e-n, to flatter one, Nj. 224; hafa hljóðmæli við e-n, to speak secretly to one, 223; allmikil fjölkyngi mun vera við höfð áðr svá fái gört, Edda 27; hafa mörg orð um e-t, Ld. 268; hafa tvímæli á e-u, to discuss, doubt, speak diffidently of a thing, Lv. 52; hafa viðrmæli um e-t, to use mocking words, Nj. 89; hafa nafn Drottins í hégóma, to take the Lord’s name in vain, Fms. i. 310; (hann var) mjök hafðr við mál manna, much used to, versed in lawsuits, Dropl. 8: hafa sik til e-s, to use oneself to a thing, i. e. to do a mean, paltry thing; þeir er til þess vilja hafa sik, at ganga í samkundur manna úboðit, Gþl. 200; ef hann vill sik til þessa hafa, Fms. i. 99: hafa sik við, to exert oneself; skaltú ok verða þik við at hafa um þetta mál, ef þú getr þat af þér fært, Grett. 160: hafa e-n at skotspæni, to use one as a target, Nj. 222; hafa e-n at hlífi-skildi sér, to use one as a shield, 262; hafa e-n at ginningar-fifli, auga-bragði, háði, hlátri, Hm. 133, Nj. 224, passim.IV. to have, hold, maintain, of a state or condition; hafa vináttu við e-n, to maintain friendship with one, Sks. 662; hafa vanmátt, to continue sick, Eg. 565; hafa hættu-mikit, to run a great risk, Nj. 149; hafa vitfirring, to be insane, Grág. i. 154; hafa heilindi, to have good health, 26, Hm. 67; hafa burði til e-s, to have the birthright to a thing. Eg. 479; hafa hug, áræði, hyggindi, to have the courage …, Hom. 28; hafa vit ( to know), skyn, greind … á e-u, to have understanding of a thing; hafa gaman, gleði, skemtun, ánægju af e-u, to have interest or pleasure in a thing; hafa leiða, ógeð, andstygð, hatr, óbeit á e-u, to dislike, be disgusted with, hate a thing; hafa elsku, mætr, virðing á e-u, to love, esteeem … a thing; hafa allan hug á e-u, to bend the mind to a thing; hafa grun á e-m, to suspect one; hafa ótta, beyg af e-u, to fear a thing; and in numberless other phrases.2. with prepp.:α. hafa e-t frammi (fram), to carry out, hold forth; hafa frammi róg, Nj. 166; hafa mál fram, to proceed with a suit, 101; stefnu-för, 78; heitstrengingar, Fms. xi. 103; ok öll lögmælt skil frammi hafa, and discharge all one’s official duties, 232; var um búit en ekki fram haft, all was made ready, but nothing done, viii. 113; beini má varla verða betri en hér er frammi hafðr, xi. 52; hafðú í frammi ( use) kúgan við þá uppi við fjöllin, Ísl. ii. 215; margir hlutir, þó at hann hafi í frammi, Sks. 276.β. hafa mikit, lítið fyrir e-u, to have much, little trouble about a thing; (hence fyrir-höfn, trouble.)γ. hafa við e-m (afl or the like understood), to be a match for one, Fms. vii. 170, Lv. 109, Nj. 89, Eg. 474, Anal. 176; hafa mikit, lítið við, to make a great, little display; (hence við-höfn, display, pomp); hann söng messu ok hafði mikit við, he sang mass and made a great thing of it, Nj. 157; þú hefir mikit við, thou makest a great show of it, Boll. 351; hann bað jarl leita, hann hafði lítið við þat, he did it lightly, Nj. 141; haf ekki slíkt við, do not say so, Ld. 182.B. To take, carry off, win, wield, [closely akin to Lat. capere]:I. to catch, take, esp. in the phrase, hafa ekki e-s, to miss one; hann kemsk á skóg undan, ok höfðu þeir hans ekki, he took to the forest and they missed him, Nj. 130; ekki munu vér hans hafa at sinni, we sha’nt catch him at present, Fms. vi. 278; hafða ek þess vætki vífs, Hm. 101; þeygi ek hana at heldr hefik, 95: in swearing, tröll, herr, gramir hafi þik, the trolls, ghosts, etc. take thee! tröll hafi líf, ef …, Kormak; tröll hafi Trefót allan! Grett. (in a verse); tröll hafi þína vini, tröll hafi hól þitt, Nj.; herr hafi Þóri til slægan, confound the wily Thorir! Fms. vi. 278, v. l. (emended, as the phrase is wrongly explained in Fms. xii. Gloss.); gramir hafi þik! vide gramr.II. to carry, carry off, bring; hafði einn hjartað í munni sér, one carried the heart off in his mouth, Nj. 95; hann hafði þat ( brought it) norðan með sér, Eg. 42; hafði Þórólfr heim marga dýrgripi, 4; hann hafði með sér skatt allan, 62; skaltú biðja hennar ok hafa hana heim hingat, Edda 22; fé þat er hann hafði ( had) út haft ( carried from abroad), Gullþ. 13; á fimm hestum höfðu þeir mat, Nj. 74; bókina er hann hafði ( had) út haft, Fms. vii. 156; konungr hafði biskup norðr til Björgynjar með sér, viii. 296; biskup lét hann hafa með sér kirkju-við ok járn-klukku, Landn. 42; hann hafði með sér skulda-lið sitt ok búferli, Eb. 8; hann tók ofan hofit, ok hafði með sér flesta viðu, id.; ok hafa hana í brott, Fms. i. 3; tekr upp barnit, ok hefir heim með sér, Ísl. ii. 20; hann hafði lög út hingat ór Noregi, he brought laws hither from Norway, Íb. 5; haf þú heim hvali til bæjar, Hým. 26; ok hafa hann til Valhallar, Nj. 119.III. to take, get; hann hafði þá engan mat né drykk, he took no food nor drink, Eg. 602; hann hafði eigi svefn, he got no sleep, Bs. i. 139.2. to get, gain, win; öfluðu sér fjár, ok höfðu hlutskipti mikit, Eg. 4; eigi þarftú at biðja viðsmjörs þess, þvíat hann mun þat alls ekki hafa, né þú, for neither he nor thou shall get it, Blas. 28; jarl vill hafa minn fund, he will have a meeting with me, 40, Skv. 1. 4: the sayings, hefir sá jafnan er hættir, he wins that risks, ‘nothing venture, nothing have,’ Hrafn. 16; sá hefir krás er krefr, Sl. 29.3. phrases, hafa meira hlut, to get the better lot, gain the day, Nj. 90, Fms. xi. 93; hafa gagn, sigr, to gain victory, ix. 132, Eg. 7, Hkr. i. 215, Ver. 38; hafa betr, to get the better; hafa verr, miðr, to have the worst of it, Fms. v. 86, Þorst. S. St. 48, passim; hafa mál sitt, to win one’s suit, Grág. i. 7, Fms. vii. 34; hafa kaup öll, to get all the bargain, Eg. 71; hafa tafl, to win the game, Fms. vii. 219; hafa erendi, to do one’s errand, succeed, Þkv. 10, 11, Fas. ii. 517: hafa bana, to have one’s bane, to die, Nj. 8; hafa úsigr, to be worsted, passim; hafa úfrið, to have no peace; hafa gagn, sóma, heiðr, neisu, óvirðing, skömm, etc. af e-u, to get profit, gain, honour, disgrace, etc. from a thing; hafa e-n í helju, to put one to death, Al. 123; hafa e-n undir, to get one under, subdue him, Nj. 95, 128; höfum eigi, sigrinn ór hendi, let not victory slip out of our hands, Fms. v. 294.4. to get, receive; hann hafði góðar viðtökur, Nj. 4; hón skal hafa sex-tigi hundraða, 3; skyldi Högni hafa land, 118; selja skipit, ef hann hafði þat fyrir ( if he could get for it) sem hann vildi; Flosi spurði í hverjum aurum hann vildi fyrir hafa, hann kvaðsk vildu fyrir hafa land, 259; hafa tíðindi, sögur af e-m, to have, get tidings of or from one, Ld. 28; hafa sæmd, metorð óvirðing, to get honour, disgrace from one’s hands, Nj. 101; hafa bætr, to get compensation, Grág. i. 188; hafa innstæðuna eina, id.; hafa af e-m, to have the best of one, cheat one.IV. to carry, wear, of clothes, ornaments, weapons:1. of clothes, [cp. Lat. habitus and Icel. höfn = gear]; hafa hatt á höfði, Ld. 28; hafa váskufl yztan klæða, … þú skalt hafa undir ( wear beneath) hin góðu klæði þín, Nj. 32; hann hafði blán kyrtil, … hann hafði svartan kyrtil, Boll. 358; hafa fald á höfði, to wear a hood; hón hafði gaddan rautt á höfði, Orkn. 304; hann hafði um sik breitt belti, he wore a broad belt, Nj. 91; hafa fingr-gull á hendi, 146: to have about one’s person, vefja saman ok hafa í pungi sínum, Edda 27; hlutir sem mönnum var títt at hafa, Fms. xi. 128.2. of weapons, to wield, carry; spjót þat er þú hefir í hendi, Boll. 350; hafa kylfu í hendi sér, to have a club in one’s hand, Fms. xi. 129; hafa staf í hendi, to have a stick in the hand, Bárð.; Gunnarr hafði atgeirinn ok sverðit, Kolskeggr hafði saxit, Hjörtr hafði alvæpni, Nj. 93; hann hafdi öxi snaghyrnda, Boll. 358; hann hafði kesjuna fyrir sér, he held the lance in rest, Eg. 532.V. here may be added a few special phrases; hafa hendr fyrir sér, to grope, feel with the hands (as in darkness); hafa vit fyrir sér, to act wisely; hafa at sér hendina, to draw one’s hand back, Stj. 198; hafa e-t eptir, to do or repeat a thing after one, Konr.; hafa e-t yfir, to repeat (of a lesson): hafa sik, to betake oneself; hafa sik til annarra landa, Grett. 9 new Ed.; hann vissi varla hvar hann átti at hafa sik, he knew not where ( whither) to betake himself, Bs. i. 807; hefir hann sik aptr á stað til munklífisins, Mar.C. Passing into the sense of hefja (see at the beginning); hafa e-t uppi, to heave up, raise; hafa flokk uppi, to raise a party, to rebel, Fb. ii. 89: hafa uppi færi, net, a fisherman’s term, to heave up, take up the net or line, Háv. 46; Skarphéðinn hafði uppi ( heaved up) öxina, Nj. 144: hafa uppi tafl, to play at a game, Vápn. 29; þar vóru mjök töfl uppi höfð ok sagna-skemtan, Þorf. Karl. 406, v. l.: hafa e-n uppi, to hold one up, bring him to light; svá máttu oss skjótast uppi hafa, Fær. 42: metaph. to reveal, vándr riddari hafði allt þegar uppi, Str. 10.2. with the notion to begin; Bárðr hafði uppi orð sín ( began his suit) ok bað Sigríðar, Eg. 26, Eb. 142; hafa upp stefnu, to begin the summons, Boll. 350; hafa upp ræður, to begin a discussion; ræður þær er hann hafði uppi haft við Ingigerði, Fms. iv. 144, where the older text in Ó. H. reads umræður þær er hann hafði upp hafit (from hefja), 59; cp. also Vsp., þat langniðja-tal mun uppi hafat (i. e. hafit) meðan öld lifir, 16, (cp. upp-haf, beginning); þó at ek hafa síðarr um-ræðu um hann, better þó at ek hafa (i. e. hefja) síðarr upp ræðu um hann, though I shall below treat of, discuss that, Skálda (Thorodd) 168; er lengi hefir uppi verit haft síðan (of a song), Nj. 135; cp. also phrases such as, hafa á rás, to begin running, take to one’s heels, Fms. iv. 120, ix. 490; næsta morgin hefir út fjörðinn, the next morning a breeze off land arose, Bs. ii. 48: opp. is the phrase, hafa e-t úti, to have done, finished; hafa úti sitt dags-verk, Fms. xi. 431; hafa úti sekt sína, Grett. 149.D. Passing into the sense of a lost strong verb, hafa, hóf (see at the beginning), to behave, do, act:I. with an adverb, hafa vel, ílla, or the like, to behave, and in some instances to do well or badly, be happy or unhappy,α. to behave; en nú vil ek eigi verr hafa en þú, Fms. iv. 342; þeir sögðu at konungr vildi verr hafa en þeir, 313; hefir þú ílla ór (málum or the like understood) haft við mik, Fs. 140; ólikr er Gísli öðrum í þolinmæði, ok hefir hann betr en vér, Gísl. 28.β. to do so and so (to be happy, unhappy); verr hafa þeir er trygðum slitu, Mkv. 3; ílla hefir sá er annan svíkr, 18; vel hefir sá er þat líða lætr, 6; vel hefir sá ( he is happy) er eigi bíðr slíkt íllt þessa heims, Fms. v. 145; hvílíkt hefir þú, how dost thou? Mar.; hafa hart, to do badly, to be wretched; at sál Þorgils mætti fyrir þær sakir eigi hart hafa, Sturl. iii. 292, Mar.; Ólafr hafði þá hölzti ílla, O. was very poorly, D. N. ii. 156; þykisk sá bezt hafa ( happiest) er fyrstr kemr heim, Fms. xi. 248; þá hefir hann bazt af hann þegir, i. e. that is the best he can do if he holds his tongue, Hm. 19; þess get ek at sá hafi verr ( he will make a bad bargain) er þik flytr, Nj. 128; úlfgi hefir ok vel, the wolf is in a bad plight, Ls. 39; mun sá betr hafa er eigi tekr við þér, id.; betr hefðir þú, ef …, thou wouldest do better, if …, Akv. 16.γ. adding sik; hafa sik vel, to behave well, Fms. x. 415, Stj. 436.II. with the prep. at, to do, act, (hence at-höfn, at-hæfi, act, doing); hann lét ekki til búa vígs-málit ok engan hlut at hafa, Nj. 71; en ef þeim þykkir of lítið féit tekit, þá skulu þeir hafa at hit sama, to act in the same way, Grág. ii. 267; hvatki es þeir hafa at, Fms. xi. 132; hann tók af þér konuna, en þú hafðir ekki at, but thou didst not stir, didst take it tamely, Nj. 33; bæði munu menn þetta kalla stórvirki ok íllvirki, en þó má nú ekki at hafa, but there is no help for it, 202; eigi sýnisk mér meðal-atferðar-leysi, at vér höfum eigi at um kvámur hans, i. e. that we submit tamely to his coming, Fs. 32: absol., viltú þess freista, ok vita þá hvat at hafi, wilt thou try and see how it will do? Bjarn. 27; en nú skaltú fara fyrir, ok vita hvat at hafi, Bs. i. 712.III. phrases, hafa hátt, to be noisy, talk loud, Fms. i. 66; við skulum ekki hafa hátt ( do not cry loud) hér er maðr á glugganum, a lullaby song; hafa lágt, to keep silent; hafa hægt, to keep quiet; hafa sik á (í) hófi, to compose oneself, Ls. 36; hafa í hótum við e-n, to use threatening ( foul) language, Fb. i. 312; hafa í glett við e-n, to banter one, Fms. viii. 289; hafa íllt at verki, to do a bad deed, Ísl. ii. 184.E. Passing into the sense of the verb hæfa (see at the beginning), to aim at, hit, with dat.:I. to hit; svá nær hafði hausinum, at …, the shot so nearly hit the head, that …, Fms. ii. 272; þat sama forað, sem henni hafði næst váða, those very precipices from which she had so narrow an escape, Bs. i. 200, Fms. ix. 357; nær hafði nú, at skjótr mundi verða okkarr skilnaðr, Al. 124; nær hafði okkr nú, it struck near us, it was a narrow escape, Fms. viii. 281; kvaðsk svá dreymt hafa ( have dreamed), at þeim mundi nær hafa, ix. 387, v. l.; ok er nær hafði at skipit mundi fljóta, when the ship was on the point of floating, Ld. 58; ok hafði svá nær (it was within a hair’s breadth), at frændr Þorvalds mundu ganga at honum, Nj. 160; ok hafði svá nær at þeir mundi berjask, Íb. 11, cp. Bs. i. 21: the phrase, fjarri hefir, far from it! Edda (in a verse).2. to charge; eigi em ek þar fyrir sönnu hafðr, I am not truly aimed at for that, ‘tis a false charge, Eg. 64; þeim manni er fyrir sökum er hafðr, i. e. the culprit, Grág. i. 29; cp. the mod. phrase, hafa á e-u, to make a charge of a thing; það varð ekki á því haft, they could not make a case for a charge of it.II. metaph. to be the ground or reason for, (hence til-hæfa, reason, fact, foundation); til þess ætla vitrir menn þat haft at Ísland sé Tile (i. e. Thule) kallað, at …, learned men suppose that is the reason that Iceland is called Thule, that …, Landn. (pref.); mikit mun til haft, er einmæli er um (there must be some reason for it, because all people say so), Þorgils segir, eigi er fyrir haft ( there is no ground whatever for it), at ek mæla betr fyrir griðum en aðrir menn, Ísl. ii. 379; vér hyggjum þat til þess haft vera, at þar hafi menn sésk, we believe the substance of the story is that men have been seen there, Fms. xi. 158; hvat er til þess haft um þat (what is the truth of the matter?), hefir sundr-þykki orðit með ykkr? Boll. 364: in the saying, hefir hverr til síns ágætis nokkut, every one gets his reputation for something, Nj. 115.2. to happen, coincide; hefir svá til, at hann var þar sjálfr, Fms. xi. 138, v. l.β. the phrase, hafa mikit (lítið) til síns máls, to have much ( little) reason for one’s tale, i. e. to be much, little, in the right, Fms. vii. 221, xi. 138 (v. l.), Nj. 88: um þenna hefir svá stórum, it matters so much with this man, (v. l. for mun stórum skipta), Fms. xi. 311.F. REFLEX. to keep, dwell, abide, but only of a temporary shelter or abode, cp. Lat. habitare, (cp. also höfn, a haven); hann hefsk á náttartíma niðri í vötnum, at night-time he keeps down in the water, Stj. 77: to live, þeir höfðusk mjök í kaupferðum, they spent much of their life in travelling, Hkr. i. 276; hann hafðisk löngum í bænum, Bs. i. 353.β. with prep. við; hér mun ek við hafask ( I will stay here) en þú far til konungs, Fb. ii. 125; hafðisk hann við á skógum eðr í öðrum fylgsnum, 302; því at hann hafðisk þá á skipum við, Fms. viii. 44; hvílsk heldr ok hafsk við í því landi, rest and stay in that land, Stj. 162; Ásgeirr hafðisk við uppi í dalnum, Sd. 154; hafask lind fyrir, to cover oneself with a shield (?), Vsp. 50; hafask hlífar fyrir, to be mailed in armour, Hkm. 11.2. hafask at, to do, behave (cp. D. above); vóru þeir þá svá móðir, at þeir máttu ekki at hafask, Fms. ii. 149; en síðan skulut þér at hafa slíkt sem ek kann fyrir segja, i. 158; þat eitt munu við at hafask, at ek mun betr göra en þú, Nj. 19; Lambi sá hvat Steinarr hafðisk at, Eg. 747.3. hafask vel, to do well, thrive; vaxa ok vel hafask, to wax and do well, Hm. 142; nú er þat bæn mín, at þér hafisk við vel, that you bear yourself well up, Fms. ix. 497; Jungfrúin hafðisk vel við í ferðinni, x. 86; at fé hans mundi eigi hafask at betr at meðal-vetri, Grág. ii. 326.4. recipr., hafask orð við, to speak to one another; ok er þat ósiðlegt, at menn hafisk eigi orð við, Fs. 14; þar til er þeir hafask réttar tölur við, N. G. L. i. 182.II. part. hafandi is used in the sense of having conceived, being with child; þá verit hann varr við at hón var hafandi, 656 B. 14; hón skyldi verða hafandi at Guðs syni, id.; generally, allt þat er hafanda var lét burð sinn ok ærðisk, Fms. vii. 187; svá sem hón verðr at honum hafandi, Stj. 178; (hence barns-hafandi, being with child.)G. The word hafa is in the Icel., as in other Teut. languages, used as an auxiliary verb with a part. pass. of another verb, whereby a compound preterite and pluperfect are formed as follows:I. in transitive verbs with acc. the participle also was put in acc., agreeing in gender, number, and case with the objective noun or pronoun; this seems to have been a fixed rule in the earliest time, and is used so in all old poems down at least to the middle of the 11th century, to the time of Sighvat (circ. A. D. 990–1040), who constantly used the old form,—átt is an apostrophe for átta in the verse Ó. H. 81:1. references from poets, Gm. 5, 12, 16; þá er forðum mik fædda höfðu, Vsp. 2; hverr hefði lopt lævi blandit eðr ætt jötuns Óðs mey gefna, 29; þær’s í árdaga áttar höfðu, 60: ek hafða fengna konungs reiði, Ad. 3; en Grjótbjörn um gnegðan hefir, 18; mik hefir marr miklu ræntan, Stor. 10; þó hefir Míms-vinr mér um fengnar bölva bætr, 22: gaupur er Haraldr hafi sveltar, Hornklofi: Loka mær hefir leikinn allvald, Ýt. 7; sá hafði borinn brúna-hörg, 14; jarlar höfðu veginn hann, 15: ek hef orðinn ( found) þann guðföðr (verða is here used as trans.), Hallfred; höfum kera framðan, id.: hann hefir litnar, sénar, hár bárur, Ísl. ii. 223, thus twice in a verse of A. D. 1002; göngu hefik of gengna, Korm. (in a verse); hann hafði farna för, Hkr. i. (Glum Geirason); ek hefi talðar níu orustur, Sighvat; þú hefir vanðan þik, id.; ér hafit rekna þá braut, Ó. H. 63 (Óttar Svarti); hann hefir búnar okkr hendr skrautliga, Sighvat (Ó. H. 13); þeir hafa færð sín höfuð Knúti, id.; hvar hafit ér hugðan mér sess, id.; hafa sér kenndan enn nørðra heims enda, id.; Sighvatr hefir lattan gram, id.; hefir þú hamar um fólginn, Þkv. 7, 8; þú hefir hvatta okkr, Gkv. 6; ek hefi yðr brennda, Am. 39, cp. 56; hefi ek þik minntan, 81; hefir þú hjörtu tuggin, Akv. 36; hefir þú mik dvalðan, Hbl. 51; ek hefi hafðar þrár, I have had throes, Fsm. 51; en ek hann görvan hef-k, svá hefi ek studdan, 12 (verse 13 is corrupt); hann hefir dvalða þik, Hkv. Hjörv. 29; lostna, 30; mik hefir sóttan meiri glæpr, 32; ek hefi brúði kerna, id.; þú hefir etnar úlfa krásir, opt sár sogin, Hkv. 1. 36; sá er opt hefir örnu sadda, 35; hefir þú kannaða koni óneisa, 23; þá er mik svikna höfðut, Skv. 3. 55; hann hafði getna sonu, Bkv. 8; þann sal hafa halir um görvan, Fm. 42; bróður minn hefir þú benjaðan, 25; er hann ráðinn hefir, 37; sjaldan hefir þú gefnar vargi bráðir, Eg. (in a verse).2. references from prose; this old form has since been turned into an indecl. neut. sing. part. -it. The old form was first lost in the strong verbs and the weak verbs of the first conjugation: in the earliest prose both forms are used, although the indecl. is more freq. even in the prose writers, as Íb., the Heiðarv. S., the Miracle-book in Bs., Njála, Ó. H., (Thorodd seems only to use the old form,) as may be seen from the following references, Björn hafði særða þrjá menn, Nj. 262; hann mundi hana hafa gipta honum, 47; hann hafði þá leidda saman hestana, 264: ek hefi sendan mann, Ísl. (Heiðarv. S.) ii. 333; ek nefi senda menn, id.: hafa son sinn ór helju heimtan, Bs. (Miracle-book) i. 337; en er þeir höfðu niðr settan sveininn, 349; hann hafði veidda fimm tegu fiska, 350: er þér hefir ílla neisu gorva, Ó. H. 107: þá hefi ek fyrri setta þá í stafrófi, Skálda (Thorodd) 161; þar hefi ek við görva þessa stafi fjóra, id.; hafa hann samsettan, 167: góða fylgd hefir þú mér veitta, Þorst Síðu H. 2: sagði, at Ólafr konungr hafði sendan hann, Bs. i. 11: Þyri, er hertogi hafði festa nauðga, Fms. x. 393 (Ágrip): hefi ek þá svá signaða ok magnaða, v. 236: hefir sólin gengna tvá hluti, en einn úgenginn, K. Þ. K. 92 (Lund’s Syntax, p. 12).β. again, neut. indecl., hana hafði átt fyrr Þoróddr, Ísl. ii. 192: hón hafði heimt húskarl sinn …, Ísl. (Heiðarv. S.) ii. 339; hann hefir ekki svá vel gyrt hest minn, 340; hefir þú eigi séð mik, 341; hve hann hafði lokkat hann. id.; gistingar hefi ek yðr fengit, 343: þeir höfðu haft úfrið ok orrostur, Íb. 12; hann hafði tekið lögsögu, 14: stafr er átt hafði Þorlákr, Bs. (Miracle-book) i. 340; er þær höfðu upp tekit ketilinn ok hafit …, 342; göngu es hann hafði gingit, 344; es sleggjuna hafði niðr fellt, 346; sem maðr hefði nýsett (hana) niðr, id.; jartein þá er hann þóttisk fingit hafa, 347; hafði prestrinn fært fram sveininn, 349: hjálm er Hreiðmarr hafði átt, Edda 73: hafa efnt sína heitstrenging, Fms. (Jómsv. S.) xi. 141: slíkan dóm sem hann hafði mér hugat, Ó. H. 176, etc. passim:—at last the inflexion disappeared altogether, and so at the present time the indecl. neut. sing. is used throughout; yet it remains in peculiar instances, e. g. konu hefi eg mér festa, Luke xiv. 20, cp. Vídal. ii. 21. ☞ This use of the inflexive part. pass. may often serve as a test of the age of a poem, e. g. that Sólarljóð was composed at a later date may thus be seen from verses 27, 64, 72, 73, 75, 79; but this test is to be applied with caution, as the MSS. have in some cases changed the true forms (-inn, -ann, and -it, -an being freq. abbreviated in the MSS. so as to render the reading dubious). In many cases the old form is no doubt to be restored, e. g. in vegit to veginn, Fm. 4, 23; búit to búinn, Hkv. Hjörv. 15; borit to borinn, Hkv. 1. 1; beðit to beðinn, Fsm. 48; orðit to orðin, Og. 23; roðit to roðinn, Em. 5; brotið to brotinn, Vkv. 24, etc.: but are we to infer from Ls. 23, 26, 33, that this poem is of a comparatively late age?II. the indecl. neut. sing. is, both in the earliest poems and down to the present day, used in the following cases:1. with trans. verbs requiring the dat. or gen.; ek hefi fengit e-s, hann hafði fengit konu; hafa hefnt e-s, Fms. xi. 25; sú er hafði beðit fjár, Þkv. 32; stillir hefir stefnt mér, Hkv. Hjörv. 33, and so in endless cases.2. in the reflex. part. pass.; þeir (hann) hafa (hefir) látisk, farisk, sagsk, etc.3. in part. of intrans. neut. verbs, e. g. þeir þær (hann, hón), hafa (hefir) setið, staðit, gengit, legit, farit, komit, verit, orðit, lifað, dáit, heitið …, also almost in every line both of prose and poetry.4. in trans. verbs with a neut. sing. in objective case the difference cannot be seen.☞ The compound preterite is common to both the Romance and Teutonic languages, and seems to be older in the former than in the latter; Grimm suggests that it originated with the French, and thence spread to the Teutons. That it was not natural to the latter is shewn by the facts, thatα. no traces of it are found in Gothic, nor in the earliest Old High German glossaries to Latin words.β. in the earliest Scandinavian poetry we can trace its passage from declinable to indeclinable.γ. remains are left in poetry of a primitive uncompounded preterite infinitive, e. g. stóðu = hafa staðit, mundu, skyldu, vildu, etc., see Gramm. p. xxv, col. 2. ☞ We may here note a curious dropping of the verb hefir, at ek em kominn hingat til lands, ok verit áðr ( having been) langa hríð utan-lands, Ó. H. 31, cp. Am. 52; barn at aldri, en vegit slíka hetju sem Þorvaldr var, Glúm. 382. On this interesting matter see Grimm’s remarks in his Gramm. iv. 146 sqq. -
13 saber
m.knowledge.El saber es un tesoro Knowledge is priceless.v.1 to know.ya lo sé I knowde haberlo sabido (antes) o si lo llego a saber, me quedo en casa if I'd known, I'd have stayed at homehacer saber algo a alguien to inform somebody of something, to tell somebody somethingpara que lo sepas, somos amigos we're friends, for your informationEllos saben de eso They know about that.Ellos saben la información They know the information.2 to learn, to find out (enterarse de).lo supe ayer I found out yesterday¿sabes algo de Juan?, ¿qué sabes de Juan? have you had any news from o heard from Juan?3 to know about (entender de).sabe mucha física he knows a lot about physics4 to taste.saber bien/mal to taste good/badsaber a cuernos o rayos (informal figurative) to taste disgusting o revoltingle supo mal (figurative) it upset o annoyed him (le enfadó)Esto sabe bien This tastes good.5 to know how to, to know, to know to.Ellos saben pintar They know how to paint.* * *Present Indicativesé, sabes, sabe, sabemos, sabéis, saben.Past IndicativeFuture IndicativeConditionalPresent SubjunctiveImperfect SubjunctiveFuture SubjunctiveImperative* * *1. verb1) to know2) can3) learn•- a saber- saber a 2. noun m.* * *1. VT1) (=tener conocimiento de)a) [+ dato, información] to knowsin saberlo yo — without my knowledge, without me knowing
•
hacer saber algo a algn — to inform sb of sth, let sb know about sthquiero hacerle saber que... — I would like to inform o advise you that...
el motivo de esta carta es hacerle saber que... — I am writing to inform o advise you that...
b) [locuciones]•
a saber — namelydos planetas, a saber, Venus y la Tierra — two planets, namely Venus and Earth
•
demasiado bien sé que... — I know only too well that...¡no lo sabes bien! — * not half! *
•
cualquiera sabe si... — it's anybody's guess whether...•
¡de haberlo sabido! — if only I'd known!•
lo dudo, pero nunca se sabe — I doubt it, but you never know•
para que lo sepas — let me tell you, for your information•
que yo sepa — as far as I know•
¡ quién sabe! — who knows!¿quién sabe? — who knows?, who can tell?, who's to say?
•
¡si lo sabré yo! — I should know!•
tú sabrás (lo que haces) — I suppose you know (what you're doing)¿tú qué sabes? — what do you know about it?
•
¡ vete a saber! — God knows!¡vete a saber de dónde ha venido! — goodness only knows where he came from!
•
ya lo sabía yo — I thought as muchBriján•
¡yo qué sé!, ¡qué sé yo! — how should I know!, search me! *2) (=enterarse de) to find outen cuanto lo supimos fuimos a ayudarle — as soon as we found out, we went to help him
cuando lo supe — when I heard o found out about it
3) (=tener noticias) to hear4) (=tener destreza en)¿sabes ruso? — do you speak Russian?, can you speak Russian?
no sé nada de cocina — I don't know anything about cookery, I know nothing about cookery
•
saber hacer algo, sabe cuidar de sí mismo — he can take care of himself, he knows how to take care of himself¿sabes nadar? — can you swim?
¿sabes ir? — do you know the way?
5) LAmno sabe venir por aquí — he doesn't usually come this way, he's not in the habit of coming along here
2. VI1) (=tener conocimiento)•
saber de algo — to know of sthhace mucho que no sabemos de ella — it's quite a while since we heard from her, we haven't had any news from her for quite a while
2) (=estar enterado) to knowcostó muy caro, ¿sabe usted? — it was very expensive, you know
un 5% no sabe, no contesta — there were 5% "don't knows"
3) (=tener sabor) to taste•
saber a — to taste ofsaberle mal a algn —
me supo muy mal lo que hicieron — I didn't like what they did, I wasn't pleased o didn't feel good about what they did
no me sabe mal que un amigo me gaste bromas — I don't mind a friend playing jokes on me, it doesn't bother me having a friend play jokes on me
3.See:SABER Por regla general, si saber va seguido de un infinitivo, se traduce por can cuando indica una habilidad permanente y por know how cuando se trata de la capacidad de resolver un problema concreto. La construcción correspondiente habrá de ser can + ((INFINITIVO)) {sin} to {o} know how + ((INFINITIVO)) {con} to: Jaime sabe tocar el piano Jaime can play the piano ¿Sabes cambiar una rueda? Do you know how to change a wheel? Hay que tener en cuenta que know (sin how) nunca puede ir seguido directamente de un infinitivo en inglés. Para otros usos y ejemplos ver la entrada* * *Imasculino knowledgeII 1.verbo transitivo1)a) <nombre/dirección/canción> to knowasí que or conque ya lo sabes — so now you know
para que lo sepas, yo no miento — (fam) for your information, I don't tell lies
cállate ¿tú qué sabes? — shut up! what do you know about it?
yo qué sé dónde está! — how (on earth) should I know where he/it is! (colloq)
no se sabe si... — they don't know if...
¿a que no sabes qué? — (fam) you'll never guess what
hacerle saber algo a alguien — (frml) to inform somebody of something
b) ( darse cuenta de) to know2) ( ser capaz de)saber + inf — to know how to + inf
¿sabes nadar/escribir a máquina? — can you swim/type?, do you know how to swim/type?
sabe defenderse — she knows how to o she can look after herself
3) ( enterarse) to find outsi es así, pronto se va a saber — if that's the case, we'll know o find out soon enough
cómo iba yo a saber que...! — how was I to know that...!
¿se puede saber por qué? — may I ask why?
¿y tú dónde estabas, si se puede saber? — and where were you, I'd like to know?
4)2.a saber — (frml) namely
saber vi1)a) ( tener conocimiento) to knowvete tú/vaya usted a saber — but who knows
¿quién sabe? — who knows?
saber de algo/alguien — to know of something/somebody
b) (tener noticias, enterarse)saber de alguien/algo: no sé nada de ella desde hace más de un mes I haven't heard from her for over a month; yo supe del accidente por la radio I heard about the accident on the radio; no quiero saber de él — I want nothing to do with him
2)a) ( tener sabor) (+ compl) to tastesabe dulce/bien/amargo — it tastes sweet/nice/bitter
b) ( causar cierta impresión)3.saberle mal/bien a alguien: no le supo nada bien que ella bailara con otro he wasn't at all pleased that she danced with someone else; me sabe mal tener que decírselo — I don't like having to tell him
saberse v pron (enf) <lección/poema> to knowsabérselas todas — (fam) to know every trick in the book (colloq)
* * *Imasculino knowledgeII 1.verbo transitivo1)a) <nombre/dirección/canción> to knowasí que or conque ya lo sabes — so now you know
para que lo sepas, yo no miento — (fam) for your information, I don't tell lies
cállate ¿tú qué sabes? — shut up! what do you know about it?
yo qué sé dónde está! — how (on earth) should I know where he/it is! (colloq)
no se sabe si... — they don't know if...
¿a que no sabes qué? — (fam) you'll never guess what
hacerle saber algo a alguien — (frml) to inform somebody of something
b) ( darse cuenta de) to know2) ( ser capaz de)saber + inf — to know how to + inf
¿sabes nadar/escribir a máquina? — can you swim/type?, do you know how to swim/type?
sabe defenderse — she knows how to o she can look after herself
3) ( enterarse) to find outsi es así, pronto se va a saber — if that's the case, we'll know o find out soon enough
cómo iba yo a saber que...! — how was I to know that...!
¿se puede saber por qué? — may I ask why?
¿y tú dónde estabas, si se puede saber? — and where were you, I'd like to know?
4)2.a saber — (frml) namely
saber vi1)a) ( tener conocimiento) to knowvete tú/vaya usted a saber — but who knows
¿quién sabe? — who knows?
saber de algo/alguien — to know of something/somebody
b) (tener noticias, enterarse)saber de alguien/algo: no sé nada de ella desde hace más de un mes I haven't heard from her for over a month; yo supe del accidente por la radio I heard about the accident on the radio; no quiero saber de él — I want nothing to do with him
2)a) ( tener sabor) (+ compl) to tastesabe dulce/bien/amargo — it tastes sweet/nice/bitter
b) ( causar cierta impresión)3.saberle mal/bien a alguien: no le supo nada bien que ella bailara con otro he wasn't at all pleased that she danced with someone else; me sabe mal tener que decírselo — I don't like having to tell him
saberse v pron (enf) <lección/poema> to knowsabérselas todas — (fam) to know every trick in the book (colloq)
* * *saber11 = learning.Ex: It is the responsibility of educators to stretch their student's intellects, hone their skills of intuitive judgment and synthesis, and build a love of learning that will sustain them beyond the level of formal education.
* ansia de saber = thirst for knowledge.* a + Posesivo + saber = to the best of + Posesivo + knowledge.* a + Posesivo + saber y entender = to the best of + Posesivo + knowledge and belief.* cúmulo de saber = knowledge repository, repository of knowledge.* hasta donde + Pronombre + saber = to the best of + Posesivo + knowledge.* institución del saber = institution of learning.* no querer saber más nada de = drop + Nombre + like a hot potato.* por el bien del saber = for knowledge's sake.* por el mero hecho de saber = for knowledge's sake.* rama del saber = branch of learning.* saber escuchar = listening capacity.saber22 = know, learn, find out.Ex: However, in general, it is unreasonable to expect a user to know the ISBN of a book.
Ex: 'I'd be disappointed to learn that my boss or subordinates -- or peers for that matter -- told tales out of school about me to others'.Ex: For example, a person can consult the system holdings files to find out whether a library in the network owns a copy of the document.* a saber = namely, viz, to wit.* capacidad de saber leer y escribir = literacy skills.* curioso por saber = interrogator.* de quién sabe dónde = out of the woodwork.* hacer saber = let + Nombre + know, let + it be known.* hacer saber la intención de uno = announce + intention.* nada sabe mejor que sentirse delgado = nothing tastes as good as thin feels.* no querer saber más nada de = drop + Nombre + like a hot brick.* no querer saber nada de = want + nothing to do with.* no saber cómo explicarlo = be at a loss to explain it.* no saber cómo seguir = be stuck, get + stuck.* no saber de = have + no understanding of.* no saber dónde meterse de vergüenza = squirm with + embarrassment.* no saber expresarse bien = inarticulateness.* no saber más por ello = be none the wiser.* no saber qué contestar = stump.* no saber qué decir = be at a loss for words, be lost for words.* no saber qué hacer = be at a loss, get out of + Posesivo + depth, be on the horns of a dilemma, be at a nonplus.* no saber qué hacer a continuación = draw + a blank, be stuck, get + stuck.* no saber qué hacer con = be at sixes and sevens with.* no saber qué más hacer = be at + Posesivo + wit's end.* no saberse cuándo = there + be + no telling when.* no se sabe todavía = the jury is still out (on).* nunca se sabe... = one never knows....* persona que sabe contar anécdotas = raconteur.* por lo que yo sé = to the best of my knowledge.* quedar mucho por saber = there + be + a great deal yet to be learned, there + be + still a great deal to be learned.* que sabe lo que = who knows what.* ¿quién sabe? = who knows?.* quién sabe lo que = who knows what.* quién sabe qué = who knows what.* saber a ciencia cierta = know for + certain, know for + sure, know for + a fact.* saber a ciencia cierta que = know + for a fact that.* saber argumentar Algo convincentemente = make + a business case.* saber buscar con inteligencia = be search-savvy.* saber con certeza = know for + certain, know for + sure, know for + a fact.* saber contestar muy bien = be not at a loss for words.* saber cúal es la verdad = discern + the truth.* saber de algún modo = know + on some grounds.* saber de buena boca = have + it on good word.* saber de buena tinta = have + it on good word.* saber defenderse = hold + Posesivo + own.* saber de lo que Uno estar hablando = know + Posesivo + stuff.* saber de seguro = know for + certain, know for + sure, know for + a fact.* saber escuchar = listening skills.* saber hacer = savoir faire.* saber hacer cuentas = be numerate.* saber interiormente = know + underneath.* saber leer y escribir = be literate.* saberlo todo = be omniscient.* saberse Algo al dedillo = know + Nombre + inside-out, learn + Nombre + inside-out.* saber un poco de todo y mucho de nada = jack of all trades, master of none.* sabiendo diferenciar entre lo que vale y lo que no = discriminatingly.* sabiendo que = on the understanding that.* salir de quién sabe dónde = come out of + the woodwork.* ser una incógnita = be anyone's guess.* sin saberlo = unbeknown to, unbeknownst to.* sin saber qué decir = nonplussed [nonplused].* un no sé qué = a je ne sais quoi.* y Dios sabe qué más = and Heaven knows what else.saber33 = taste.Ex: Professional skills are enhanced by the opportunity which IFLA provides to taste the cultures of other countries in a very accessible (dare I say privileged?) way.
* saber a = reek of.* * *knowledgeun compendio del saber humano a compendium of human knowledgeuna persona de gran saber a person of great learningel saber no ocupa lugar one can never know too muchvtA1 ‹nombre/dirección/chiste/canción› to know(ya) lo sé, pero aun así … I know, but even so …quizás sea así, no lo sé that might be the case, I don't knowasí que or conque ya lo sabes so now you know¡no le habrás dicho nada de aquello que tú sabes! you didn't tell him anything about you know what, did you?no sabía que tenía or tuviera hijos I didn't know he had (any) children¿sabes lo que me dijo? do you know what he said to me?¿sabes lo que te digo? ¡que me tienes harta! you know something? I'm fed up with you!para que lo sepas, yo no miento ( fam); for your information, I don't tell lieses tan latoso … — ¡si lo sabré yo! he's such a nuisance — don't I know it!cállate ¿tú qué sabes? shut up! what do you know about it?¡yo qué sé dónde está tu diccionario! how (on earth) should I know where your dictionary is! ( colloq)no se sabe si se salvará they don't know if he'll pull throughno sabía dónde meterme I didn't know where to put myselfno supe qué decir I didn't know what to saymira, no sé qué decirte look, I really don't know what to sayno lo saben a ciencia cierta they don't know for certain¿a que no sabes a quién vi? ( fam); I bet you don't know who I saw ( colloq), you'll never guess who I sawquién or cualquiera sabe dónde estará goodness only knows where it isle salió con no sé qué historias ( fam); he came out with some story or othertiene un no sé qué que la hace muy atractiva she has a certain something that makes her very attractiveese hombre tiene un no sé qué que me cae mal there's something about that man I don't likeme da no sé qué tener que decirte esto I feel very awkward about having to say this to youya no viven allí, que yo sepa as far as I know, they don't live there anymore¿tiene antecedentes? — que yo sepa no does she have any previous convictions? — not that I know of—¿quién es ése? —quiso saber who's that? he wanted to knowsé muy poco de ese tema I know very little about the subjectsabe mucho sobre la segunda guerra mundial he knows a lot about the Second World War2por la presente deseo hacerle saber que … ( Corresp) I am pleased to advise you o to be able to inform you that …la directiva hace saber a los señores socios que … the board wishes to inform members o advises members that …3 (darse cuenta) to know¡tú no sabes lo que es esto! you can't imagine what it's like!está furiosa, no sabes lo que te espera she's furious, you don't know what you're in forperdónalos Señor, porque no saben lo que hacen ( Bib) forgive them, Lord, for they know not what they doB (ser capaz de) saber + INF:¿sabes nadar/cocinar/escribir a máquina? can you swim/cook/type?ya sabe leer y escribir she can already read and writesabe escuchar she's a good listenerno saben perder they're bad losersno sabe tratar con la gente he doesn't know how to deal with peopleno te preocupes, ella sabe defenderse don't worry, she knows how to o she can look after herselfeste niño no sabe estarse quieto this child is incapable of keeping still o just can't keep stillClo forman cuatro países, a saber: Suecia, Noruega, Dinamarca y Finlandia it is made up of four countries, namely Sweden, Norway, Denmark and FinlandD (enterarse) to find outno lo supimos hasta ayer we didn't find out until yesterdaylo supe por mi hermana I found out about it through my sister, I heard about it o ( frml) learned of it through my sistersi es así, pronto se va a saber if that's the case, we'll know soon enough¡si yo lo hubiera sabido antes! if I had only known before!¿que qué me dijo de ti? ¡no quieras saberlo! what did she say about you? don't ask! o you wouldn't want to know!¿se puede saber qué estabas haciendo allí? would you mind telling me what you were doing there?¿y tú dónde estabas, si se puede saber? and where were you, I'd like to know?■ saberviA1 to know¿crees que vendrá? — supongo que sí, aunque con ella nunca se sabe do you think she'll come? — I suppose so, although you never know o you can never tell with herdice que ella se lo dio, vete tú/vaya usted a saber he says she gave it to him, but who knowsno puede ser verdad — ¿quién sabe? a lo mejor sí it can't be true — who knows, it could beparece incapaz de eso, pero nunca se sabe or cualquiera sabe he doesn't seem capable of such a thing, but you never knowél que sabe, sabe ( fr hecha); it's easy when you know how2 saber DE algo/algn to know (of) sth/sbyo sé de un sitio donde te lo pueden arreglar I know (of) a place where you can get it fixed¿sabes de alguien que haya estado allí? do you know (of) anyone who's been there?3 (tener noticias) saber DE algn:no sé nada de ella desde hace más de un mes I haven't heard from her for over a monthno quiero saber nada más de él I want nothing more to do with himB (enterarse) saber DE algo:yo supe del accidente por la radio I heard about the accident on the radiosi llegas a saber de una cámara barata, avísame if you hear of a cheap camera, let me knowA (tener sabor) (+ compl) to tastesabe muy dulce/bien/amargo it tastes very sweet/nice/bittersaber A algo to taste OF sthsabe a ajo/almendra it tastes of garlic/almonds, it has a garlicky/almondy tasteesta sopa no sabe a nada this soup doesn't taste of anything o has no taste to itsabe a quemado/podrido it tastes burnt/rottentenía tanta hambre que el arroz me supo a gloria I was so hungry the rice tasted deliciousB(causar cierta impresión): saberle mal/bien a algn: no le supo nada bien que ella bailara con otro he wasn't at all pleased that she danced with someone elseme sabe mal tener que decirle que no otra vez I don't like having to say no to him again, I feel bad having to say no to him again■ sabersese sabe todo el cuento de memoria he knows the whole story off by heartse sabe los nombres de todos los jugadores del equipo he knows the names of every player in the teamsabérselas todas ( fam): este niño se las sabe todas this child knows every trick in the book ( colloq)se cree que se las sabe todas she thinks she has all the answersse sabe atractiva she knows she's attractive* * *
saber 1 sustantivo masculino
knowledge;
saber 2 ( conjugate saber) verbo transitivo
1
no lo sé I don't know;
no sé cómo se llama I don't know his name;
¡yo qué sé! how (on earth) should I know! (colloq);
que yo sepa as far as I know;
saber algo de algo to know sth about sth;
sé muy poco de ese tema I know very little about the subject;
no sabe lo que dice he doesn't know what he's talking about
sin que lo supiéramos without our knowing;
¡si yo lo hubiera sabido antes! if I had only known before!;
¡cómo iba yo a saber que …! how was I to know that …!
2 ( ser capaz de):
¿sabes nadar? can you swim?, do you know how to swim?;
sabe escuchar she's a good listener;
sabe hablar varios idiomas she can speak several languages
verbo intransitivo
◊ ¿quién sabe? who knows?;
saber de algo/algn to know of sth/sb;
yo sé de un lugar donde te lo pueden arreglar I know of a place where you can get it fixedb) (tener noticias, enterarse):
yo supe del accidente por la radio I heard about the accident on the radio
◊ sabe dulce/bien it tastes sweet/nice;
saber a algo to taste of sth;
no sabe a nada it doesn't taste of anything;
sabe a podrido it tastes rottenb) ( causar cierta impresión): me sabe mal or no me sabe bien tener que decírselo I don't like having to tell him
saberse verbo pronominal ( enf) ‹lección/poema› to know
saber sustantivo masculino knowledge, learning, information
saber
I verbo transitivo
1 (una cosa) to know: no sé su dirección, I don't know her address
para que lo sepas, for your information
que yo sepa, as far as I know
2 (hacer algo) to know how to: no sabe nadar, he can't swim
3 (capacidad, destreza) sabe dibujar muy bien, he knows how to draw really well
4 (comportarse, reaccionar) can: no sabe aguantar una broma, she can't take a joke
no sabe perder, he's a bad loser
5 (tener conocimientos elevados sobre una materia) sabe mucho de música, she knows a lot about music
6 (enterarse) to learn, find out: lo llamé en cuanto lo supe, I called him as soon as I heard about it
7 (estar informado) sabía que te ibas a retrasar, he knew that you were going to be late
8 (imaginar) no sabes qué frío hacía, you can't imagine how cold it was
II verbo intransitivo
1 (sobre una materia) to know [de, of]: sé de un restaurante buenísimo, I know of a very good restaurant
2 (tener noticias) (de alguien por él mismo) to hear from sb
(de alguien por otros) to have news of sb
(de un asunto) to hear about sthg
3 (tener sabor) to taste [a, of]: este guiso sabe a quemado, this stew tastes burnt
4 (producir agrado o desagrado) to like, please: me supo mal que no viniera, it upset me that he didn't come
♦ Locuciones: el saber no ocupa lugar, you can never learn too much
me ha sabido a poco, I couldn't get enough of it
quién sabe, who knows
vas a saber lo que es bueno, I'll show you what's what
vete a saber, God knows
a saber, namely
' saber' also found in these entries:
Spanish:
atenerse
- ávida
- ávido
- básica
- básico
- carta
- cojear
- combinar
- comparecencia
- conjugar
- consuelo
- convenir
- cuerno
- dedillo
- demonio
- desconocer
- diferenciar
- economía
- entender
- estimable
- estribar
- eufórica
- eufórico
- gloria
- impresión
- latín
- morbosa
- morboso
- puesta
- puesto
- relacionarse
- sable
- si
- terrena
- terreno
- tinta
- bien
- ciencia
- conocer
- conocimiento
- deber
- derecho
- experiencia
- feo
- hallar
- llegar
- lo
- mal
- memoria
- porqué
English:
acquaint
- aware
- can
- certain
- curious
- flounder
- fortuneteller
- guess
- hand
- hear
- horrify
- know
- learning
- namely
- nice
- pat
- pride
- should
- taste
- tell
- truck
- understand
- unknowingly
- wisdom
- able
- appreciation
- authority
- claim
- copy
- early
- funny
- heart
- knowledge
- let
- priority
- realize
- reassuring
- right
- saber
- sabre
- score
- skill
- stump
- suppose
- viz
- way
* * *♦ nmknowledge;Formalel saber no ocupa lugar you can never know too much♦ vt1. [conocer] to know;ya lo sé I know;no lo sé I don't know;yo no sabía nada de eso I didn't know anything about that;no sabía que eras médico I didn't know you were a doctor;ya sé lo que vas a decir I know what you're going to say;de haberlo sabido (antes) o [m5]si lo llego a saber, me quedo en casa if I'd known, I'd have stayed at home;hacer saber algo a alguien to inform sb of sth, to tell sb sth;para que lo sepas, somos amigos we're friends, for your information;¿sabes qué (te digo)?, que no me arrepiento you know what, I don't regret it;si lo sabré yo, que tengo cuatro hijos you're telling me! I've got four children!;sin yo saberlo, sin saberlo yo without my knowledge;Figno sabía dónde meterme I didn't know where to put myself, I wanted to crawl under a rock;no sabe lo que (se) hace she doesn't know what she's doing;no sabe lo que tiene he doesn't realize just how lucky he is;Famte ha llamado un tal Antonio no sé cuántos there was a call for you from Antonio something or other;no sé qué decir I don't know what to say;¡qué sé yo!, ¡y yo qué sé! how should I know!;¡qué sé yo la de veces que me caí de la bici! heaven knows how many times I fell off my bike!;Irónicocomo te pille vas a saber lo que es bueno just wait till I get my hands on you!;Irónicocuando hagas la mili sabrás lo que es bueno you'll be in for a nasty surprise when you do your military service;tener un no sé qué to have a certain something;Famy no sé qué y no sé cuántos and so on and so forth¿sabes cocinar? can you cook?;no sé nadar I can't swim, I don't know how to swim;sabe hablar inglés/montar en bici she can speak English/ride a bike;sabe perder he's a good loser;su problema es que no saben beber [beben demasiado] their problem is they don't know when to stop drinking3. [enterarse de] to learn, to find out;lo supe ayer/por los periódicos I found (it) out yesterday/in the papers;supe la noticia demasiado tarde I only heard the news when it was too late;¿sabes algo de Juan?, ¿qué sabes de Juan? have you had any news from o heard from Juan?;¿sabes algo de cuándo será el examen? have you heard anything about when the exam's going to be?4. [entender de] to know about;sabe mucha física he knows a lot about physics♦ visabe mucho a cebolla it has a very strong taste of onions, it tastes very strongly of onions;esto no sabe a nada this has no taste to it, this doesn't taste of anything;saber bien/mal to taste good/bad;¡qué bien sabe este pan! this bread's really tasty!, this bread tastes really good!;esta agua sabe this water has a funny taste;Famme sabe mal mentirle I feel bad about lying to him;Famsaber a cuerno quemado o [m5]a rayos: sus comentarios me supieron a cuerno quemado o [m5] a rayos I thought his comments were really off3. [tener conocimiento] to know;no sé de qué me hablas I don't know what you're talking about;sé de una tienda que vende discos de vinilo I know of a shop that sells vinyl records;que yo sepa as far as I know;¡quién sabe!, ¡vete (tú) a saber!, ¡vaya usted a saber! who knows!;pues, sabes, a mí no me importaría I wouldn't mind, you know;es vecino mío, ¿sabes? he's my neighbour, you know;Méx Fam¡sepa Pancha!, ¡sepa la bola! who knows?¿tú sabes de mecánica? do you know (anything) about mechanics?;ése sí que sabe he's a canny oneno sé de él desde hace meses I haven't heard (anything) from him for months;saber de algo to learn of sth;supe de su muerte por los periódicos I learnt of her death in the papers;no quiero saber (nada) de ti I don't want to have anything to do with youeste postre me ha sabido a poco I could have done with the dessert being a bit bigger;las vacaciones me han sabido a muy poco my holidays weren't nearly long enough, I could have done with my holidays being a lot longer* * *I v/t1 know;hacer saber algo a alguien let s.o. know sth;¿cómo lo sabes? how do you know?;¡si lo sabré yo! don’t I know it!;¡para que lo sepas! so there!;sabérselas todas fam know every trick in the book:saber hacer algo know how to do sth, be able to do sth;sé nadar/leer I can swim/read;saber alemán know German3 ( enterarse) find out;lo supe ayer I found out yesterdayII v/i1 know (de about);¡vete a saber!, ¡vaya usted a saber! heaven knows;¡quién sabe! who knows!;¡qué sé yo! who knows?;que yo sepa as far as I know;no que yo sepa not as far as I know;hace mucho que no sé de ella I haven’t heard from her for a long timeme sabe a quemado it tastes burnt to me;las vacaciones me han sabido a poco my vacation went much too quickly;me sabe mal fig it upsets meIII m knowledge, learningIV:a saber namely* * *saber {71} vt1) : to know2) : to know how to, to be able tosabe tocar el violín: she can play the violin3) : to learn, to find out4)a saber : to wit, namelysaber vi1) : to know, to suppose2) : to be informedsupimos del desastre: we heard about the disaster3) : to tasteesto no sabe bien: this doesn't taste right4)saber a : to taste likesabe a naranja: it tastes like orange* * *saber vb¿alguien sabe lo que ha pasado? does anyone know what happened?¿sabes cocinar? can you cook?cuando supe que era su cumpleaños... when I found out it was her birthday...6. (tener sabor) to tastevete a saber goodness knows / it's anyone's guess¡yo qué sé! how should I know? -
14 FYRIR
* * *prep.I. with dat.1) before, in front of (ok vóru fyrir honum borin merkin);fyrir dyrum, before the door;2) before one, in one’s presence;hón nefndist fyrir þeim Gunnhildr, she told them that her name was G.;3) for;hann lét ryðja fyrir þeim búðina, he had the booth cleared for them, for their reception;4) before one, in one’s way;fjörðr varð fyrir þeim, they came to a fjord;sitja fyrir e-m, to lie in wait for one;5) naut. term. before, off;liggja fyrir bryggjum, to lie off the piers;fyrir Humru-mynni, off the Humber;6) before, at the head of, over;vera fyrir liði, to be over the troops;vera fyrir máli, to lead the case;sitja fyrir svörum, to undertake the defence;7) of time, ago;fyrir þrem nóttum, three nights ago;fyrir stundu, a while ago;fyrir löngu, long ago;vera fyrir e-u, to forebode (of a dream);8) before, above, superior to;Hálfdan svarti var fyrir þeim brœðrum, H. was the foremost of the brothers;9) denoting disadvantige, harm, suffering;þú lætr Egil vefja öll mál fyrir þér, thou lettest E. thwart all thy affairs;tók at eyðast fyrir herm lausa-fé, her money began to fail;10) denoting obstacle, hindrance;mikit gøri þer mér fyrir þessu máli, you make this case hard for me;varð honum lítit fyrir því, it was a small matter for him;Ásgrími þótti þungt fyrir, A. thought that things looked bad;11) because of, for;hon undi sér hvergri fyrir verkjum, she had no rest for pains;fyrir hræðslu, for fear;illa fœrt fyrir ísum, scarcely, passable for ice;gáðu þeir eigi fyrir veiðum at fá heyjanna, because of fishing, they neglected to make hay;fyrir því at, because, since, as;12) against;gæt þín vel fyrir konungi ok hans mönnum, guard thee well against the king and his men;beiða griða Baldri fyrir alls konar háska, against all kinds of harm;13) fyrir sér, of oneself;mikill fyrir sér, strong, powerful;minnstr fyrir sér, smallest, weakest;14) denoting manner or quality, with;hvítr fyrir hærum, while with hoary hair;II. with acc.1) before, in front of;halda fyrir augu sér, to hold (one’s hands) before one’s eyes;2) before, into the presence of;stefna e-m fyrir dómstól, before a court;3) over;hlaupa fyrir björg, to leap over a precipice;kasta fyrir borð, to throw overboard;4) in one’s way, crossing one’s way;ríða á leið fyrir þá, to ride in their way, so as to meet them;5) round, off;sigla fyrir nes, to weather a point;6) along, all along;fyrir endilangan Noreg, all along Norway, from one end to the other;draga ör fyrir odd, to draw the arrow past the point;7) of time, fyrir dag, before day;fyrir e-s minni, before one’s memory;8) for, on behalf of;vil ek bjóða at fara fyrir þik, I will offer to go for thee, in thy stead;lögvörn fyrir mál, a lawful defence for a case;9) for, for the benefit of;þeir skáru fyrir þá melinn, they cut the lyme-grass for them (the horses);10) for, instead of, in place of, as;11) for, because of (vilja Gunnar dauðan fyrir höggit);fyrir þín orð, for thy words (intercession);fyrir sína vinsæld, by reason of his popularity;12) denoting value, price;fyrir þrjár merkr, for three marks;fyrir hvern mun, by all means, at any cost;13) in spite of, against (giptast fyrir ráð e-s);14) joined with adverbs ending in -an, governing acc. (fyrir austan, vestan, sunnan, norðan, útan innan, framan, handan, ofan, neðan);fyrir austan, sunnan fjall, east, south of the fell;fyrir neðan brú, below the bridge;fyrir handan á, beyond the river;fyrir innan garð, inside the fence;III. as adverb or ellipt.1) ahead, before, opp. to eptir;þá var eigi hins verra eptir ván, er slíkt fór fyrir, when this came first, preceded;2) first;mun ek þar eptir gera sem þér gerit fyrir, I shall do to you according as you do first;3) at hand, present, to the fore;föng þau, er fyrir vóru, stores that were at hand;þar var fyrir fjöldi boðsmanna, a host of guests was already present (before the bride and bridegroom came);4) e-m verðr e-t fyrir, one takes a certain step, acts so and so;Kolbeini varð ekki fyrir, K. was at a loss what to do;e-t mælist vel (illa) fyrir, a thing is well (ill) spoken or reported of (kvæðit mæltist vel fyrir).* * *prep., in the Editions spelt differently; in MSS. this word is usually abbreviated either (i. e. firir), or Ꝼ̆, fur͛, fvr͛ (i. e. fyrir); in some MSS. it is idiomatically spelt with i, fir͛, e. g. Arna-Magn. 382 (Bs. i. 263 sqq.); and even in the old Miracle-book Arna-Magn. 645 (Bs. i. 333 sqq.), just as ifir is written for yfir ( over); in a few MSS. it is written as a monosyllable fyr, e. g. D. I. i. 475, Mork. passim; in Kb. (Sæm.-Edda) occurs fyr telia, Vsp. I; fyr norðan, 36; fyr dyrum, Gm. 22; fyr vestan ver, Hkv. 2. 8; in other places as a dissyll. fyrir, e. g. Hm. 56, Gm. 54, Skm. 34, Ls. 15, Am. 64, Hkv. 2. 2, 19 (quoted from Bugge’s edition, see his preface, p. xvi); fyr and fyrir stand to one another in the same relation as ept to eptir, und to undir, of ( super) to yfir: this monosyllabic form is obsolete, save in the compds, where ‘for-’ is more common than ‘fyrir-;’ in some cases both forms are used, e. g. for-dæming and fyrir-dæming; in others only one, but without any fixed rule: again, the forms fyri, fyre, or fire, which are often used in Edd., are just as wrong, as if one were to say epti, undi, yfi; yet this spelling is found now and then in MSS., as, fyre, Ó. H. (facsimile); fire, Grág. Sb. ii. 288 (also facsimile): the particles í and á are sometimes added, í fur, Fms. iv. 137; í fyrir, passim; á fur, Haustl. 1. [Ulf. faur and faura; A. S. fore and for; Engl. for and fore-; Germ. für and vor; Dan. for; Swed. för; Gr. προ-; Lat. pro, prae.]WITH DAT., chiefly without the notion of movement.A. LOCAL:I. before, in front of; fyrir dyrum, before the doors, at the doors, Nj. 14, Vsp. 53, Hm. 69, Edda 130; niðr f. smiðju-dyrum, Eg. 142:—ahead, úti fyrir búðinni, Nj. 181; kómusk sauðirnir upp á fjallit f. þeim, ahead of them, 27; vóru fyrir honum borin merkin, the banner was borne before him, 274; göra orð fyrir sér, to send word before one, Fms. vii. 207, Hkr. iii. 335 (Ó. H. 201, l. c., frá sér):—also denoting direction, niðri í eldinum f. sér, beneath in the fire before them, Nj. 204; þeir sá f. sér bæ mikinn, they saw before them a great building, i. e. they came to a great house, Eg. 546; öðrum f. sér ( in front) en öðrum á bak sér, Grág. i. 5.2. before one, before one’s face, in one’s presence; úhelgaða ek Otkel f. búum, before the neighbours, Nj. 87; lýsi ek f. búum fimm, 218; lýsa e-u ( to proclaim) f. e-m, Ld. 8; hann hermdi boð öll f. Gizuri, Nj. 78; hón nefndisk f. þeim Gunnhildr, told them that her name was G., Fms. i. 8; kæra e-t f. e-m, Ó. H. 60; slíkar fortölur hafði hann f. þeim, Nj. 200; the saying, því læra börnin málið að það er f. þeim haft, bairns learn to speak because it is done before them, i. e. because they hear it; hafa gott (íllt) f. e-m, to give a good (bad) example, e. g. in the presence of children; lifa vel f. Guði, to live well before God, 623. 29; stór ábyrgðar-hluti f. Guði, Nj. 199; sem þeir sjá réttast f. Guði, Grág. i. (pref.); fyrir öllum þeim, Hom. 89; á laun f. öðrum mönnum, hidden from other men, unknown to them, Grág. i. 337, Jb. 378; nú skaltú vera vin minn mikill f. húsfreyju minni, i. e. when you talk to my wife, Nj. 265; fyrir Drottni, before the Lord, Merl. 2. 78.3. denoting reception of guests, visitors; hann lét ryðja f. þeim búðina, he had the room cleared for them, for their reception, Nj. 228; Valhöll ryðja fyr vegnu fólki, i. e. to clear Valhalla for slain folk, Em. I; ryðja vígvöll f. vegundum, Nj. 212; ljúka upp f. e-m, to open the door for one, Fms. xi. 323, Stj. 5; rýma pallinn f. þeim, Eg. 304; hann lét göra eld f. þeim, he had a fire made for them, 204; þeir görðu eld. f. sér, Fms. xi. 63; … veizlur þar sem fyrir honum var búit, banquets that were ready for him, Eg. 45.II. before one, in one’s way; þar er díki varð f. þeim, Eg. 530; á (fjörðr) varð f. þeim, a river, fjord, was before them, i. e. they came to it, 133, 161; at verða eigi f. liði yðru, 51; maðr sá varð f. Vindum, that man was overtaken by the V., Hkr. iii. 363; þeirra manna er f. honum urðu, Eg. 92.2. sitja f. e-m, to lie in wait for one, Ld. 218, Nj. 107; lá f. henni í skóginum, Edda (pref.); sitja f. rekum, to sit watching for wrecks, Eg. 136 (fyrir-sát).3. ellipt., menn urðu at gæta sín er f. urðu, Nj. 100; Egill var þar f. í runninum, E. was before (them), lay in ambush, Eg. 378; hafði sá bana er f. varð, who was before (the arrow), i. e. he was hit, Nj. 8.4. verða f. e-u, to be hit, taken, suffer from a thing; ef hann verðr f. drepi, if he be struck, Grág. ii. 19; verða f. áverka, to be wounded, suffer injury, Ld. 140; verða f. reiði konungs, to fall into disgrace with the king, Eg. 226; verða f. ósköpum, to become the victim of a spell, spell-bound, Fas. i. 130; sitja f. hvers manns ámæli, to be the object of all men’s blame, Nj. 71; vera eigi f. sönnu hafðr, to be unjustly charged with a thing, to be innocent.III. a naut. term, before, off; liggja f. bryggjum, to lie off the pier, Ld. 166; skip fljóta f. strengjum, Sks. 116; þeir lágu f. bænum, they lay off the town, Bs. i. 18; liggja úti f. Jótlands-síðu, off Jutland, Eg. 261; hann druknaði f. Jaðri, off the J., Fms. i. II; þeir kómu at honum f. Sjólandi, off Zealand, x. 394; hafa úti leiðangr f. landi, Hkr. i. 301; f. Humru-minni, off the Humber, Orkn. 338, cp. Km. 3, 8, 9, 13, 19, 21; fyrir Nesjum, off the Ness, Vellekla; fyrir Tungum, Sighvat; fyrir Spáni, off Spain, Orkn. 356.IV. before, at the head of, denoting leadership; smalamaðr f. búi föður síns, Ver. 26 (of king David); vera f. liði, to be over the troops, Eg. 292, Nj. 7; vera f. máli, to lead the case, Band. 8; vera forstjóri f. búi, to be steward over the household, Eg. 52; ráða f. landi, ríki, etc., to rule, govern, Ó H. 33, Nj. 5; hverr f. eldinum réði, who was the ringleader of the fire, Eg. 239; ráða f. e-u, to rule, manage a thing, passim: the phrase, sitja f. svörum, to respond on one’s behalf, Ölk. 36, Band. 12; hafa svör f. e-m, to be the chief spokesman, Fms. x. 101, Dipl. v. 26.V. special usages; friða f. e-m, to make peace for one, Fms. vii. 16, Bs. i. 65; bæta f. e-m, to make things good for one, Hom. 109; túlka, vera túlkr, flytja (etc.) f. e-m, to plead for one, Fms. iii. 33, Nj. 128,—also spilla f. e-m, to disparage one, Eg. 255; haga, ætla f. e-u, to manage, arrange for one, Ld. 208, Sturl. i. 14, Boll. 356; rífka ráð f. e-m, to better one’s condition, Nj. 21; ráða heiman-fylgju ok tilgjöf f. frændkonu sinni, Js. 58; standa f. manni, to stand before, shield a man, stand between him and his enemy, Eg. 357, Grág. ii. 13; vera skjöldr f. e-m, 655 xxxii. 4; hafa kostnað f. e-u, to have the expences for a thing, Ld. 14; vinna f. e-m, to support one by one’s work, Sks. 251; starfa f. fé sínu, to manage one’s money, Ld. 166; hyggja f. e-u, to take heed for a thing, Nj. 109; hyggja f. sér, Fs. 5; hafa forsjá f. e-m, to provide for one, Ld. 186; sjá f. e-u, to see after, Eg. 118, Landn, 152; sjá þú nokkut ráð f. mér, Nj. 20: ironic. to put at rest, Háv. 40: ellipt., sjá vel f., to provide well for, Nj. 102.B. TEMP. ago; fyrir þrem nóttum, three nights ago; fyrir stundu, a while ago, Nj. 80; fyrir litlu, a little while ago, Fms. i. 76, Ld. 134; fyrir skömmu, a sbort while ago; fyrir löngu, a long while ago, Nj. 260, Fms. i. 50; fyrir öndverðu, from the beginning, Grág. i. 80, ii. 323, 394, Finnb. 342; fyrir þeim, before they were born, Fms. i. 57.2. the phrase, vera f. e-u, to forebode; vera f. stórfundum, Nj. 107, 277; þat hygg ek vera munu f. siða-skipti, Fms. xi. 12; þessi draumr mun vera f. kvámu nökkurs manns, vii. 163; dreyma draum f. e-u, 8; fyrir tiðendum, ii. 65:—spá f. e-m, to ‘spae’ before, prophecy to one, Nj. 171.C. METAPH.:I. before, above; þóttu þeir þar f. öllum ungum mönnum, Dropl. 7; þykkisk hann mjök f. öðrum mönnum, Ld. 38; ver f. hirðmönnum, be first among my herdsmen, Eg. 65; Hálfdan svarti var f. þeim bræðrum, H. was the foremost of the brothers, Fms. i. 4; þorgrímr var f. sonum Önundar, Grett. 87; var Haraldr mest f. þeim at virðingu, Fms. i. 47.II. denoting help, assistance; haun skal rétta vættið f. þeim, Grág. i. 45 (vide above A. IV and V).2. the following seem to be Latinisms, láta lífit f. heilagri Kristni, to give up one’s life for holy Christianity, = Lat. pro, Fms. vii. 172; ganga undir píslir fyrir Guðs nafni, Blas. 38; gjalda önd mína f. önd þinni, Johann. 17; gefa gjöf f. sál sinni ( pro animâ suâ), H. E. i. 466; fyrir mér ok minni sál, Dipl. iv. 8; færa Guði fórnir f. e-m, 656 A; heita f. e-m, biðja f. e-m, to make a vow, pray for one (orare pro), Fms. iii. 48, Bs. i. 70; biðja f. mönnum, to intercede for, 19, Fms. xi. 287: even with a double construction, biðja f. stað sinn (acc., which is vernacular) ok heilagri kirkju (dat., which is a Latinism), x. 127.III. denoting disadvantage, harm, suffering; þú lætr Egil vefja öll mál fyrir þér, thou lettest Egil thwart all thy affairs, Eg. 249; únýtir hann þá málit fyrir sér, then he ruins his own case, Grág. i. 36, Dropl. 14, 16; Manverjar rufu safnaðinn f. Þorkatli, the Manxmen broke up the assembly, i. e. forsook Thorkel, Fms. ix. 422; kom upp grátr f. henni, she burst into tears, 477; taka fé f. öðrum, to take another’s money, N. G. L. i. 20; knörr þann er konungr lét taka fyrir Þórólfi, Landn. 56; ef hross verðr tekit f. honum, if a horse of his be taken, Grág. i. 436; hann tók upp fé fyrir öllum, he seized property for them all, Ó. H. 60; e-t ferr ílla f. e-m, a thing turns out ill for one; svá fór f. Ólófu, so it came to pass for O., Vígl. 18; loka dyrr f. e-m, to lock the door in one’s face, Edda 21: þeir hafa eigi þessa menn f. yðr drepit, heldr f. yðrar sakir þessi víg vegit, i. e. they have not harmed you, but rather done you a service in slaying those men, Fbr. 33; tók at eyðask f. henni lausa-fé, her money began to fail, Nj. 29; rak á f. þeim storma ok stríðviðri, they were overtaken by gales and bad weather, Vígl. 27; Víglundr rak út knöttinn f. Jökli, V. drove the ball for J., i. e. so that he had to run after it, 24; sá er skar tygil f. Þóri, he who cut Thor’s line, Bragi; sverð brast f. mér, my sword broke, Korm. 98 (in a verse); brjóta e-t f. e-m, to break a thing for one, Bs. i. 15 (in a verse); Valgarðr braut krossa fyrir Merði ok öll heilög tákn, Nj. 167; árin brotnaði f. honum, his oar broke; allar kýrnar drápust fyrir honum, all his cows died.2. denoting difficulty, hindrance; sitja f. sæmd e-s, to sit between oneself and one’s honour, i. e. to hinder one’s doing well, Sturl. 87; mikit göri þér mér f. þessu máli, you make this case sore for me, Eb. 124; þér er mikit f. máli, thy case stands ill, Fms. v. 325; ekki er Guði f. því, it is easy for God to do, 656 B. 9; varð honum lítið f. því, it was a small matter for him, he did it easily, Grett. III; mér er minna f. því, it is easier for me, Am. 60; þykkja mikit f. e-u, to be much grieved for a thing, do it unwillingly, Nj. 77; Icel. also say, þykja fyrir (ellipt.), to feel hurt, be displeased:—ellipt., er þeim lítið fyrir at villa járnburð þenna, it is a small matter for them to spoil this ordeal, Ó. H. 140; sem sér muni lítið f. at veiða Gunnar, Nj. 113; fast mun f. vera, it will be fast-fixed before (one), hard to move, Ld. 154; Ásgrími þótti þungt f., A. thought that things looked sad (heavy), Nj. 185; hann var lengi f., he was long about it, Fms. x. 205; hann var lengi f. ok kvað eigi nei við, he was cross and said not downright no, Þorf. Karl. 388.IV. in a causal sense, for, because of, Lat. per, pro; sofa ek né mákat fugls jarmi fyrir, I cannot sleep for the shrill cry of birds, Edda 16 (in a verse); hon undi sér hvergi f. verkjum, she had no rest for pains, Bjarn. 69; fyrir gráti, tárum, = Lat. prae lacrymis; fyrir harmi, for sorrow; f. hlátri, for laughter, as in Engl.; þeir æddust f. einni konu, they went mad for the sake of one woman, Sól. 11; ílla fært f. ísum, scarce passable for ice, Fms. xi. 360; hætt var at sitja útar f. Miðgarðs-ormi, Edda 35; hann var lítt gengr f. sárinu, he could hardly walk for the wound, Fbr. 178; fyrir hræðslu, for fear, Hbl. 26; heptisk vegrinn f. þeim meinvættum sem …, Fs. 4; gáðu þeir eigi f. veiðum at fá heyjanna, because of fishing they took no care to make hay, Landn. 30; fyrir riki konungs, for the king’s power, Eg. 67, 117; fyrir ofríki manna, Grág. i. 68; fyrir hví, for why? Eluc. 4; fyrir hví þeir væri þar, Eg. 375; fyrir því, at …, for that, because, Edda 35, Fms. i. 22, vii. 330, Ld. 104; en fyrir því nú at, now since, Skálda 171; nú fyrir því at, id., 169: the phrase, fyrir sökum, for the sake of, because of, passim; vide sök.V. by, by the force of; öxlin gékk ór liði fyrir högginu, the shoulder was disjointed by the force of the stroke, Háv. 52.2. denoting contest; falla f. e-m, to fall before one, i. e. fighting against one, Fms. i. 7, iv. 9, x. 196; verða halloki f. e-m, to be overcome in fighting one, Ld. 146; látask f. e-m, to perish by one, Eb. 34; hafa bana f. e-m, to be slain by one, Nj. 43; þeir kváðu fá fúnað hafa f. honum, 263; mæddisk hann f. þeim, he lost his breath in fighting them, Eg. 192; láta ríki f. e-m, to lose the kingdom before another, i. e. so that the latter gains it, 264; láta lausar eignir mínar f. þér, 505; láta hlut sinn f. e-m, Fs. 47; standask f. e-m, to stand one’s ground before one, Edda (pref.); hugðisk hann falla mundu f. sjóninni einni saman, that he would sink before his glance, 28, Hým. 12; halda hlut f. e-m, Ld. 54; halda frið ok frelsi f. várum óvinum, Fms. viii. 219; fara mun ek sem ek hefi áðr ætlað f. þínum draum ( thy dream notwithstanding), Ld. 216; þér farit hvárt er þér vilit f. mér, you go wherever you like for me, so far as I am concerted, Fær. 37; halda vöku f. sér, to keep oneself awake, Fms. i. 216.β. with verbs, flýja, hlaupa, renna, stökkva f. e-m, to fly, leap, run before one, i. e. to be pursued, Bs. i. 774, Grág. ii. 359; at hann rynni f. þrælum hans, Ld. 64; fyrir þessum úfriði stökk Þangbrandr til Noregs, 180; skyldi hann ganga ór á f. Hofsmönnum, Landn. 178; ganga f. e-u, to give way before, yield to a thing, Fms. i. 305, x. 292; vægja f. e-m, to yield to one, give way, Eg. 21, 187, Nj. 57, Ld. 234.VI. against; verja land f. e-m, Eg. 32; verja landit f. Dönum ok öðrum víkingum, Fms. i. 23; til landvarnar f. víkingum, Eg. 260; landvarnar-maðr f. Norðmönnum, Fms. vi. 295; gæta brúarinnar f. bergrisum, Edda 17; gæt þín vel f. konungi ok hans mönnum, guard thee well against the king and his men, Eg. 113; góð aðstoð f. tröllum ok dvergum, Bárð. 163; beiða Baldri griða f. allskonar háska, Edda 36; auðskæðr f. höggum, Eg. 770.VII. in the sense of being driven before; fyrir straumi, veðri, vindi, before the stream, wind, weather (forstreymis, forvindis), Grág. ii. 384, Fms. vii. 262; halda f. veðri, to stand before the wind, Róm. 211.2. rýrt mun verða f. honum smá-mennit, he will have an easy game with the small people, Nj. 94: ellipt., hafði sá bana er f. varð, 8; sprakk f., 16, 91.VIII. fyrir sér, of oneself, esp. of physical power; mikill f. sér, strong, powerful; lítill f. sér, weak, feeble, Nj. 20, Ísl. ii. 368, Eg. 192; þér munuð kalla mik lítinn mann f. mér, Edda 33; minnstr f. sér, smallest, weakest, Eg. 123; gildr maðr f. sér, Ísl. ii. 322, Fms. ii. 145; herðimaðr mikiil f. sér, a hardy man, Nj. 270; hvat ert þú f. þér, what kind of fellow art thou? Clem. 33; vera einn f. sér, to be a strange fellow, Grett. 79 new Ed.; Icel. also say, göra mikið (lítið) f. sér, to make oneself big ( little).β. sjóða e-t f. sér, to hesitate, saunter, Nj. 154; mæla f. munni, to talk between one’s teeth, to mutter, Orkn. 248, Nj. 249.IX. denoting manner or quality; hvítr f. hærum, white with hoary hairs, Fms. vi. 95, Fas. ii. 540; gráir fyrir járnum, grey with steel, of a host in armour, Mag. 5; hjölt hvít f. silfri, a hilt white with silver = richly silvered, Eb. 226.X. as adverb or ellipt.,1. ahead, in front, = á undan, Lat. prae, opp. to eptir; þá var eigi hins verra eptir ván, er slíkt fór fyrir, as this came first, preceded, Nj. 34; at einhverr mundi fara heim fyrir, that some one would go home first (to spy), Eg. 580; Egill fór f., E. went in before, id.; at vér ríðim þegar f. í nótt, 283.β. first; hann stefndi f. málinu, en hann mælti eptir, one pronounced the words first, but the other repeated after him, Nj. 35; mun ek þar eptir göra sem þér gerit f., I shall do to you according as you do first, 90:—temp., sjau nóttum f., seven nights before, Grág. ii. 217.2. to the fore, at hand, present; þar var fyrir fjöldi boðsmanna, a host of guests was already to the fore, i. e. before the bride and bridegroom came, Nj. 11; úvíst er at vita hvar úvinir sitja á fleti fyrir, Hm. 1; skal þá lögmaðr þar f. vera, he shall be there present, Js. 3; heima í túni fyrir, Fær. 50; þar vóru fyrir Hildiríðar-synir, Eg. 98; var honum allt kunnigt fyrir, he knew all about the localities, 583; þeim ómögum, sem f. eru, who are there already, i. e. in his charge, Grág. i. 286: of things, föng þau er f. vóru, stores that were to the fore, at hand, Eg. 134.3. fore, opp. to ‘back,’ of clothes; slæður settar f. allt gullknöppum, Eg. 516; bak ok fyrir, back and front, = bak ok brjóst, Mar.XI. in the phrase, e-m verðr e-t fyrir, a thing is before one, i. e. one takes that and that step, acts so and so in an emergency; nú verðr öðrum þeirra þat f., at hann kveðr, now if the other part alleges, that …, Grág. i. 362; Kolbeini varð ekki f., K. had no resource, i. e. lost his head, Sturl. iii. 285:—the phrase, e-t mælisk vel (ílla) fyrir, a thing is well ( ill) reported of; víg Gunnars spurðisk ok mæltisk ílla fyrir um allar sveitir, Nj. 117, Sturl. ii. 151; mun þat vel f. mælask, people will like it well, Nj. 29, Þórð. 55 new Ed.; ílla mun þat f. mælask at ganga á sættir við frændr sína, Ld. 238; ok er lokit var, mæltisk kvæðit vel f., the people praised the poem, Fms. vii. 113.XII. in special senses, either as prep. or adv. (vide A. V. above); segja leið f. skipi, to pilot a ship, Eg. 359; segja f. skipi, to say a prayer for a new ship or for any ship going to sea, Bs. i. 774, Fms. x. 480; mæla f. e-u, to dictate, Grág. ii. 266; mæla f. minni, to bring out a toast, vide minni; mæla f. sætt, i. 90; skipa, koma e-u f., to arrange, put right; ætla f. e-u, to make allowance for; trúa e-m f. e-u, to entrust one with; það fer mikið f. e-u (impers.), it is of great compass, bulky; hafa f. e-u, to have trouble with a thing; leita f. sér, to enquire; biðjask f., to say one’s prayers, vide biðja; mæla fyrir, segja f., etc., to order, Nj. 103, Js. 3: of a spell or solemn speaking, hann mælti svá f., at …, Landn. 34; spyrjask f., to enquire, Hkr. ii. 333; búask f., to prepare, make arrangement, Landn. 35, Sks. 551; skipask f., to draw up, Nj. 197; leggjask f., to lie down in despair, Bs. i. 194; spá fyrir, to ‘spae’ before, foretell; þeir menn er spá f. úorðna hluti, Fms. i. 96; segja f., to foretell, 76, Bb. 332; Njáll hefir ok sagt f. um æfi hans, Nj. 102; vita e-t f., to ‘wit’ beforehand, know the future, 98; sjá e-t f., to foresee, 162; ef þat er ætlat f., fore-ordained, id.WITH ACC., mostly with the notion of movement.A. LOCAL:I. before, in front of; fyrir dyrrin, Nj. 198; láta síga brýnn f. brár, Hkv. Hjörv. 19; halda f. augu sér, to hold (one’s hands) before one’s eyes, Nj. 132; leggja sverði fyrir brjóst e-m, to thrust a sword into his breast, 162, Fs. 39.2. before one, before a court; stefna e-m f. dómstól, Fms. xi. 444; ganga, koma f. e-n, to go, come before one, Fms. i. 15, Eg. 426, Nj. 6, 129, passim; fyrir augu e-s, before one’s eyes, Stj. 611.3. before, so as to shield; hann kom skildinum f. sik, he put the shield before him, Nj. 97, 115; halda skildi f. e-n, a duelling term, since the seconder had to hold one’s shield, Ísl. ii. 257.4. joined to adverbs such as fram, aptr, út, inn, ofan, niðr, austr, vestr, suðr, norðr, all denoting direction; fram f., forward; aptr f., backward, etc.; hann reiddi öxina fram f. sik, a stroke forward with the axe, Fms. vii. 91; hann hljóp eigi skemra aptr en fram fyrir sik, Nj. 29; þótti honum hann skjóta brandinum austr til fjallanna f. sik, 195; komask út f. dyrr, to go outside the door, Eg. 206:—draga ofan f. brekku, to drag over the hill, Ld. 220; hrinda f. mel ofan, to thrust one over the gravel bank, Eg. 748; hlaupa f. björg, to leap over a precipice, Eb. 62, Landn. 36; elta e-n f. björg, Grág. ii. 34; hlaupa (kasta) f. borð, to leap ( throw) overboard, Fms. i. 178, Hkr. iii. 391, Ld. 226; síga ( to be hauled) niðr f. borgar-vegg, 656 C. 13, Fms. ix. 3; hlaupa niðr f. stafn, Eg. 142; niðr f. skaflinn, Dropl. 25; fyrir brekku, Orkn. 450, Glúm. 395 (in a verse).II. in one’s way, crossing one’s way; þeir stefndu f. þá, Fms. ix. 475; ríða á leið f. þá, to ride in their way, so as to meet them, Boll. 348; hlaupa ofan f. þá, Nj. 153; vóru allt komin f. hann bréf, letters were come before him, in his way, Fms. vii. 207; þeir felldu brota f. hann, viz. they felled trees before him, so as to stop him, viii. 60, ix. 357; leggja bann f. skip, to lay an embargo on a ship, Ld. 166.III. round, off a point; fyrir nesit, Nj. 44; út f. Holm, out past the Holm, Fms. vii. 356: esp. as a naut. term, off a point on the shore, sigla f. England, Norðyrnbraland, Þrasnes, Spán, to sail by the coast of, stand off England, Northumberland, … Spain, Orkn. 338, 340, 342, 354; fyrir Yrjar, Fms. vii. (in a verse); fyrir Siggju, Aumar, Lista, Edda 91 (in a verse); er hann kom f. Elfina, when be came off the Gotha, Eg. 80; leggja land f. skut, to lay the land clear of the stern, i. e. to pass it, Edda l. c.; göra frið f. land sitt, to pacify the land from one end to another, Ld. 28; fyrir uppsprettu árinnar, to come to ( round) the sources of the river, Fms. iii. 183; fyrir garðs-enda, Grág. ii. 263; girða f. nes, to make a wall across the ness, block it up, cp. Lat. praesepire, praemunire, etc., Grág. ii. 263; so also binda f. op, poka, Lat. praeligare, praestringere; hlaða f. gat, holu, to stop a hole, opening; greri f. stúfinn, the stump (of the arm or leg) was healed, closed, Nj. 275; skjóta slagbrandi f. dyrr, to shoot a bolt before the door, to bar it, Dropl. 29; láta loku (lás) f. hurð, to lock a door, Gísl. 28; setja innsigli f. bréf, to set a seal to a letter, Dipl. i. 3: ellipt., setr hón þar lás fyrir, Ld. 42, Bs. i. 512.2. along, all along; f. endilanga Danmörk, f. endilangan Noreg, all along Denmark, Norway, from one end to the other, Fms. iv. 319, xi. 91, Grett. 97:—öx álnar f. munn, an axe with an ell-long edge, Ld. 276; draga ör f. ödd, to draw the arrow past the point, an archer’s term, Fms. ii. 321.IV. with verbs, fyrir ván komit, one is come past hope, all hope is gone, Sturl. i. 44, Hrafn. 13, Fms. ii. 131; taka f. munn e-m, to stop one’s mouth; taka f. háls, kverkar, e-m, to seize one by the throat, etc.; taka mál f. munn e-m, ‘verba alicujus praeripere,’ to take the word out of one’s mouth, xi. 12; taka f. hendr e-m, to seize one’s hands, stop one in doing a thing, Eb. 124; mod., taka fram f. hendrnar á e-m.B. TEMP.: fyrir dag, before day, Eg. 80; f. miðjan dag, Ld. 14; f. sól, before sunrise, 268; f. sólar-lag, before sunset; f. miðjan aptan, Nj. 192; f. náttmál, 197; f. óttu, Sighvat; f. þinglausnir, Ölk. 37; f. Jól, Nj. 269; f. fardaga, Grág. ii. 341; viku f. sumar, 244; f. mitt sumar, Nj. 138; litlu f. vetr, Eg. 159; f. vetrnætr, Grág. ii. 217; f. e-s minni, before one’s memory, Íb. 16.C. METAPH.:I. above, before; hann hafdi mest fyrir aðra konunga hraustleikinn, Fms. x. 372.II. for, on behalf of; vil ek bjóða at fara f. þik, I will go for thee, in thy stead, Nj. 77; ganga í skuld f. e-n, Grág. i. 283; Egill drakk … ok svá f. Ölvi, Eg. 210; kaupa e-t f. e-n, Nj. 157; gjalda gjöld f. e-n, Grág. i. 173; verja, sækja, sakir f. e-n, Eg. 504; hvárr f. sik, each for oneself, Dipl. v. 26; sættisk á öll mál f. Björn, Nj. 266; tók sættir f. Björn, Eg. 168; svara f. e-t, Fms. xi. 444; hafa til varnir f. sik, láta lýrit, lög-vörn koma f.; færa vörn f. sik, etc.; verja, sækja sakir f. sik, and many similar law phrases, Grág. passim; biðja konu f. e-n, to woo a lady for another, Fms. x. 44; fyrir mik, on my behalf, for my part, Gs. 16; lögvörn f. mál, a lawful defence for a case, Nj. 111; hafa til varnar f. sök, to defend a case, Grág. i. 61; halda skiladómi f. e-t, Dipl. iv. 8; festa lög f. e-t, vide festa.III. in a distributive sense; penning f. mann, a penny per man, K. Þ. K. 88; fyrir nef hvert, per nose = per head, Lv. 89, Fms. i. 153, Ó. H. 141; hve f. marga menn, for how many men, Grág. i. 296; fyrir hverja stiku, for each yard, 497.IV. for, for the benefit of; brjóta brauð f. hungraða, Hom. 75; þeir skáru f. þá melinn, they cut the straw for them (the horses), Nj. 265; leggja kostnað f. e-n, to defray one’s costs, Grág. i. 341.V. for, instead of; hann setti sik f. Guð, Edda (pref.); hafa e-n f. Guð (Lat. pro Deo), Stj. 73, Barl. 131; geta, fá, kveðja mann f. sik, to get a man as one’s delegate or substitute, Grág. i. 48 passim; þeir höfðu vargstakka f. brynjur, Fs. 17; manna-höfuð vóru f. kljána, Nj. 275; gagl f. gás ok grís f. gamalt svín, Ó. H. 86; rif stór f. hlunna, Háv. 48; buðkr er f. húslker er hafðr, Vm. 171; auga f. auga, tönn f. tönn, Exod. xxi. 24; skell f. skillinga, Þkv. 32.VI. because of, for; vilja Gunnar dauðan fyrir höggit, Nj. 92, Fms. v. 162; eigi f. sakleysi, not without ground, i. 302; fyrir hvat (why, for what) stefndi Gunnarr þeim til úhelgi? Nj. 101; ok urðu f. þat sekir, Landn. 323; hafa ámæli f. e-t, Nj. 65, passim.2. in a good sense, for one’s sake, for one; fyrir þín orð, for thy words, intercession, Ísl. ii. 217; vil ek göra f. þín orð, Ld. 158, Nj. 88; fyrir sína vinsæld, by his popularity, Fms. i. 259: the phrase, fyrir e-s sök, for one’s sake, vide sök: in swearing, a Latinism, fyrir trú mína, by my faith! (so in Old Engl. ‘fore God), Karl. 241; fyrir þitt líf, Stj. 514; ek særi þik f. alla krapta Krists ok manndóm þinn, Nj. 176. VII. for, at, denoting value, price; fyrir þrjár merkr, for three marks, Eg. 714; er sik leysti út f. þrjú hundruð marka, Fms. ix. 421; ganga f. hundrað, to pass or go for a hundred, D. I. i. 316:—also of the thing bought, þú skalt reiða f. hana þrjár merkr, thou shall pay for her three marks, Ld. 30; fyrir þik skulu koma mannhefndir, Nj. 57; bætr f. víg, Ísl. ii. 274; bætr f. mann, Eg. 259, passim; fyrir áverka Þorgeirs kom legorðs-sökin, Nj. 101:—so in the phrase, fyrir hvern mun, by all means, at any cost; fyrir öngan mun, by no means, Fms. i. 9, 157, Gþl. 531:—hafði hverr þeirra mann f. sik, eða tvá …, each slew a man or more for himself, i. e. they sold their lives dearly, Ó. H. 217.2. ellipt., í staðinn f., instead of, Grág. i. 61; hér vil ek bjóða f. góð boð, Nj. 77; taka umbun f., Fms. vii. 161; svara slíku f. sem …, Boll. 350; þér skulut öngu f. týna nema lífinu, you shall lose nothing less than your head, Nj. 7.VIII. by means of, by, through; fyrir þat sama orð, Stj.; fyrir sína náttúru, Fms. v. 162; fyrir messu-serkinn, iii. 168; fyrir þinn krapt ok frelsis-hönd, Pass. 19. 12; svikin f. orminn, by the serpent, Al. 63,—this use of fyrir seems to be a Latinism, but is very freq. in eccl. writings, esp. after the Reformation, N. T., Pass., Vídal.; fyrir munn Davíðs, through the mouth of David, etc.:—in good old historical writings such instances are few; þeir hlutuðu f. kast ( by dice), Sturl. ii. 159.IX. in spite of, against; fyrir vilja sinn, N. G. L. i. 151; fyrir vitorð eðr vilja e-s, against one’s will or knowledge, Grág. ii. 348; kvángask (giptask) f. ráð e-s, i. 177, 178, Þiðr. 190; nú fara menn f. bann ( in spite of an embargo) landa á milli, Gþl. 517; hann gaf henni líf f. framkvæmd farar, i. e. although she had not fulfilled her journey ( her vow), Fms. v. 223; fyrir várt lof, vi. 220; fyrir allt þat, in spite of all that, Grett. 80 new Ed.; fyrir ráð fram, heedlessly; fyrir lög fram, vide fram.X. denoting capacity, in the same sense as ‘at,’ C. II, p. 27, col. 1; scarcely found in old writers (who use ‘at’), but freq. in mod. usage, thus, eigi e-n f. vin, to have one for a friend, in old writers ‘at vin;’ hafa e-n f. fífl, fól, to make sport of one.2. in old writers some phrases come near to this, e. g. vita f. vist, to know for certain, Dipl. i. 3; vita f. full sannindi, id., ii. 16; hafa f. satt, to take for sooth, believe, Nj. 135; koma f. eitt, to come ( turn) all to one, Lv. 11, Nj. 91, Fms. i. 208; koma f. ekki, to come to naught, be of no avail, Ísl. ii. 215; fyrir hitt mun ganga, it will turn the other way, Nj. 93; fyrir hann er einskis örvænt orðs né verks, from him everything may be expected, Ísl. ii. 326; hafa e-s víti f. varnað, to have another’s faults for warning, Sól. 19.XI. joined with adverbs ending in -an, fyrir austan, vestan, sunnan, norðan, útan, innan, framan, handan, ofan, neðan, either with a following acc. denoting. direction, thus, fyrir austan, sunnan … fjall, east, south of the fell, i. e. on the eastern, southern side; fyrir neðan brú, below the bridge; fyrir útan fjall = Lat. ultra; fyrir innan fjall = Lat. infra; fyrir handan á, beyond the river; fyrir innan garð, inside the yard; fyrir ofan garð, above, beyond the yard, etc.; vide these adverbs:—used adverb., fyrir sunnan, in the south; fyrir vestan, in the west; fyrir norðan, in the north; fyrir austan, in the east,—current phrases in Icel. to mark the quarters of the country, cp. the ditty in Esp. Árb. year 1530; but not freq. in old writers, who simply say, norðr, suðr …, cp. Kristni S. ch. 1: absol. and adverb., fyrir ofan, uppermost; fyrir handan, on the other side:—fyrir útan e-t, except, save, Anal. 98, Vkv. 8; fyrir fram, vide fram.☞ For- and fyrir- as prefixes, vide pp. 163–167 and below:I. fore-, for-, meaning before, above, in the widest sense, local, temp., and metaph. furthering or the like, for-dyri, for-nes, for-ellri, for-beini, etc.β. before, down, for-brekkis, -bergis, -streymis, -vindis, -viðris, etc.2. in an intens. sense = before others, very, but not freq.; for-dyld, -góðr, -hagr, -hraustr, -kostuligr, -kuðr, -lítill, -ljótr, -prís, -ríkr, -snjallr.II. (cp. fyrir, acc., C. IX), in a neg. or priv. sense; a few words occur even in the earliest poems, laws, and writers, e. g. for-að, -átta, -dæða, -nám, -næmi, -sending, -sköp, -verk, -veðja, -viða, -vitni, -ynja, -yrtir; those words at least seem to be original and vernacular: at a later time more words of the same kind crept in:1. as early as writers of the 13th and 14th centuries, e. g. for-boð, -bænir, -djarfa, -dæma (fyrir-dæma), -taka (fyrir-taka), -þóttr; fyrir-bjóða, -fara, -göra, -koma, -kunna, -líta, -muna, -mæla, -vega, -verða.2. introduced in some words at the time of the Reformation through Luther’s Bible and German hymns, and still later in many more through Danish, e. g. for-brjóta, -drífa, -láta, -líkast, -merkja, -nema, -sorga, -sóma, -standa, -svara, -þénusta, and several others; many of these, however, are not truly naturalised, being chiefly used in eccl. writings:—it is curious that if the pronoun be placed after the verb (which is the vernacular use in Icel.) the sense is in many cases reversed; thus, fyrir-koma, to destroy, but koma e-u fyrir can only mean to arrange; so also fyrir-mæla, to curse, and mæla fyrir, to speak for; for-bænir, but biðja fyrir e-m, etc.; in the latter case the sense is good and positive, in the former bad and negative; this seems to prove clearly that these compds are due to foreign influence. -
15 ἀπό
ἀπό (Hom.+) prep. w. gen. (see the lit. on ἀνά, beg., also for ἀπό: KDieterich, IndogF 24, 1909, 93–158; LfgrE s.v.). Basic sense ‘separation from’ someone or someth., fr. which the other uses have developed. In the NT it has encroached on the domain of Att. ἐκ, ὑπό, παρά, and the gen. of separation; s. Mlt. 102; 246; Mlt-Turner 258f.① a marker to indicate separation from a place, whether person or thing, from, away fromⓐ w. all verbs denoting motion, esp. those compounded w. ἀπό: ἀπάγεσθαι, ἀπαλλάσσεσθαι, ἀπελαύνειν, ἀπέρχεσθαι, ἀπολύεσθαι, ἀποπλανᾶσθαι, ἀποστέλλειν, ἀποφεύγειν, ἀποχωρεῖν, ἀποχωρίζεσθαι; but also w. ἀνίστασθαι, διαστῆναι, διέρχεσθαι, ἐκδημεῖν, ἐκκινεῖν, ἐκπλεῖν, ἐκπορεύεσθαι, ἐξέρχεσθαι, ἐξωθεῖν, ἐπιδιδόναι, μεταβαίνειν, μετατίθεσθαι, νοσφίζειν, παραγίνεσθαι, πλανᾶσθαι, πορεύεσθαι, ὑπάγειν, ὑποστρέφειν, φεύγειν; s. the entries in question.ⓑ w. all verbs expressing the idea of separation ἐκβάλλειν τὸ κάρφος ἀ. τοῦ ὀφθαλμοῦ remove the splinter fr. the eye Mt 7:4 v.l. (for ἐκ). ἐξέβαλον ἀπὸ τῆς πήρας αὐτῶν δῶρα they set forth gifts out of their travel bags GJs 21:3. ἀπολύεσθαι ἀ. ἀνδρός be divorced fr. her husband Lk 16:18, cp. Ac 15:33. ἀποκυλίειν, ἀπολαμβάνεσθαι, ἀποστρέφειν, ἐπιστρέφεσθαι, ἐπανάγειν, αἴρειν, ἀφαιρεῖν, ἀπολέσθαι, μερίζειν et al., s. the pertinent entries. So also κενὸς ἀ. τινος Hs 9, 19, 2. ἔρημος ἀ. τινος (Jer 51:2) 2 Cl 2:3. W. verbs which express the concept of separation in the wider sense, like loose, free, acquit et al. ἀπορφανίζειν, ἀποσπᾶν, διεγείρεσθαι, δικαιοῦν, ἐκδικοῦν, ἐλευθεροῦν, λούειν, λύειν, λυτροῦν, ῥαντίζειν, σαλεύειν, στέλλειν, σῴζειν, φθείρειν, s. the entries; hence also ἀθῷος (Sus 46 Theod. v.l.) Mt 27:24. καθαρὸς ἀ. τινος (Tob 3:14; but s. Dssm. NB 24 [BS 196; 216]) Ac 20:26; cp. Kuhring 54.ⓒ verbs meaning be on guard, be ashamed, etc., take ἀπό to express the occasion or object of their caution, shame, or fear; so αἰσχύνεσθαι, βλέπειν, μετανοεῖν, προσέχειν, φοβεῖσθαι, φυλάσσειν, φυλάσσεσθαι; s. 5 below.ⓓ w. verbs of concealing, hiding, hindering, the pers. from whom someth. is concealed is found w. ἀπό; so κρύπτειν τι ἀπό τινος, παρακαλύπτειν τι ἀπό τινος, κωλύειν τι ἀπό τινος; s. the entries.ⓔ in pregnant constr. like ἀνάθεμα εἶναι ἀ. τοῦ Χριστοῦ be separated fr. Christ by a curse Ro 9:3. μετανοεῖν ἀ. τ. κακίας (Jer 8:6) Ac 8:22. ἀποθνῄσκειν ἀ. τινος through death become free from Col 2:20. φθείρεσθαι ἀ. τ. ἁπλότητος be ruinously diverted from wholehearted commitment 2 Cor 11:3. Cp. Hs 6, 2, 4.ⓕ as a substitute for the partitive gen. (Hdt. 6, 27, 2; Thu. 7, 87, 6; PPetr III, 11, 20; PIand 8, 6; Kuhring 20; Rossberg 22; Johannessohn, Präp. 17) τίνα ἀ. τῶν δύο; Mt 27:21, cp. Lk 9:38; 19:39 (like PTebt 299, 13; 1 Macc 1:13; 3:24; Sir 6:6; 46:8). τὰ ἀ. τοῦ πλοίου pieces of the ship Ac 27:44. ἐκχεῶ ἀ. τοῦ πνεύματός μου Ac 2:17f (Jo 3:1f). λαμβάνειν ἀ. τ. καρπῶν get a share of the vintage Mk 12:2 (cp. Just., A I, 65, 5 μεταλαβεῖν ἀπὸ τοῦ … ἄρτου).—Of foods (as in Da 1:13, 4:33a; 2 Macc 7:1) ἐσθίειν ἀ. τ. ψιχίων eat some of the crumbs Mt 15:27; Mk 7:28. χορτάζεσθαι ἀ. τινος eat one’s fill of someth. Lk 16:21. αἴρειν ἀ. τῶν ἰχθύων pick up the remnants of the fish Mk 6:43. ἐνέγκατε ἀ. τ. ὀψαρίων bring some of the fish J 21:10 (the only instance of this usage in J; s. M-EBoismard, Le chapitre 21 de Saint Jean: RB 54 [’47] 492).—Of drink (cp. Sir 26:12) πίνειν ἀπὸ τ. γενήματος τῆς ἀμπέλου drink the product of the vine Lk 22:18.② to indicate the point from which someth. begins, whether lit. or fig.ⓐ of place from, out from (Just., D. 86, 1 ἀπὸ τῆς πέτρας ὕδωρ ἀναβλύσαν ‘gushing out of the rock’) σημεῖον ἀ. τ. οὐρανοῦ a sign fr. heaven Mk 8:11. ἀ. πόλεως εἰς πόλιν from one city to another Mt 23:34. ἀπʼ ἄκρων οὐρανῶν ἕως ἄκρων αὐτῶν (Dt 30:4; Ps 18:7) from one end of heaven to the other 24:31, cp. Mk 13:27. ἀπʼ ἄνωθεν ἕως κάτω from top to bottom Mt 27:51. ἀρξάμενοι ἀ. Ἰερουσαλήμ beginning in Jerusalem Lk 24:47 (s. also Lk 23:5; Ac 1:22; 10:37). ἀφʼ ὑμῶν ἐξήχηται ὁ λόγος τ. κυρίου the word of the Lord has gone out from you and sounded forth 1 Th 1:8. ἀπὸ βορρᾶ, ἀπὸ νότου in the north, in the south (PCairGoodsp 6, 5 [129 B.C.] ἐν τῷ ἀπὸ νότου πεδίῳ; Mitt-Wilck. I/2, 11A col. 1, 12f [123 B.C.] τὸ ἀπὸ νότου τῆς πόλεως χῶμα; ln. 7 ἀπὸ βορρᾶ τῆς πόλεως; 70, 16 al.; Josh 18:5; 19:34; 1 Km 14:5) Rv 21:13.ⓑ of time from … (on), since (POxy 523, 4; Mel., HE 4, 26, 8; s. Kuhring 54ff).α. ἀ. τῶν ἡμερῶν Ἰωάννου from the days of John Mt 11:12. ἀ. τῆς ὥρας ἐκείνης 9:22. ἀπʼ ἐκείνης τ. ἡμέρας (Jos., Bell. 4, 318, Ant. 7, 382) Mt 22:46; J 11:53. ἔτη ἑπτὰ ἀ. τῆς παρθενίας αὐτῆς for seven years fr. the time she was a virgin Lk 2:36. ἀ. ἐτῶν δώδεκα for 12 years 8:43. ἀ. τρίτης ὥρας τῆς νυκτός Ac 23:23. ἀ. κτίσεως κόσμου Ro 1:20. ἀ. πέρυσι since last year, a year ago 2 Cor 8:10; 9:2.—ἀπʼ αἰῶνος, ἀπʼ ἀρχῆς, ἀπʼ ἄρτι (also ἀπαρτί and ἄρτι), ἀπὸ καταβολῆς κόσμου, ἀπὸ τότε, ἀπὸ τοῦ νῦν; s. the pertinent entries.β. w. the limits defined, forward and backward: ἀπὸ … ἕως (Jos., Ant. 6, 364) Mt 27:45. ἀπὸ … ἄχρι Phil 1:5. ἀπὸ … μέχρι Ac 10:30; Ro 5:14; 15:19.γ. ἀφʼ ἧς (sc. ὥρας or ἡμέρας, which is found Col 1:6, 9; but ἀφʼ ἧς became a fixed formula: ParJer 7:28; Plut., Pelop. [285] 15, 5; s. B-D-F §241, 2) since Lk 7:45 (Renehan ’75, 36f); Ac 24:11; 2 Pt 3:4 (cp. X., Hell. 4, 6, 6; 1 Macc 1:11). ἀφʼ οὗ (sc.—as in X., Cyr. 1, 2, 13—χρόνου; Att. ins in Meisterhans.3-Schw. and s. Witkowski, index 163; ἀφʼ οὗ is also a formula) since, when once (X., Symp. 4, 62; Demetr.: 722 Fgm. 1, 16 Jac.; Lucian, Dial. Mar. 15, 1; Ex 5:23 GrBar 3:6) Lk 13:25; 24:21; Rv 16:18 (cp. Da 12:1; 1 Macc 9:29; 16:24; 2 Macc 1:7; TestAbr B 13 p. 117, 23; GrBar; Jos., Ant. 4, 78). τρία ἔτη ἀφʼ οὗ (cp. Tob 5:35 S) Lk 13:7. ἀφότε s. ὅτε 1aγ end.ⓒ the beg. of a series from … (on).α. ἀρξάμενος ἀ. Μωϋσέως καὶ ἀ. πάντων τ. προφητῶν beginning w. Moses and all the prophets Lk 24:27. ἕβδομος ἀ. Ἀδάμ Jd 14 (Diod S 1, 50, 3 ὄγδοος ὁ ἀπὸ τοῦ πατρός [ancestor]; Appian, Mithrid. 9 §29 τὸν ἕκτον ἀπὸ τοῦ πρώτου Μιθριδάτην; Arrian, Anab. 7, 12, 4; Diog. L. 3, 1: Plato in the line of descent was ἕκτος ἀπὸ Σόλωνος; Biogr. p. 31: Homer δέκατος ἀπὸ Μουσαίου). ἀ. διετοῦς καὶ κατωτέρω Mt 2:16 (cp. Num 1:20; 2 Esdr 3:8).β. w. both beg. and end given ἀπὸ … ἕως (Sir 18:26; 1 Macc 9:13) Mt 1:17; 23:35; Ac 8:10. Sim., ἀ. δόξης εἰς δόξαν fr. glory to glory 2 Cor 3:18.③ to indicate origin or source, fromⓐ lit., with verbs of motionα. down from πίπτειν ἀ. τραπέζης Mt 15:27. καθεῖλεν δυνάστας ἀ. θρόνων God has dethroned rulers Lk 1:52.β. from ἔρχεσθαι ἀ. θεοῦ J 3:2; cp. 13:3; 16:30. παραγίνεται ἀ. τῆς Γαλιλαίας Mt 3:13; ἀ. ἀνατολῶν ἥξουσιν 8:11 (Is 49:12; 59:19); ἀ. τοῦ ἱεροῦ ἐπορεύετο 24:1; ἀ. Παμφυλίας Ac 15:38. ἐγείρεσθαι ἀ. τ. νεκρῶν be raised from the dead Mt 14:2.ⓑ lit., to indicate someone’s local origin from (Hom. et al.; Soph., El. 701; Hdt. 8, 114; ins [RevArch 4 sér. IV 1904 p. 9 ἀπὸ Θεσσαλονίκης]; pap [HBraunert, Binnenwanderung ’64, 384, s.v.; PFlor 14, 2; 15, 5; 17, 4; 22, 13 al.]; Judg 12:8; 13:2; 17:1 [all three acc. to B]; 2 Km 23:20 al.; Jos., Bell. 3, 422, Vi. 217; Just., A I, 1 τῶν ἀπὸ Φλαουί̈ας Νέας πόλεως; s. B-D-F §209, 3; Rob. 578) ἦν ἀ. Βηθσαϊδά he was from B. J 1:44; cp. 12:21. ὄχλοι ἀ. τῆς Γαλιλαίας crowds fr. Galilee Mt 4:25. ἄνδρες ἀ. παντὸς ἔθνους Ac 2:5. ἀνὴρ ἀ. τοῦ ὄχλου a man fr. the crowd Lk 9:38. ὁ προφήτης ὁ ἀ. Ναζαρέθ Mt 21:11. οἱ ἀ. Κιλικίας the Cilicians Ac 6:9. οἱ ἀδελφοὶ οἱ ἀ. Ἰόππης 10:23 (Musaeus 153 παρθένος ἀπʼ Ἀρκαδίας; Just., A I, 58, 1 Μακρίωνα … τὸν ἀπὸ Πόντου). οἱ ἀ. Θεσσαλονίκης Ἰουδαῖοι 17:13. οἱ ἀ. τῆς Ἰταλίας the Italians Hb 13:24, who could be inside as well as outside Italy (cp. Dssm., Her. 33, 1898, 344, LO 167, 1 [LAE 200, 3]; Mlt. 237; B-D-F §437).—Rather denoting close association οἱ ἀ. τῆς ἐκκλησίας members of the church Ac 12:1; likew. 15:5 (cp. Plut., Cato Min. 4, 2 οἱ ἀπὸ τ. στοᾶς φιλόσοφοι; Ps.-Demetr. c. 68 οἱ ἀπʼ αὐτοῦ=his [Isocrates’] pupils; Synes., Ep. 4 p. 162b; 66 p. 206c; PTebt 33, 3 [112 B.C.], Ῥωμαῖος τῶν ἀπὸ συγκλήτου; Ar. 15, 1 Χριστιανοὶ γενεαλογοῦνται ἀπὸ … Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ; Ath.).—To indicate origin in the sense of material fr. which someth. is made (Hdt. 7, 65; Theocr. 15, 117; IPriene 117, 72 ἀπὸ χρυσοῦ; 1 Esdr 8:56; Sir 43:20 v.l.) ἔνδυμα ἀ. τριχῶν καμήλου clothing made of camel’s hair Mt 3:4.ⓒ fig., w. verbs of asking, desiring, to denote the pers. of or from whom a thing is asked (Ar. 11, 3): δανίσασθαι ἀπό τινος borrow fr. someone Mt 5:42. ἐκζητεῖν ἀ. τῆς γενεᾶς ταύτης Lk 11:51. ἀπαιτεῖν τι ἀπό τινος Lk 12:20. ζητεῖν τι ἀπό τινος 1 Th 2:6. λαμβάνειν τι ἀπό τινος Mt 17:25f; 3J 7.ⓓ fig., w. verbs of perceiving, to indicate source of the perception (Lysias, Andoc. 6; Ps.-Aristot., De Mundo 6, 399b ἀπʼ αὐτῶν τῶν ἔργων θεωρεῖται ὁ θεός; Appian, Liby. 104 §493 ἀπὸ τῆς σφραγῖδος=[recognize a corpse] by the seal-ring; Demetr.: 722 Fgm. 2, 1 στοχάζεσθαι ἀπὸ τῶν ὀνομάτων; Just., D. 60, 1 τοῦτο νοοῦμεν ἀπὸ τῶν λόγων τῶν προλελεγμένων; 100, 2 ἀπὸ τῶν γραφῶν): ἀ. τῶν καρπῶν αὐτῶν ἐπιγνώσεσθε αὐτούς by their fruits you will know them Mt 7:16, 20. μανθάνειν παραβολὴν ἀ. τῆς συκῆς learn a lesson from the fig tree 24:32; Mk 13:28. ἀπὸ τῶν σπερμάτων μὴ ποιεῖσθαι τὴν παραβολήν if we are not to derive our parable solely from reference to seeds (cp. 1 Cor 15:37) AcPlCor 2:28.—Also μανθάνειν τι ἀπό τινος learn someth. fr. someone Gal 3:2; Col 1:7.ⓔ γράψαι ἀφʼ ὧν ἠδυνήθην, lit., write from what I was able, i.e. as well as I could B 21:9 (cp. Tat. 12, 5 οὐκ ἀπὸ γλώττης οὐδὲ ἀπὸ τῶν εἰκότων οὐδὲ ἀπʼ ἐννοιῶν etc.).④ to indicate distance fr. a point, away from, for μακρὰν ἀ. τινος far fr. someone, ἀπὸ μακρόθεν fr. a great distance s. μακράν, μακρόθεν. ἀπέχειν ἀπό τινος s. ἀπέχω 4. W. detailed measurements (corresp. to Lat. ‘a’, s. B-D-F §161, 1; Rob. 575; WSchulze, Graeca Latina 1901, 15ff; Hdb. on J 11:18; Appian, Bell. Civ. 3, 12 §42; CB I/2, 390 no. 248) ἦν Βηθανία ἐγγὺς τῶν Ἱεροσολύμων ὡς ἀπὸ σταδίων δεκατέντε Bethany was near Jerusalem, about 15 stades (less than 3 km.) away J 11:18. ὡς ἀπὸ πηχῶν διακοσίων about 200 cubits (c. 90 meters) 21:8. ἀπὸ σταδίων χιλίων ἑξακοσίων about 1600 stades (c. 320 km.) Rv 14:20; cp. Hv 4, 1, 5 (for other examples of this usage, s. Rydbeck 68).—Hebraistically ἀπὸ προσώπου τινός (Gen 16:6; Jer 4:26; Jdth 2:14; Sir 21:2; 1 Macc 5:34; En 103:4; Just., A I, 37, 1 ἀπὸ προσώπου τοῦ πατρὸς ἐλέχθησαν διὰ Ἠσαίου … οἵδε οἱ λόγοι ‘in the name of the father … through Isaiah’; 38, 1 al.)=מִפְּנֵי פ׳ ( away) from the presence of someone 2 Th 1:9 (Is 2:10, 19, 21); Rv 12:14 (B-D-F §140; 217, 1; Mlt-H. 466).⑤ to indicate cause, means, or outcomeⓐ gener., to show the reason for someth. because of, as a result of, for (numerous ref. in FBleek on Hb 5:7; PFay 111, 4; POxy 3314, 7 [from falling off a horse]; Jdth 2:20; 4 [6] Esdr [POxy 1010]; AscIs 3:13; Jos., Ant. 9, 56) οὐκ ἠδύνατο ἀ. τοῦ ὄχλου he could not because of the crowd Lk 19:3; cp. Mk 2:4 D. οὐκ ἐνέβλεπον ἀπὸ τῆς δόξης τοῦ φωτός I could not see because of the brilliance of the light Ac 22:11. ἀ. τοῦ πλήθους τ. ἰχθύων J 21:6 (M-EBoismard, ad loc.: s. 1f end). ἀ. τοῦ ὕδατος for the water Hs 8, 2, 8. ἀ. τῆς θλίψεως because of the persecution Ac 11:19. οὐαὶ τῷ κόσμῳ ἀ. τ. σκανδάλων Mt 18:7 (s. B-D-F §176, 1; Mlt. 246). εἰσακουσθεὶς ἀ. τῆς εὐλαβείας heard because of his piety Hb 5:7 (but the text may be corrupt; at any rate it is obscure and variously interpr.; besides the comm. s. KRomaniuk, Die Gottesfürchtigen im NT: Aegyptus 44, ’64, 84; B-D-F §211; Rob. 580; s. on εὐλάβεια).ⓑ to indicate means with the help of, with (Hdt. et al.; Ael. Aristid. 37, 23 K.=2 p. 25 D.; PGM 4, 2128f σφράγιζε ἀπὸ ῥύπου=seal with dirt; En 97:8) γεμίσαι τὴν κοιλίαν ἀ. τ. κερατίων fill one’s stomach w. the husks Lk 15:16 v.l. (s. ἐκ 4aζ; cp. Pr 18:20). οἱ πλουτήσαντες ἀπʼ αὐτῆς Rv 18:15 (cp. Sir 11:18).ⓒ to indicate motive or reason for, from, with (Appian, Bell. Civ. 5, 13 §52 ἀπʼ εὐνοίας=with goodwill; 1 Macc 6:10; pap exx. in Kuhring 35) κοιμᾶσθαι ἀ. τῆς λύπης sleep from sorrow Lk 22:45. ἀ. τῆς χαρᾶς αὐτοῦ Mt 13:44; cp. Lk 24:41; Ac 12:14. ἀ. τοῦ φόβου κράζειν Mt 14:26, ἀ. φόβου καὶ προσδοκίας with fear and expectation Lk 21:26. Hence verbs of fearing, etc., take ἀ. to show the cause of the fear (s. above 1c) μὴ φοβεῖσθαι ἀ. τ. ἀποκτεννόντων τὸ σῶμα not be afraid of those who kill only the body Mt 10:28; Lk 12:4 (cp. Jdth 5:23; 1 Macc 2:62; 3:22; 8:12; En 106:4).ⓓ to indicate the originator of the action denoted by the verb from (Trag., Hdt. et al.) ἀ. σοῦ σημεῖον ἰδεῖν Mt 12:38. γινώσκειν ἀπό τινος learn fr. someone Mk 15:45. ἀκούειν ἀ. τοῦ στόματός τινος hear fr. someone’s mouth, i.e. fr. him personally Lk 22:71 (Dionys. Hal. 3, 8 ἀ. στόματος ἤκουσεν); cp. Ac 9:13; 1J 1:5. τὴν ἀ. σοῦ ἐπαγγελίαν a promise given by you Ac 23:21 (cp. Ath. 2, 3 ταῖς ἀπὸ τῶν κατηγόρων αἰτίαις ‘the charges made by the accusers’). ἀφʼ ἑνὸς ἐγενήθησαν Hb 11:12. Prob. παραλαμβάνειν ἀ. τοῦ κυρίου 1 Cor 11:23 is to be understood in the same way: Paul is convinced that he is taught by the Lord himself (for direct teaching s. EBröse, Die Präp. ἀπό 1 Cor 11:23: StKr 71, 1898, 351–60; Dssm.; BWeiss; Ltzm.; H-DWendland. But for indirect communication: Zahn et al.). παραλαβὼν ἀπὸ τῶν θυγατέρων Φιλίππου, ὅτι Papias (11:2); opp. παρειληφέναι ὑπὸ τῶν θ. Φ. (2:9).—Of the more remote cause ἀπʼ ἀνθρώπων from human beings (as opposed to transcendent revelation; w. διʼ ἀνθρώπου; cp. Artem. 1, 73 p. 66, 11 ἀπὸ γυναικῶν ἢ διὰ γυναικῶν; 2, 36 p. 135, 26) Gal 1:1. ἀ. κυρίου πνεύματος fr. the Lord, who is the Spirit 2 Cor 3:18. ἔχειν τι ἀπό τινος have (received) someth. fr. someone 1 Cor 6:19; 1 Ti 3:7; 1J 2:20; 4:21.—In salutation formulas εἰρήνη ἀ. θεοῦ πατρός ἡμῶν peace that comes from God, our father Ro 1:7; 1 Cor 1:3; 2 Cor 1:2; Gal 1:3; Eph 1:2; cp. 6:23; Phil 1:2; Col 1:2; 1 Th 1:1 v.l.; 2 Th 1:2; 1 Ti 1:2; 2 Ti 1:2; Tit 1:4; Phlm 3. σοφία ἀ. θεοῦ wisdom that comes fr. God 1 Cor 1:30. ἔπαινος ἀ. θεοῦ praise fr. God 4:5. καὶ τοῦτο ἀ. θεοῦ and that brought about by God Phil 1:28. The expr. εἰρήνη ἀπὸ ‘ὁ ὢν καὶ ὁ ἦν καὶ ὁ ἐρχόμενος’ Rv 1:4 is quite extraordinary. It may be an interpretation of the name Yahweh already current, or an attempt to show reverence for the divine name by preserving it unchanged, or simply one more of the grammatical peculiarities so frequent in Rv (Meyer6-Bousset 1906, 159ff; Mlt. 9, note 1; cp. PParis 51, 33 ἀπὸ ἀπηλιότης; Mussies 93f, 328).ⓔ to indicate responsible agents for someth., from, ofα. the self, st. Gk. usage (Thu. 5, 60, 1; X., Mem. 2, 10, 3; Andoc., Orat. 2, 4 οὗτοι οὐκ ἀφʼ αὑτῶν ταῦτα πράττουσιν; Diod S 17, 56; Num 16:28; 4 Macc 11:3; En 98:4; TestAbr A 15 p. 95, 26 [Stone p. 38]; 18 p. 101, 6 [Stone p. 50]; Just., A I, 43, 8) the expr. ἀφʼ ἑαυτοῦ (pl. ἀφʼ ἑαυτῶν) of himself and ἀπʼ ἐμαυτοῦ of myself are common Lk 12:57; 21:30; 2 Cor 3:5, esp. so in J: 5:19, 30; 8:28; 10:18; 15:4.—7:17f; 11:51; 14:10; 16:13; 18:34. So also ἀπʼ ἐμαυτοῦ οὐκ ἐλήλυθα I did not come of myself (opp. the Father sent me) 7:28; 8:42.β. fr. others. W. verbs in the pass. voice or pass. mng. ὑπό is somet. replaced by ἀπό (in isolated cases in older Gk. e.g. Thu. 1, 17 et al. [Kühner-G. II/1 p. 457f]; freq. in later Gk.: Polyb. 1, 79, 14; Hero I 152, 6; 388, 11; Nicol. Dam.: 90 Fgm. 130, 130 Jac.; IG XII/5, 29, 1; SIG 820, 9; PLond III, 1173, 12 p. 208; BGU 1185, 26; PFlor 150, 6 ἀ. τῶν μυῶν κατεσθιόμενα; PGM 4, 256; Kuhring 36f; 1 Macc 15:17; Sir 16:4; ParJer 1:1 ᾐχμαλωτεύθησαν … ἀπὸ τοῦ βασιλέως; Philo, Leg. All. 3, 62; Just., A I, 68, 6 ἐπιστολὴν … γραφεῖσάν μοι ἀπὸ Σερήνου, D. 121, 3 ἀπὸ παντὸς [γένους] μετάνοιαν πεποιῆσθαι. See B-D-F §210; Rob. 820; GHatzidakis, Einl. in d. neugriech. Gramm. 1892, 211; AJannaris, An Histor. Gk. Grammar 1897, §1507). Yet just at this point the textual tradition varies considerably, and the choice of prep. is prob. at times influenced by the wish to express special nuances of mng. Lk 8:29b v.l. (ὑπό text); 43b (ὑπό v.l.); 10:22 D; ἀποδεδειγμένος ἀ. τ. θεοῦ attested by God Ac 2:22. ἐπικληθεὶς Βαρναβᾶς ἀ. (ὑπό v.l.) τ. ἀποστόλων named B. by the apostles 4:36. κατενεχθεὶς ἀ. τοῦ ὕπνου overcome by sleep 20:9. ἀθετούμενος ἀπὸ τῶν παραχαρασσόντων τὰ λόγια αὐτοῦ inasmuch as (Jesus) is being rejected by those who falsify his words AcPlCor 2:3. νεκροῦ βληθέντος ἀπὸ τῶν υἱῶν Ἰσραὴλ ἐπʼ αὐτά when a corpse was cast upon them (the bones of Elisha) 2:32. In such cases ἀπό freq. denotes the one who indirectly originates an action, and can be transl. at the hands of, by command of: πολλὰ παθεῖν ἀ. τ. πρεσβυτέρων suffer much at the hands of the elders Mt 16:21; cp. Lk 9:22; 17:25, where the emphasis is to be placed on παθεῖν, not on ἀποδοκιμασθῆναι. In ἀ. θεοῦ πειράζομαι the thought is that the temptation is caused by God, though not actually carried out by God Js 1:13. ἡτοιμασμένος ἀ. τοῦ θεοῦ prepared by God’s command, not by God in person Rv 12:6.⑥ In a few expr. ἀπό helps to take the place of an adverb. ἀπὸ μέρους, s. μέρος 1c.—ἡμέρᾳ ἀφʼ ἡμέρας day by day GJs 12:3.—ἀπὸ μιᾶς (acc. to Wlh., Einl.2 26, an Aramaism, min ḥădā˒=at once [s. MBlack, An Aramaic Approach3, ’67, 113]; but this does not explain the fem. gender, found also in the formulaic ἐπὶ μιᾶς Maxim. Tyr. 6, 3f En 99:9 [s. SAalen, NTS 13, ’67, 3] and in Mod. Gk. μὲ μιᾶς at once [Thumb §162 note 2]. PSI 286, 22 uses ἀπὸ μιᾶς of a payment made ‘at once’; on the phrase s. New Docs 2, 189. Orig. γνώμης might have been a part of the expr. [Philo, Spec. Leg. 3, 73], or ὁρμῆς [Thu. 7, 71, 6], or γλώσσης [Cass. Dio 44, 36, 2], or φωνῆς [Herodian 1, 4, 8]; cp. ἀπὸ μιᾶς φωνῆς Plut., Mor. 502d of an echo; s. B-D-F §241, 6) unanimously, alike, in concert Lk 14:18. Sim. ἀπὸ τ. καρδιῶν fr. (your) hearts, sincerely Mt 18:35.—Himerius, Or. 39 [=Or. 5], 6 has as a formula διὰ μιᾶς, probably = continuously, uninterruptedly, Or. 44 [=Or. 8], 2 fuller διὰ μιᾶς τῆς σπουδῆς=with one and the same, or with quite similar zeal.—M-M. -
16 इन्द्रः _indrḥ
इन्द्रः [इन्द्-रन्; इन्दतीति इन्द्रः; इदि ऐश्वर्ये Malli.]1 The lord of gods.-2 The god of rain, rain; cloud; इन्द्रो वरुणः सोमो रुद्रः । शं न इन्द्रो बृहस्पतिः Tait. Vp.1.1.1. Bṛi. Up.1.4.11.-3 A lord or ruler (as of men &c.). इन्द्रो- मायाभिः पुरुरूप ईयते Bṛi. Up.2.5.19. first or best (of any class of objects), always as the last member of comp.; नरेन्द्रः a lord of men i. e. a king; so मृगेन्द्रः a lion; गजेन्द्रः the lord or chief of elephants; so योगीन्द्रः, कपीन्द्रः.-4 A prince, king.-5 The pupil of the right eye.-6 N. of the plant कुटज.-7 Night.-8 One of the divisions of भारतवर्ष.-9 N. of the 26th Yoga.-1 The human or animal soul.-11 A vegetable poison.-12 The Yoga star in the 26th Nakṣatra.-13 Greatness.-14 The five objects of senses.-द्रा 1 The wife of Indra, Indrāṇī.-2 N. of a plant (मरुबक Mar. मरवा) [Indra, the god of the firmament, is the Jupiter Pluvius of the Indian Āryans. In the Vedas he is placed in the first rank among the gods; yet he is not regarded as an uncreated being, being distinctly spoken of in various passages of the Vedas as being born, and as having a father and a mother. He is sometimes represented as having been produced by the gods as a destroyer of enemies, as the son of Ekāṣṭakā, and in Rv.1.9.13 he is said to have sprung from the mouth of Puruṣa. He is of a ruddy or golden colour, and can assume any form at will. He rides in a bright golden chariot drawn by two tawny horses. His most famous weapon is the thunderbolt which he uses with deadly effect in his warfare with the demons of darkness, drought and inclement weather, variously called Ahi, Vṛitra, Śambar, Namu- chi &c. He storms and breaks through their castles, and sends down fertilizing showers of rain to the great delight of his worshippers. He is thus the lord of the atmosphere, the dispenser of rain, and governor of the weather. He is represented as being assisted by the Maruts or storm-gods in his warfare. Besides the thunderbolt he uses arrows, a large hook, and a net. The Soma juice is his most favourite food, and under its exhilarating influence he performs great achieve- ments (cf. Rv.1.119), and pleases his devout worshippers, who are said to invite the god to drink the juice. He is their friend and even their brother; a father, and the most fatherly of fathers; the helper of the poor, and the deliverer and comforter of his ser- vants. He is a wall of defence; his friend is never slain or defeated. He richly rewards his adorers, particularly those who bring him libations of Soma, and he is supplicated for all sorts of temporal blessings as cows, horses, chariots, health, intelligence, pros- perous days, long life, and victory in war. In the Vedas Indra's wife is Indrānī, who is invoked among the goddesses.*****Such is the Vedic conception of Indra. But in later mythology he falls in the second rank. He is said to be one of the sons of Kaśyapa and Dākṣāyaṇī or Aditi. He is inferior to the triad Brahmā, Viṣṇu and Maheśa (though in some places Viṣṇu is regard- ed as his younger brother, cf. R.14.59,15.4), but he is the chief of all the other gods, and is com- monly styled Sureśa, Devendra &c. As in the Vedas so in later mythology, he is the regent of the atmosphere, and of the east quarter, and his world is called Svarga. He sends the lightning, uses the thunderbolt and sends down rain. He is frequently at war with Asuras, whom he constantly dreads, and by whom he is sometimes defeated. The Indra of mythology is famous for his incontinence and adultery, one prominent instance of which is his seduction of Ahalyā, the wife of Gautama (see Ahalyā), and for which he is often spoken of as Ahalyā-jāra. The curse of the sage im- pressed upon him a 1 marks resembling the female organ, and he was therefore called Sayoni; but these marks were afterwards changed into eyes, and he is hence called Netra-yoni and Sahasrākṣa. In the Rāmāyana Indra is represented as having been defeated and carried off to Laṅkā by Ravaṇa's son called Meghanāda, who for this exploit received the title of 'Indrajit'. It was only at the intercession of Brahmā and the gods that Indra was released, and this humiliation was regarded as a punishment for his seduction of Ahalyā. He is also represented as being in constant dread of sages practising potent penances, and as sending down nymphs to beguile their minds (see Apsaras). In the Purāṇas he is said to have destroyed the offspring of Diti in her womb, and to have cut off the wings of mountains when they grew troublesome. Other stories are also told in which Indra was once worsted by Raja, gran- dson of Purūravas, owing to the curse of Durvāsas, and other accounts show that he and Kṛiṣna were at war with each other for the Pārijāta tree which the latter wanted to remove from Svarga, and which he succeeded in doing in spite of Indra's resistance. His wife is Indrāṇī, the daughter of the demon Pulo- man, and his son is named Jayanta. He is also said to be father of Arjuna. His epithets are numerous; mostly descriptive of his achievements, e. g. वृत्रहन्, बलभिद्, पाकशासन, गोत्रभिद्, पुरंदर, शतक्रतु, जिष्णु, नमुचिसूदन &c. (see Ak.I.1.44.47). The Heaven of Indra is Svarga; its capital, Amarāvatī; his garden, Nandana; his elephant, Airāvata; his horse, Uchchaiśravas; his bow, the rain-bow, and his sword, Paranja.].-Comp. -अग्निः the fire produced from the contact of clouds; ˚धूमः frost, snow; ˚देवता the 16th lunar mansion.-अनुजः, -अवरजः an epithet of Viṣṇu and of Nārāyaṇa (उपेन्द्र); तस्थौ भ्रातृसमीपस्थः शक्रस्येन्द्रानुजो यथा Rām.6.91.4.-अरिः an Asura or demon.-अवसानः a desert.-अशनः 1 hemp (dried and chewed).-2 the shrub which bears the seed used in jeweller's weight, (गुंजावृक्ष).-आयुधम् Indra's weapon, the rainbow; इन्द्रा- युधद्योतिततोरणाङ्कम् R.7.4,12.79; K.127.(-ध) 1 N. of the horse in Kādambarī (i. e. Kapiñjala changed into a horse).-2 a horse marked with black about the eyes.-3 a diamond. (-धा) a kind of leech.-आसनम् 1 the throne of Indra.-2 a throne in general.-3 a foot of five short syllables.-इज्यः N. of बृहस्पति the preceptor of gods.-ईश्वरः one of the forms of Śiva-liṅga.-उत्सवः a festival honouring Indra.- ऋषभ a. having Indra as a bull, or impregnated by Indra, an epithet of the earth. इन्द्रऋषभा द्रविणे नो दधातु Av.12.1.6.-कर्मन् m. an epithet of Viṣṇu (performing Indra's deeds).-कान्तः A class of the four-storeyed buildings. (Mānasāra 21.6-68).-कीलः 1 N. of the mountain मन्दर.-2 a rock.(-लम्) 1 the banner of Indra.-2 A pin, nail, bolt फालका भाजनोर्ध्वे तु तदूर्ध्वे चेन्द्रकीलकम् (Mānasāra 12.126). cf. also Kau. A.2.3.-कुञ्जरः Indra's elephant, Airāvata.-कूटः N. of a mountain-कृष्ट a. 'ploughed by Indra', growing exuberantly or in a wild state. (-ष्टः) a kind of corn produced by rain-water.-केतुः Indra's banner.-कोशः, -षः, -षकः, -ष्ठः 1 a couch, sofa, which is generally made up of covering pieces of perforated wooden planks; cf. अट्टालक- प्रतोलीमध्ये त्रिधानुष्काधिष्ठानं-इन्द्रकोशं कारयेत् Kau. A.2.3.-2 a platform.-3 a projection of the roof of a house.-4 A pin or bracket projecting from the wall (नागदन्त). A projection of the roof of a house forming a kind of balcony; Kau. A.24.-गिरिः the महेन्द्र mountain.-गुरुः, -आचार्यः the teacher of Indra; i. e. बृहस्पति.-गोपः, -गोपकः [इन्द्रो गोपो रक्षको$स्य, वर्षाभवत्वात्तस्य] a kind of insect of red or white colour; Śukra.4.157; K.1.-चन्दनम् the white sandal wood.-चापम्, -धनुस् n.1 a rainbow; विद्युत्वन्तं ललितवनिताः सेन्द्रचापं सचित्राः Me.64; Śi.7.4.-2 the bow of Indra-चिर्भटा A mild variety of Colocynth. The leaf is tripartite, rough and wrinkled. (Mar. कंवडळ, applied often as इन्द्रावण in the sense of vile, malignant, dark and hateful.)-च्छदः A neck- lace of pearls having 18 strings.-च्छन्दस् n. [इन्द्र इव सहस्रनेत्रेण सहस्रगुच्छेन च्छाद्यते] a necklace consisting of 1 strings.-जः N. of Vālī.-जतु n. Bitumen (Mar. शिलाजित).-जननम् Indra's birth.-जननीय a. treating of Indra's birth (as a work).-जा a. Ved. born or arising from Indra. Av.4.3.7.-जालम् [इन्द्रस्य परमेश्वरस्य जालं मायेव]1 the net of Indra. तेनाह- मिन्द्रजालेनामूंस्तमसाभि दधामि सर्वान् Av.8.8.8.-2 a weapon used by Arjuna; a stratagem or trick in war.-3 deception, cheating.-4 conjuring, jugglery, magical tricks; इन्द्रजालं च मायां वै कुहका वा$पि भीषणा Mb.5.16.55. स्वप्नेन्द्रजालसदृशः खलु जीवलोकः Śānti.2.2; K.15.-जालिक a. [इन्द्रजाल-ठन्] deceptive, unreal, delusive. (-कः) a juggler, conjurer.-जित् m. 'conqueror of Indra', N. of a son of Rāvaṇa who was killed by Lakṣmaṇa. [Indrajit is another name of Meghanāda a son of Rāvaṇa. When Rāvaṇa warred against Indra in his own heaven, his son Meghanāda was with him, and fought most valiantly. During the combat, Meghanāda, by virtue of the magical power of becoming invisible which he had obtained from Śiva, bound Indra, and bore him off in triumph to Laṅkā. Brahmā and the other gods hurried thither to obtain his release, and gave to Meghanāda the title of Indrajit, 'conqueror of Indra'; but the victor refused to release his prisoners unless he were promised immortality. Brahmā refused to grant this extravagant demand, but he strenuously persisted, and achieved his object. In the Rāmāyaṇa he is repre- sented to have been decapitated by Lakṣmaṇa while he was engaged in a sacrifice]. ˚हन्तृ or विजयिन् m. N. of Lakṣmaṇa.-ज्येष्ठ a. Ved. led by Indra.-तापनः the thundering of clouds.-तूलम्, -तूलकम् a flock of cotton.-दमनः the son of Bāṇāsura.-दारुः the tree Pinus Devadāru.-द्युति Sandal-द्रुः, -द्रुमः 1 the plant Termi- nalia Arjuna (अर्जुन).-2 The plant कुटज.-द्वीपः, -पम् one of the 9 Dvīpas or Divisions of the continent (of India).-धनुः N. of Indra's bow, the rainbow; स एकव्रा- त्यो$भवत्स धनुरादत्त तदेवेन्द्रधनुः Av.15.1.6.-ध्वजः 1 a flag raised on the 12th day of the bright half of Bhādra.-2 Indra's weapon; विस्रस्ताकल्पकेशस्रगिन्द्रध्वज इवापतत् Bhāg.1.44.22.-नक्षत्रम् Indra's lunar mansion फल्गुनी.-नेत्रम् 1 the eye of Indra.-2 the number one thousand.-नीलः [इन्द्र इव नीलः श्यामः] a sapphire; परीक्षाप्रत्ययैर्यैश्च पद्मरागः परीक्ष्यते । त एव प्रत्यया दृष्टा इन्द्रनीलमणेरपि ॥ Garuḍa. P.; R.13.54;16.69; Me.48,79.-नीलकः an emerald.-पत्नी 1 Indra's wife, शची.-पर्णी, -पुष्पा N. of a medicinal plant (Mar. कळलावी).-पर्वतः 1 the महेन्द्र mountain.-2 a blue mountain.-पुत्रा N. of अदिति.-पुरोगम, -पुरःसर, -श्रेष्ठ a. led or preceded by Indra, having Indra at the head.-पुरोहितः N. of बृहस्पति. (-ता) the asterism Puṣya.-प्रमतिः N. of the pupil of Paila and the author of some ṛiks of the Rv.-प्रस्थम् N. of a city on the Yamunā, the residence of the Paṇḍavas (identified with the modern Delhi); इन्द्रप्रस्थगमस्तावत्कारि मा सन्तु चेदयः Śi.2.63.-प्रहरणम् Indra's weapon, the thunderbolt.-भगिनी N. of Pārvatī.-भेषजम् dried ginger.-मखः a sacrifice in honour of Indra.-महः 1 a festival in honour of Indra.-2 the rainy season; ˚कामुकः a dog.-मादन a. animating or delighting Indra; ये वायव इन्द्रमादनासः Rv.7.92.4.-मेदिन् a. Ved. whose friend or ally is Indra; इन्द्रमेदी सत्वनो नि ह्वयस्व Av.5.2-.8.-यज्ञः (See इन्द्रमह and इन्द्रमख) श्वो$स्माकं घोषस्योचित इन्द्रयज्ञो नामोत्सवः भविष्यति Bālacharita I.-यवः, -वम् seed of the Kutaja tree.-लुप्तः, -प्तम्, -लुप्तकम् 1 excessive bald- ness of the head.-2 loss of beard.-लोकः Indra's world, Svarga or Paradise.-लोकेशः 1 lord of Indra's world, i. e. Indra.-2 a guest (who, if hospitably received, confers paradise on his host).-वंशा, -वज्रा N. of two metres, see Appendix.-वल्लरी, -वल्ली N. of a plant (पारिजात) or of इन्द्रवारुणी.-वस्तिः [इन्द्रस्य आत्मनः वस्तिरिव] the calf (of the leg).-वाततम a. Ved. desired by Indra. अस्मे ऊतीरिन्द्रवाततमाः Rv.1.6.6.-वानकम् A variety of diamonds. Kau. A.2.11.-वायू (du.) Indra and Vāyu. इन्द्रवायू उभाविह सुहवेह हवामहे Av.3.2.6.-वारुणी, -वारुणिका Colocynth, a wild bitter gourd cucumis colocynthis. (Mar. मोठी कंवडळ) किमिन्द्रवारुणी राम सितया कटुकीयते Laghu Yoga- vāsiṣṭha-sāra X. सौवर्चलं हरिद्रा च पिप्पली चेन्द्रवारुणिः । मूत्र- कृच्छ्रे प्रशंसन्ति पिण्डो$यं वाजिनां हितः ॥ शालिहोत्र of भोज 33.-वाह् a. carrying Indra.-वृक्षः the Devadāru tree.-वृद्धा a kind of abscess.-वैडूर्यम् a kind of precious stone.-व्रतम् Indra's rule of conduct; one of the duties of a king (who is said to follow इन्द्रव्रत when he distri- butes benefits as Indra pours down rain); वार्षिकांश्चतुरो मासान् यथेन्द्रो$प्यभिवर्षति । तथाभिवर्षेत्स्वं राष्ट्रं कामैरिन्द्रव्रतं चरन् ॥ Ms.9.34.-शक्तिः f. Indrāṇī, the wife of Indra, or his energy personified.-शत्रुः 1 an enemy or destroyer of Indra (when the accent is on the last syllable), an epithet of प्रह्लाद; इन्द्रशत्रो विवर्धस्व मा चिरं जहि विद्विषम् Bhāg.6.9.12. बलिप्रदिष्टां श्रियमाददानं त्रैविक्रमं पादमिवेन्द्रशत्रुः R.7.35.-2 [इन्द्रः शत्रुः यस्य] one whose enemy is Indra, an epithet of वृत्र (when the accent is on the first syllable). (This refers to a legend in the Śat. Br., where it is said that Vṛitra's father intended his son to become the destroyer of Indra, and asked him to say इन्द्रशत्रुर्वधस्व &c. but who, through mistake, accented the word on the first syllable, and was killed by Indra; cf. Śik.52; मन्त्रो हीनः स्वरतो वर्णतो वा मिथ्याप्रयुक्तो न तमर्थमाह । स वाग्वज्रो यजमानं हिनस्ति यथेन्द्रशत्रुः स्वरतो$पराधात् ॥-शलभः a kind of insect (इन्द्रगोप).-संजयम् N. of a sāman. Arṣeya Br.-संधा connection or alliance with Indra. तयाहमिन्द्रसंधया सर्वान् देवानिह हुव Av.11.1.9.-सारथिः 1 N. of Mātali.-2 an epi- thet of Vāyu, driving in the same carriage with Indra; Rv.4.46.2.-सावर्णिः N. of the fourteenth Manu.-सुतः, -सूनुः 1 N. of (a) Jayanta; (b) Arjuna; (c) Vāli, the king of monkeys.-2 N. of the अर्जुन tree.-सुरसः, -सुरा a shrub the leaves of which are used in discutient applications (निर्गुंडी).-सेनः N. of several men; of Bali; of a mountain; Bhāg.8.2.23.-सेना 1 Indra's missile or host.-2 Indra's army; Rv.1.12.2.-सेनानीः the leader of Indra's armies, epithet of Kārtikeya.-स्तुत् m.-स्तोमः 1 praise of Indra; N. of a particular hymn addressed to Indra in certain ceremonies.-2 a sacrifice in honour of Indra.-हवः invocation of Indra; भद्रान् कृण्वन्निन्द्रहवान्त्सखिभ्य Rv.9.96.1.-हस्तः a kind of medicament. -
17 ÓÐAL
(pl. óðul), n. ancestral property, patrimony, inheritance (in land); family homestead; native place; flýja óðul sín, to abandon one’s home, go into exile.* * *n., pl. óðul; in Norse MSS. it is usually contracted before a vowel (whence arose the forms öðli eðli), and owing to a peculiarity in the Norse sound of ð an r is inserted in contracted forms, örðla, orðlom, N. G. L. passim: [akin to aðal, öðli, eðli, = nature; öðlask = adipisci; oðlingr, q. v.; A. S. êðel = patrimony; it is also the parent word of Germ. edel, adel, = noble, nobility, for the nobility of the earliest Teut. communities consisted of the land-owners. From this word also originated mid. Lat. allodium, prob. by inverting the syllables for the sake of euphony (all-od = od-al); oðal or ethel is the vernacular Teut. form, allodium the Latinised form, which is never found in vernacular writers; it may be that the transposition of syllables was due to the th sound in oðal; and hence, again, the word feudal is a compd word, fee-odal, or an odal held as a fee or feif from the king, and answering to heið-launað óðal of the Norse law (heið = fee = king’s pay), N. G. L. i. 91.]B. Nature, inborn quality, property, = aðal, eðli, öðli, q. v.; this seems to be the original sense, þat er eigi at réttu mannsins óðal, Sks. 326 B; þat er helzt byrjar til farmanns óðals, a seaman’s life, 52; þat er kaupmanna óðal (= mercatorum est), 28; jörlum öllum óðal batni, Gh. 21.II. a law term, an allodium, property held in allodial tenure, patrimony. The condition which in the Norse law constitutes an oðal was either an unbroken succession from father to son (er afi hefir afa leift) through three or more generations, N. G. L. i. 91, 237, Gþl. 284; or unbroken possession for thirty or more years, N. G. L. i. 249; or sixty years, Gþl. 284; or it might be acquired through brand-erfð (q. v.), through weregild, barn-fóstr (q. v.); and lastly heið-launað óðal, an allodial fief, was granted for services rendered to the king, see N. G. L. i. 91: the oðal descended to the son, and was opp. to útjarðir ( out-lands), and lausa-fé ( movables), which descended to the daughter, Gþl. 233; yet even a woman, e. g. a baugrygr (q. v.), could hold an oðal, in which case she was called óðals-kona, 92, jörð komin undir snúð ok snældu = an estate come under the rule of the spindle, N. G. L. i. 237; the allit. phrase, arfr ok óðal, 31, Gþl. 250: brigða óðal, N. G. L. i. 86; selja óðal, to sell one’s óðal, 237. The oðal was in a certain sense inalienable within a family, so that even when parted with, the possessor still retained a title (land-brigð, máldagi á landi). In the ancient Scandin. communities the inhabited land was possessed by free oðalsmen (allodial holders), and the king was the lord of the people, but not of the soil. At a later time, when the small communities were merged into great kingdoms, through conquest or otherwise, the king laid hold of the land, and all the ancient oðals were to be held as a grant from the king; such an attempt of king Harold Fairhair in Norway and the earls of Orkney in those islands is recorded in Hkr. Har. S. Hárf. ch. 6, Eg. ch. 4, cp. Ld. ch. 2, Orkn. ch. 8, 30, 80 (in Mr. Dasent’s Ed.); cp. also Hák. S. Goða ch. 1. Those attempts are recorded in the Icel. Sagas as acts of tyranny and confiscation, and as one of the chief causes for the great emigration from the Scandinavian kingdoms during the 9th century (the question of free land here playing the same part as that of free religion in Great Britain in the 17th century). The attempt failed in Norway, where the old oðal institution remains in the main to the present day. Even the attempts of king Harold were, according to historians (Konrad Maurer), not quite analogous to what took place in England after the Conquest, but appear to have taken something like the form of a land-tax or rent; but as the Sagas represent it, it was an attempt towards turning the free odal institution into a feudal one, such as had already taken place among the Teutons in Southern Europe.III. gener. and metaph. usages, one’s native land, homestead, inheritance; the land is called the ‘oðal’ of the reigning king, á Danr ok Danpr dýrar hallir, æðra óðal, en ér hafit, Rm. 45; eignask namtú óðal þegna, allan Noreg, Gauta spjalli, Fms. vi. 26 (in a verse); banna Sveini sín óðul, St. Olave will defend his óðal against Sweyn, 426 (in a verse); flýja óðul sín, to fly one’s óðal, go into exile, Fms. iv. 217; flýja óðul eðr eignir, vii. 25; koma aptr í Noreg til óðala sinna, 196; þeim er þar eru útlendir ok eigi eigu þar óðul, who are strangers and not natives there, Edda 3; öðlask Paradísar óðal, the inheritance of Paradise, 655 viii. 2; himneskt óðal, heavenly inheritance, Greg. 68; njóta þeirra gjafa ok óðala er Adam var útlægr frá rekinn, Sks. 512: allit., jarl ok óðal, earl (or franklin) and odal, Gh. 21.2. spec. phrase, at alda óðali, for everlasting inheritance, i. e. for ever and ever, D. N. i. 229: contr., at alda öðli, id., Grág. i. 264, D.I. i. 266; til alda óðals, for ever, iii. 88: mod., frá, alda öðli, from time immemorial.C. COMPDS: óðalsborinn, óðalsbréf, óðalsbrigð, óðalsjörð, óðalskona, óðalsmaðr, óðalsnautr, óðalsneyti, óðalsréttr, óðalsskipti, óðalstuptir, óðalsvitni. -
18 aman
"1. Oof!/God!/Lord!/Lord help us! (indicating disgust or anger). 2. Please!/For goodness sake! 3. My! (indicating great approbation). 4. mercy. - Allah/Allahım! 1. God!/God have mercy! (indicating fear or amazement). 2. Oh Lord!/Oh God!/Lord help us! (indicating disgust or displeasure). - aman (bir şey) olmamak not to be anything special. - bulmak to escape, be saved. - dedirtmek /a/ to make (someone) give up, make (one) yield. - demek to ask for mercy; to surrender. - derim! Don´t you do it!/Beware of doing such a thing! - dilemek /dan/ to ask (one) for mercy. - gayret! Keep on!/ Hold on! -a gelmek to give up and submit. -a getirmek /ı/ to make (someone) give up, make (one) yield. -ı kesilmek 1. to be too weak to plead for mercy. 2. to have nobody to turn to for help. - vermek /a/ to grant (one) his life, spare (one´s) life. - vermemek /a/ 1. not to give (someone) a chance. 2. to kill (someone) without compunction. - zaman a plea for mercy. - zaman bilmemek/dinlememek to be implacable, refuse all pleas. - zaman vermemek /a/ to beat (someone) without mercy. -ı zamanı yok. There is no trying to get out of it; you must." -
19 κόσμος
κόσμος, ου, ὁ (Hom.+)① that which serves to beautify through decoration, adornment, adorning (Hom.+; Diod S 20, 4, 5 τῶν γυναικῶν τὸν κόσμον; OGI 531, 13; SIG 850, 10; IMaronIsis 41; PEleph 1, 4; PSI 240, 12 γυναικεῖον κόσμον; LXX; TestJud 12:1; JosAs 2:6 al.; Philo, Migr. Abr. 97 γυναικῶν κ.; Jos., Ant. 1, 250; 15, 5; Just., A II, 11, 4f) of women’s attire, etc. ὁ ἔξωθεν … κόσμος external adorning 1 Pt 3:3 (Vi. Hom. 4 of the inward adornment of a woman, beside σωφροσύνη; Crates, Ep. 9; Pythag., Ep. 11, 1; Plut., Mor. 141e; on the topic of external adornment cp. SIG 736, 15–26).② condition of orderliness, orderly arrangement, order (Hom. et al.; s. HDiller, Die vorphilosophische Gebrauch von κ. und κοσμεῖν: BSnell Festschr., ’56, 47–60) μετὰ κόσμου in order Dg 12:9 (text uncertain; s. μετακόσμιος).③ the sum total of everything here and now, the world, the (orderly) universe, in philosophical usage (so, acc. to Plut., Mor. 886b, as early as Pythagoras; certainly Heraclitus, Fgm. 66; Pla., Gorg. 508a, Phdr. 246c; Chrysipp., Fgm. 527 v. Arnim κόσμος σύστημα ἐξ οὐρανοῦ καὶ γῆς καὶ τῶν ἐν τούτοις περιεχομένων φύσεων. Likew. Posidonius in Diog. L. 7, 138; Ps.-Aristot., De Mundo 2 p. 391b, 9ff; 2 and 4 Macc; Wsd; EpArist 254; Philo, Aet. M. 4; Jos., Ant. 1, 21; Test12Patr; SibOr 7, 123; AssMos Fgm. b Denis [=Tromp p. 272]; Just., A I, 20, 2 al.; Ath. 19, 2 al.; Orig., C. Cels. 4, 68, 14; Did., Gen. 36, 7; 137, 13.—The other philosoph. usage, in which κ. denotes the heaven in contrast to the earth, is prob. without mng. for our lit. [unless perh. Phil 2:15 κ.=‘sky’?]). ἡ ἀέναος τοῦ κ. σύστασις the everlasting constitution of the universe 1 Cl 60:1 (cp. OGI 56, 48 εἰς τὸν ἀέναον κ.). Sustained by four elements Hv 3, 13, 3. πρὸ τοῦ τὸν κ. εἶναι before the world existed J 17:5. ἀπὸ καταβολῆς [κόσμου] from the beginning of the world Mt 13:35; 25:34; Lk 11:50; Hb 4:3; 9:26; Rv 13:8; 17:8. Also ἀπʼ ἀρχῆς κ. Mt 24:21 or ἀπὸ κτίσεως κ. Ro 1:20.—B 5:5 ἀπὸ καταβ. κ. evidently means at the foundation of the world (s. Windisch, Hdb. ad loc.). πρὸ καταβολῆς κ. before the foundation of the world J 17:24; Eph 1:4; 1 Pt 1:20 (on the uses w. καταβολή s. that word, 1). οὐδὲν εἴδωλον ἐν κ. no idol has any real existence in the universe (Twentieth Century NT) 1 Cor 8:4. Of the creation in its entirety 3:22. ὁ κόσμος ὅλος = πᾶσα ἡ κτίσις (Sallust. 21 p. 36, 13; TestSol 5:7; TestJob 33:4) Hs 9, 2, 1; 9, 14, 5. φωστῆρες ἐν κόσμῳ stars in the universe Phil 2:15 (s. above). Esp. of the universe as created by God (Epict 4, 7, 6 ὁ θεὸς πάντα πεποίηκεν, τὰ ἐν τῷ κόσμῳ καὶ αὐτὸν τὸν κόσμον ὅλον; Wsd 9:9; 2 Macc 7:23 ὁ τοῦ κ. κτίστης; 4 Macc 5:25; Just., A I, 59, 1 al.; Ath. 8, 2 al.) ὁ ποιήσας τὸν κ. who has made the world Ac 17:24. ὁ κτίστης τοῦ σύμπαντος κ. 1 Cl 19:2; ὁ κτίσας τὸν κ. Hv 1, 3, 4; cp. m 12, 4, 2. ὁ τοῦ παντὸς κ. κυριεύων B 21:5. οὐδʼ εἶναι τὸν κόσμον θεοῦ ἀλλὰ ἀγγέλων AcPlCor 1:15. Christ is called παντὸς τοῦ κ. κύριος 5:5; and the κ. owes its origin to his agency J 1:10b. The world was created for the sake of the church Hv 2, 4, 1.—The universe, as the greatest space conceivable, is not able to contain someth. (Philo, Ebr. 32) J 21:25.④ the sum total of all beings above the level of the animals, the world, as θέατρον ἐγενήθημεν (i.e. οἱ ἀπόστολοι) τῷ κόσμῳ καὶ ἀγγέλοις καὶ ἀνθρώποις 1 Cor 4:9. Here the world is divided into angels and humans (cp. the Stoic definition of the κόσμος in Stob., Ecl. I p. 184, 8 τὸ ἐκ θεῶν καὶ ἀνθρώπων σύστημα; likew. Epict 1, 9, 4.—Acc. to Ocellus Luc. 37, end, the κ. consists of the sphere of the divine beyond the moon and the sphere of the earthly on this side of the moon).⑤ planet earth as a place of inhabitation, the world (SIG 814, 31 [67 A.D.] Nero, ὁ τοῦ παντὸς κόσμου κύριος; the meaning of the birthday of Augustus for the world OGI 458, 40 [=IPriene 105]; 2 Macc 3:12; Jos., Ant. 9, 241; 10, 205; Orig., C. Cels. 4, 68)ⓐ gener. Mk 16:15. τὰς βασιλείας τοῦ κ. Mt 4:8; ἐν ὅλῳ τῷ κ. 26:13. Cp. 13:38 (cp. Hs 5, 5, 2); Mk 14:9; Hs 9, 25, 2. τὸ φῶς τοῦ κ. τούτου the light of this world (the sun) J 11:9. In rhetorical exaggeration ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν καταγγέλλεται ἐν ὅλῳ τ. κόσμῳ Ro 1:8 (cp. the Egypt. grave ins APF 5, 1913, 169 no. 24, 8 ὧν ἡ σωφροσύνη κατὰ τὸν κ. λελάληται). Abraham as κληρονόμος κόσμου heir of the world 4:13.—Cp. 1 Cor 14:10; Col 1:6. ἡ ἐν τῷ κ. ἀδελφότης the brotherhood in the (whole) world 1 Pt 5:9. ἐγένετο ἡ βασιλεία τοῦ κ. τοῦ κυρίου ἡμῶν our Lord has assumed the sovereignty of the world Rv 11:15. τὰ ἔθνη τοῦ κ. (not LXX, but prob. rabbinic אֻמּוֹת הָעוֹלָם=humankind apart fr. Israel; Billerb. II 191; Dalman, Worte 144f) the unconverted in the world Lk 12:30. In this line of development, κόσμος alone serves to designate the polytheistic unconverted world Ro 11:12, 15.—Other worlds (lands) beyond the ocean 1 Cl 20:8.—Many of these pass. bear the connotation ofⓑ the world as the habitation of humanity (as SibOr 1, 160). So also Hs 9, 17, 1f. εἰσέρχεσθαι εἰς τὸν κ. of entrance into the world by being born 1 Cl 38:3. ἐκ τοῦ κ. ἐξελθεῖν leave this present world (Philo, Leg. All. 3, 5 ἔξω τ. κόσμου φεύγειν; s. ἐξέρχομαι 5; cp. Hippol., Ref. 5, 16, 7) 1 Cor 5:10b; 2 Cl 8:3. γεννηθῆναι εἰς τὸν κ. be born into the world J 16:21. ἕως ἐσμὲν ἐν τούτῳ τῷ κ. 2 Cl 8:2. οὐδὲν εἰσφέρειν εἰς τὸν κ. (Philo, Spec. Leg. 1, 294 τὸν μηδὲν εἰς τὸν κόσμον εἰσενηνοχότα) 1 Ti 6:7 (Pol 4:1). πολλοὶ πλάνοι ἐξῆλθον εἰς τὸν κ. 2J 7.—ἐν τῷ κόσμω τούτῳ J 12:25 (κ. need not here be understood as an entity hostile to God, but the transition to the nuance in 7b, below, is signalled by the term that follows: ζωὴν αἰώνιον). ἵνα εἰς κόσμον προέλθῃ AcPlCor 2:6.ⓒ earth, world in contrast to heaven (Dio Chrys. 19 [36], 59; Iren., 1, 4, 2 [Harv. I 35, 5]; Orig., C. Cels. 8, 15, 24) ἐν τῷ κόσμῳ τούτῳ 2 Cl 19:3.—Esp. when mention is made of the preexistent Christ, who came fr. another world into the κόσμος. So, above all, in John (Bultmann, index I κόσμος) ἔρχεσθαι εἰς τὸν κ. (τοῦτον) J 6:14; 9:39; 11:27; 16:28a; 18:37; specif. also come into the world as light 12:46; cp. 1:9; 3:19. Sending of Jesus into the world 3:17a; 10:36; 17:18; 1J 4:9. His εἶναι ἐν τῷ κόσμῳ J 1:10a; 9:5a; 17:12 v.l. Leaving the world and returning to the Father 13:1a; 16:28b. Cp. 14:19; 17:11a. His kingship is not ἐκ τοῦ κ. τούτου of this world i.e. not derived from the world or conditioned by its terms and evaluations 18:36ab.—Also Χρ. Ἰησοῦς ἦλθεν εἰς τ. κόσμον 1 Ti 1:15; cp. ἐπιστεύθη ἐν κόσμῳ (opp. ἀνελήμφθη ἐν δόξῃ) 3:16.—εἰσερχόμενος εἰς τὸν κ. Hb 10:5.ⓓ the world outside in contrast to one’s home PtK 3 p. 15, 13; 19.⑥ humanity in general, the world (TestAbr B 8 p. 113, 11 [Stone p. 74]; ApcEsdr 3:6 p. 27, 14; SibOr 1, 189; Just., A I, 39, 3 al.)ⓐ gener. οὐαὶ τῷ κ. ἀπὸ τῶν σκανδάλων woe to humankind because of the things that cause people to sin Mt 18:7; τὸ φῶς τοῦ κ. the light for humanity 5:14; cp. J 8:12; 9:5. ὁ σωτὴρ τοῦ κ. 4:42; 1J 4:14 (this designation is found in inscriptions, esp. oft. of Hadrian [WWeber, Untersuchungen z. Geschichte des Kaisers Hadrianus 1907, 225; 226; 229]).—J 1:29; 3:17b; 17:6.—κρίνειν τὸν κ. (SibOr 4, 184; TestAbr A 13 p. 92, 11 [Stone p. 32]; ApcMos 37) of God, Christ J 12:47a; Ro 3:6; B 4:12; cp. Ro 3:19. Of believers 1 Cor 6:2ab (cp. Sallust. 21 p. 36, 13 the souls of the virtuous, together w. the gods, will rule the whole κόσμος). Of Noah διʼ ἧς (sc. πίστεως) κατέκρινεν τὸν κ. Hb 11:7. ἡ ἁμαρτία εἰς τὸν κ. εἰσῆλθεν Ro 5:12; likew. θάνατος εἰσῆλθεν εἰς τὸν κ. 1 Cl 3:4 (Wsd 2:24; 14:14). Cp. Ro 5:13; 1 Cor 1:27f. περικαθάρματα τοῦ κ. the refuse of humanity 4:13. Of persons before conversion ἄθεοι ἐν τῷ κ. Eph 2:12.—2 Cor 1:12; 5:19; Js 2:5; 1J 2:2; 4:1, 3. ἀρχαῖος κόσμος the people of the ancient world 2 Pt 2:5a; cp. vs. 5b; 3:6. Of pers. of exceptional merit: ὧν οὐκ ἦν ἄξιος ὁ κ. of whom the world was not worthy Hb 11:38.—ὅλος ὁ κ. all the world, everybody Ac 2:47 D; 1 Cl 5:7; cp. ἐν ὅλῳ τῷ κ. 59:2; εἰς ὅλον τὸν κ. Hs 8, 3, 2. Likew. ὁ κόσμος (cp. Philo, De Prov. in Eus., PE 8, 14, 58) ὁ κ. ὀπίσω αὐτοῦ ἀπῆλθεν J 12:19. ταῦτα λαλῶ εἰς τὸν κ. 8:26; ἐν τῷ κ. 17:13; ἐγὼ παρρησίᾳ λελάληκα τῷ κ. 18:20; cp. 7:4; 14:22. ἵνα γνῷ ὁ κ. 14:31; cp. 17:23; ἵνα ὁ κ. πιστεύῃ 17:21.ⓑ of all humanity, but especially of believers, as the object of God’s love J 3:16, 17c; 6:33, 51; 12:47b.⑦ the system of human existence in its many aspects, the worldⓐ as scene of earthly joys, possessions, cares, sufferings (cp. 4 Macc 8:23) τὸν κ. ὅλον κερδῆσαι gain the whole world Mt 16:26; Mk 8:36; Lk 9:25; 2 Cl 6:2 (cp. Procop. Soph., Ep. 137 the whole οἰκουμένη is an unimportant possession compared to ἀρετή). τὰ τερπνὰ τοῦ κ. the delightful things in the world IRo 6:1. οἱ χρώμενοι τὸν κ. ὡς μὴ καταχρώμενοι those who use the world as though they had no use of it or those who deal with the world as having made no deals with it 1 Cor 7:31a. ἔχειν τὸν βίον τοῦ κ. possess worldly goods 1J 3:17. τὰ τοῦ κόσμου the affairs of the world 1 Cor 7:33f; cp. 1J 2:15f. The latter pass. forms an easy transition to the large number of exprs. (esp. in Paul and John) in whichⓑ the world, and everything that belongs to it, appears as that which is hostile to God, i.e. lost in sin, wholly at odds w. anything divine, ruined and depraved (Herm. Wr. 6, 4 [the κόσμος is τὸ πλήρωμα τῆς κακίας]; 13, 1 [ἡ τοῦ κ. ἀπάτη], in Stob. p. 428, 24 Sc.; En 48:7; TestIss 4:6; AscIs 3:25; Hdb., exc. on J 1:10; Bultmann ad loc.—cp. Sotades Maronita [III B.C.] 11 Diehl: the κόσμος is unjust and hostile to great men) IMg 5:2; IRo 2:2. ὁ κόσμος οὗτος this world (in contrast to the heavenly realm) J 8:23; 12:25, 31a; 13:1; 16:11; 18:36; 1J 4:17; 1 Cor 3:19; 5:10a; 7:31b; Hv 4, 3, 2ff; D 10:6; 2 Cl 5:1, 5; (opp. ὁ ἅγιος αἰών) B 10:11. ‘This world’ is ruled by the ἄρχων τοῦ κ. τούτου the prince of this world, the devil J 12:31b; 16:11; without τούτου 14:30. Cp. ὁ κ. ὅλος ἐν τῷ πονηρῷ κεῖται the whole world lies in the power of the evil one 1J 5:19; cp. 4:4; also ὁ αἰὼν τοῦ κ. τούτου Eph 2:2 (s. αἰών 4).—Christians must have nothing to do with this world of sin and separation fr. God: instead of desiring it IRo 7:1, one is to ἄσπιλον ἑαυτὸν τηρεῖν ἀπὸ τοῦ κ. keep oneself untainted by the world Js 1:27. ἀποφεύγειν τὰ μιάσματα τοῦ κ. 2 Pt 2:20; cp. 1:4 (s. ἀποφεύγω 1).—Pol 5:3. ἡ φιλία τοῦ κ. ἔχθρα τ. θεοῦ ἐστιν Js 4:4a; cp. vs. 4b. When such an attitude is taken Christians are naturally hated by the world IRo 3:3; J 15:18, 19ad; 17:14a; 1J 3:13, as their Lord was hated J 7:7; 15:18; cp. 1:10c; 14:17; 16:20.—Also in Paul: God and world in opposition τὸ πνεῦμα τοῦ κ. and τὸ πνεῦμα τὸ ἐκ θεοῦ the spirit of the world and the spirit that comes fr. God 1 Cor 2:12; σοφία τοῦ κ. and σοφία τοῦ θεοῦ 1:20f. ἡ κατὰ θεὸν λύπη and ἡ τοῦ κ. λύπη godly grief and worldly grief 2 Cor 7:10. The world is condemned by God 1 Cor 11:32; yet also the object of the divine plan of salvation 2 Cor 5:19; cp. 1 Cl 7:4; 9:4. A Christian is dead as far as this world is concerned: διʼ οὗ (i.e. Ἰ. Χρ.) ἐμοὶ κ. ἐσταύρωται κἀγὼ κόσμῳ through Christ the world has been crucified for me, and I have been (crucified) to the world Gal 6:14; cp. the question τί ὡς ζῶντες ἐν κ. δογματίζεσθε; Col 2:20b. For στοιχεῖα τοῦ κ. Gal 4:3; Col 2:8, 20a s. στοιχεῖον.—The use of κ. in this sense is even further developed in John. The κ. stands in opposition to God 1J 2:15f and hence is incapable of knowing God J 17:25; cp. 1J 4:5, and excluded fr. Christ’s intercession J 17:9; its views refuted by the Paraclete 16:8. Neither Christ himself 17:14c, 16b; 14:27, nor his own 15:19b; 17:14b, 16a; 1J 3:1 belong in any way to the ‘world’. Rather Christ has chosen them ‘out of the world’ J 15:19c, even though for the present they must still live ‘in the world’ 17:11b; cp. 13:1b; 17:15, 18b. All the trouble that they must undergo because of this, 16:33a, means nothing compared w. the victorious conviction that Christ (and the believers w. him) has overcome ‘the world’ vs. 33b; 1J 5:4f, and that it is doomed to pass away 2:17 (TestJob 33:4; Kephal. I 154, 21: the κόσμος τῆς σαρκός will pass away).⑧ collective aspect of an entity, totality, sum total (SIG 850, 10 τὸν κόσμον τῶν ἔργων (but s. 1 above); Pr 17:6a) ὁ κ. τῆς ἀδικίας ἡ γλῶσσα καθίσταται the tongue becomes (or proves to be) the sum total of iniquity Js 3:6 (so, approx., Meinertz; FHauck.—MDibelius, Windisch and ASchlatter find mng. 7b here, whereas ACarr, Exp. 7th ser., 8, 1909, 318ff thinks of mng. 1). Χρ. τὸν ὑπὲρ τῆς τοῦ παντὸς κόσμου τῶν σῳζομένων σωτηρίας παθόντα Christ, who suffered or died (s. πάσχω 3aα) for the salvation of the sum total of those who are saved MPol 17:2.—FBytomski, D. genet. Entwicklung des Begriffes κόσμος in d. Hl. Schrift: Jahrb. für Philos. und spekul. Theol. 25, 1911, 180–201; 389–413 (only the OT); CSchneider, Pls u. d. Welt: Αγγελος IV ’32, 11–47; EvSchrenck, Der Kosmos-Begriff bei Joh.: Mitteilungen u. Nachrichten f. d. evang. Kirche in Russland 51, 1895, 1–29; RLöwe, Kosmos u. Aion ’35; RBultmann, D. Verständnis v. Welt u. Mensch im NT u. im Griechentum: ThBl 19, ’40, 1–14; GBornkamm, Christus u. die Welt in der urchr. Botschaft: ZTK 47, ’50, 212–26; ALesky, Kosmos ’63; RVölkl, Christ u. Welt nach dem NT ’61; GJohnston, οἰκουμένη and κ. in the NT: NTS 10, ’64, 352–60; NCassem, ibid. 19, ’72/73, 81–91; RBratcher, BT 31, ’80, 430–34.—B. 13; 440. DELG. M-M. EDNT. TW. -
20 υἱός
υἱός, οῦ, ὁ (Hom.+; loanw. in rabb.) prim. ‘son’① a male who is in a kinship relationship either biologically or by legal action, son, offspring, descendantⓐ the direct male issue of a person, son τέξεται υἱόν Mt 1:21; GJs 14:2 (cp. Mel., P. 8, 53 ὡς γὰρ υἱὸς τεχθείς). Cp. Mt 1:23 (Is 7:14) and 25; 10:37 (w. θυγάτηρ); Mk 12:6a; Lk 1:13, 31, 57; 11:11; 15:11 (on this JEngel, Die Parabel v. Verlorenen Sohn: ThGl 18, 1926, 54–64; MFrost, The Prodigal Son: Exp. 9th ser., 2, 1924, 56–60; EBuonaiuti, Religio 11, ’35, 398–402); Ac 7:29; Ro 9:9 (cp. Gen 18:10); Gal 4:22 al. W. gen. Mt 7:9; 20:20f; 21:37ab; Mk 6:3; 9:17; Lk 3:2; 4:22; 15:19; J 9:19f; Ac 13:21; 16:1; 23:16; Gal 4:30abc (Gen 21:10abc); Js 2:21; AcPlCor 2:29. Also ἐγὼ Φαρισαῖός εἰμι υἱὸς Φαρισαίων Ac 23:6 is prob. a ref. to direct descent. μονογενὴς υἱός (s. μονογενής 1) Lk 7:12. ὁ υἱὸς ὁ πρωτότοκος (πρωτότοκος 1) 2:7.ⓑ the immediate male offspring of an animal (Ps 28:1 υἱοὺς κριῶν; Sir 38:25. So Lat. filius: Columella 6, 37, 4) in our lit. only as foal ἐπὶ πῶλον υἱὸν ὑποζυγίου Mt 21:5 (cp. Zech 9:9 πῶλον νέον).ⓒ human offspring in an extended line of descent, descendant, son Ἰωσὴφ υἱὸς Δαυίδ Mt 1:20 (cp. Jos., Ant. 11, 73); s. 2dα below. υἱοὶ Ἰσραήλ (Ἰσραήλ 1) Mt 27:9; Lk 1:16; Ac 5:21; 7:23, 37; 9:15; 10:36; Ro 9:27; 2 Cor 3:7, 13; Hb 11:22 al.; AcPlCor 2:32. οἱ υἱοὶ Λευί (Num 26:57) Hb 7:5. υἱὸς Ἀβραάμ Lk 19:9. υἱοὶ Ἀδάμ 1 Cl 29:2 (Dt 32:8). υἱοι Ῥουβήλ GJs 6:3.ⓓ one who is accepted or legally adopted as a son (Herodian 5, 7, 1; 4; 5; Jos, Ant. 2, 263; 20, 150) Ac 7:21 (cp. Ex 2:10).—J 19:26.② a pers. related or closely associated as if by ties of sonship, son, transf. sense of 1ⓐ of a pupil, follower, or one who is otherw. a spiritual son (SIG 1169, 12 οἱ υἱοὶ τοῦ θεοῦ=the pupils and helpers [40] of Asclepius; sim. Maximus Tyr. 4, 2c; Just., D. 86, 6 οἱ υἱοὶ τῶν προφητῶν.—Some combination w. παῖδες is the favorite designation for those who are heirs of guild-secrets or who are to perpetuate a skill of some kind: Pla., Rep. 3, 407e, Leg. 6, 769b; Dionys. Hal., Comp. Verbi 22 p. 102, 4 Us./Rdm. ῥητόρων παῖδες; Lucian, Anach. 19, Dial. Mort. 11, 1 Χαλδαίων π.=dream-interpreters, Dips. 5 ἱατρῶν π., Amor. 49; Himerius, Or. 48 [=Or. 14], 13 σοφῶν π.): the ‘sons’ of the Pharisees Mt 12:27; Lk 11:19. Peter says Μᾶρκος ὁ υἱός μου 1 Pt 5:13 (perh. w. a component of endearment; s. Μᾶρκος). As a familiar form of address by a cherished mentor Hb 12:5 (Pr 3:11; ParJer 5:28; 7:24). υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες B 1:1.ⓑ of the individual members of a large and coherent group (cp. the υἷες Ἀχαιῶν in Homer; also PsSol 2:3 οἱ υἱοὶ Ἰερουσαλήμ; Dio Chrys. 71 [21], 15; LXX) οἱ υἱοὶ τοῦ λαοῦ μου 1 Cl 8:3 (scripture quot. of unknown origin). υἱοὶ γένους Ἀβραάμ Ac 13:26. οἱ υἱοὶ τῶν ἀνθρώπων (Gen 11:5; Ps 11:2, 9; 44:3; TestLevi 3:10; TestZeb 9:7; GrBar 2:4) the sons of men=humans (cp. dγ below) Mk 3:28; Eph 3:5; 1 Cl 61:2 (of the earthly rulers in contrast to the heavenly king).ⓒ of one whose identity is defined in terms of a relationship with a person or thingα. of those who are bound to a personality by close, non-material ties; it is this personality that has promoted the relationship and given it its character: son(s) of: those who believe are υἱοὶ Ἀβραάμ, because Abr. was the first whose relationship to God was based on faith Gal 3:7. In a special sense the devout, believers, are sons of God, i.e., in the light of the social context, people of special status and privilege (cp. PsSol 17:27; Just., D, 124, 1; Dio Chrys. 58 [75], 8 ὁ τοῦ Διὸς ὄντως υἱός; Epict. 1, 9, 6; 1, 3, 2; 1, 19, 9; Sextus 58; 60; 135; 376a; Dt 14:1; Ps 28:1; 72:15; Is 43:6 [w. θυγατέρες μου]; 45:11; Wsd 2:18; 5:5; 12:21 al.; Jdth 9:4, 13; Esth 8:12q; 3 Macc 6:28; SibOr 3, 702) Mt 5:45; Lk 6:35; Ro 8:14, 19 (‘Redeemer figures’ EFuchs, Die Freiheit des Glaubens, ’49, 108; against him EHommel in ThViat 4, ’52, 118, n. 26); 9:26 (Hos 2:1); 2 Cor 6:18 (w. θυγατέρες, s. Is 43:6 cited above); Gal 3:26 (cp. PsSol 17:27); 4:6a, 7ab (here the υἱός is the κληρονόμος and his opposite is the δοῦλος); Hb 2:10 (JKögel, Der Sohn u. die Söhne: Eine exeget. Studie zu Hb 2:5–18, 1904); 12:5–8 (in vs. 8 opp. νόθος, q.v.); Rv 21:7; 2 Cl 1:4; B 4:9. Corresp. there are sons of the devil (on this subj. cp. Hdb. on J 8:44) υἱὲ διαβόλου Ac 13:10. οἱ υἱοὶ τοῦ πονηροῦ (masc.) Mt 13:38b. τοῦ υἱοῦ τοῦ ἐν Ἅιδου ApcPt Rainer. In υἱοί ἐστε τῶν φονευσάντων τοὺς προφήτας Mt 23:31 this mng. is prob. to be combined w. sense 1c. The expr. υἱοὶ θεοῦ Mt 5:9 looks to the future (s. Betz, SM ad loc.; cp. KKöhler, StKr 91, 1918, 189f). Lk 20:36a signifies a status akin to that of angels (Ps 88:7; θεῶν παῖδες as heavenly beings: Maximus Tyr. 11, 5a; 12a; 13, 6a.—Hierocles 3, 424 the ἄγγελοι are called θεῶν παῖδες; HWindisch, Friedensbringer-Gottessöhne: ZNW 24, 1925, 240–60, discounts connection w. angels and contends for the elevation of the ordinary followers of Jesus to the status of Alexander the Great in his role as an εἰρηνηποιός [cp. Plut., Mor. 329c]; for measured critique of this view s. Betz, SM 137–42.).β. υἱός w. gen. of thing, to denote one who shares in it or who is worthy of it, or who stands in some other close relation to it, oft. made clear by the context; this constr. is prob. a Hebraism in the main, but would not appear barbaric (B-D-F §162, 6; Mlt-H. 441; Dssm., B p. 162–66 [BS 161–66]; PASA II 1884, no. 2 υἱὸς πόλεως [time of Nero; on this type of formulation SEG XXXIX, 1864]; IMagnMai 167, 5; 156, 12) οἱ υἱοὶ τοῦ αἰῶνος τούτου (αἰών 2a) Lk 16:8a (opp. οἱ υἱοί τοῦ φωτός vs. 8b); 20:34. τῆς ἀναστάσεως υἱοί (to Mediterranean publics the functional equivalent of ἀθάνατοι ‘immortals’; cp. ἀνάστασις 2b) 20:36b. υἱοὶ τῆς ἀνομίας (ἀνομία 1; cp. CD 6:15) Hv 3, 6, 1; ApcPt 1:3; τῆς ἀπειθείας (s. ἀπείθεια) Eph 2:2; 5:6; Col 3:6; τῆς ἀπωλείας ApcPt 1:2. ὁ υἱὸς τῆς ἀπωλείας of Judas the informer J 17:12 (cp. similar expressions in Eur., Hec. 425; Menand., Dyscolus 88f: s. FDanker, NTS 7, ’60/61, 94), of the end-time adversary 2 Th 2:3. υἱοὶ τῆς βασιλείας (βασιλεία 1bη; s. SEG XXXIX, 1864 for related expressions) Mt 8:12; 13:38a. υἱοὶ βροντῆς Mk 3:17 (s. Βοανηργές). υἱὸς γεέννης (s. γέεννα) Mt 23:15; τ. διαθήκης (PsSol 17:15) Ac 3:25; εἰρήνης Lk 10:6. υἱοὶ τοῦ νυμφῶνος (s. νυμφών) Mt 9:15; Mk 2:19; Lk 5:34. υἱὸς παρακλήσεως Ac 4:36 (s. Βαρναβᾶς). υἱοὶ (τοῦ) φωτός (Hippol., Ref. 6, 47, 4 in gnostic speculation) Lk 16:8b (opp. υἱοὶ τοῦ αἰῶνος τούτου); J 12:36. υἱοὶ φωτός ἐστε καὶ υἱοὶ ἡμέρας 1 Th 5:5 (EBuonaiuti, ‘Figli del giorno e della luce’ [1 Th 5:5]: Rivista storico-critica delle Scienze teol. 6, 1910, 89–93).ⓓ in various combinations as a designation of the Messiah and a self-designation of Jesusα. υἱὸς Δαυίδ son of David of the Messiah (PsSol 17:21) Mt 22:42–45; Mk 12:35–37; Lk 20:41–44; B 12:10c. Specif. of Jesus as Messiah Mt 1:1a; 9:27; 12:23; 15:22; 20:30f; 21:9, 15; Mk 10:47f; Lk 18:38f.—WWrede, Jesus als Davidssohn: Vorträge u. Studien 1907, 147–77; WBousset, Kyrios Christos2 1921, 4, Rel.3 226f; ELohmeyer, Gottesknecht u. Davidssohn ’45, esp. 68; 72; 77; 84; TNicklin, Gospel Gleanings ’50, 251–56; WMichaelis, Die Davidsohnschaft Jesu usw., in D. histor. Jesus u. d. kerygm. Christus, ed. Ristow and Matthiae, ’61, 317–30; LFisher, ECColwell Festschr. ’68, 82–97.β. ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ θεοῦ, υἱὸς θεοῦ (the) Son of God (for the phrase s. JosAs 6:2 al. Ἰωσὴφ ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ θεοῦ; there is no undisputed evidence of usage as messianic title in pre-Christian Judaism [s. Dalman, Worte 219–24, Eng. tr. 268–89; Bousset, Kyrios Christos2 53f; EHuntress, ‘Son of God’ in Jewish Writings Prior to the Christian Era: JBL 54, ’35, 117–23]; cp. 4Q 246 col. 2, 1 [JFitzmyer, A Wandering Aramean ’79, 90–93; JCollins, BRev IX/3, ’93, 34–38, 57]. Among polytheists on the other hand, sons of the gods in a special sense [s. Just., A I, 21, 1f] are not only known to myth and legend, but definite historical personalities are also designated as such. Among them are famous wise men such as Pythagoras and Plato [HUsener, Das Weihnachtsfest2 1911, 71ff], and deified rulers, above all the Roman emperors since the time of Augustus [oft. in ins and pap: Dssm., B 166f=BS 166f, LO 294f=LAE 346f; Thieme 33]. According to Memnon [I B.C./ I A.D.]: 434 Fgm. 1, 1, 1 Jac., Clearchus [IV B.C.] carried his boasting so far as Διὸς υἱὸν ἑαυτὸν ἀνειπεῖν. Also, persons who were active at that time as prophets and wonder-workers laid claim to the title υἱὸς τοῦ θεοῦ, e.g. the Samaritan Dositheus in Origen, C. Cels. 6, 11; sim. an Indian wise man who calls himself Διὸς υἱός Arrian, Anab. 7, 2, 3; cp. Did., Gen. 213, 18 ὁ Ἀβρὰμ υἱὸς θεοῦ διὰ δικαιοσύνην. S. GWetter, ‘Der Sohn Gottes’ 1916; Hdb. exc. on J 1:34; s. also Clemen2 76ff; ENorden, Die Geburt des Kindes 1924, 75; 91f; 132; 156f; EKlostermann, Hdb. exc. on Mk 1:11 [4th ed. ’50]; M-JLagrange, Les origines du dogme paulinien de la divinité de Christ: RB 45, ’36, 5–33; HPreisker, Ntl. Zeitgesch. ’37, 187–208; HBraun, ZTK 54, ’57, 353–64; ANock, ‘Son of God’ in Paul. and Hellen. Thought: Gnomon 33, ’61, 581–90 [=Essays on Religion and the Anc. World II, ’72, 928–39]—originality in Paul’s thought): Ps 2:7 is applied to Jesus υἱός μου εἶ σύ, ἐγὼ σήμερον γεγέννηκά σε Lk 3:22 D; GEb 18, 37.—Ac 13:33; Hb 1:5a; 5:5; 1 Cl 36:4. Likew. Hos 11:1 (w. significant changes): Mt 2:15, and 2 Km 7:14: Hb 1:5b. The voice of God calls him ὁ υἱός μου ὁ ἀγαπητός (s. ἀγαπητός 1) at his baptism Mt 3:17; Mk 1:11; Lk 3:22; GEb 18, 37 and 39 and at the Transfiguration Mt 17:5; Mk 9:7; Lk 9:35 (here ἐκλελεγμένος instead of ἀγαπ.); 2 Pt 1:17. Cp. J 1:34. The angel at the Annunciation uses these expressions in referring to him: υἱὸς ὑψίστου Lk 1:32; GJs 11:3 and υἱὸς θεοῦ Lk 1:35 (Ar. 15, 1 ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ θεοῦ τοῦ ὑψίστου. Cp. Just., A I, 23, 2 μόνος ἰδίως υἱὸς τῷ θεῷ γεγέννηται). The centurion refers to him at the crucifixion as υἱὸς θεοῦ Mt 27:54; Mk 15:39; GPt 11:45; cp. vs. 46 (CMann, ET 20, 1909, 563f; JPobee, The Cry of the Centurion, A Cry of Defeat: CFDMoule Festschr. ’70, 91–102; EJohnson, JSNT 31, ’87, 3–22 [an indefinite affirmation of Jesus]). The high priest asks εἰ σὺ εἶ ὁ Χριστὸς ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ θεοῦ Mt 26:63 (DCatchpole, NTS 17, ’71, 213–26). Passers-by ask him to show that he is God’s Son 27:40; sim. the devil 4:3, 6; Lk 4:3, 9. On the other hand, evil spirits address him as the Son of God Mt 8:29; Mk 3:11; 5:7; Lk 4:41; 8:28; and disciples testify that he is Mt 14:33; 16:16. S. also Mk 1:1 (s. SLegg, Ev. Sec. Marc. ’35).—Jesus also refers to himself as Son of God, though rarely apart fr. the Fourth Gosp.: Mt 28:19 (the Risen Lord in the trinitarian baptismal formula); Mt 21:37f=Mk 12:6 (an allusion in the parable of the vinedressers).—Mt 27:43; Mk 13:32; Rv 2:18. The main pass. is the so-called Johannine verse in the synoptics Mt 11:27=Lk 10:22 (s. PSchmiedel, PM 4, 1900,1–22; FBurkitt, JTS 12, 1911, 296f; HSchumacher, Die Selbstoffenbarung Jesu bei Mt 11:27 [Lk 10:22] 1912 [lit.]; Norden, Agn. Th. 277–308; JWeiss, Heinrici Festschr. 1914, 120–29, Urchristentum 1917, 87ff; Bousset, Kyrios Christos2 1921, 45ff; EMeyer I 280ff; RBultmann, Gesch. d. synopt. Trad.2 ’31, 171f; MDibelius, Die Formgeschichte des Evangeliums2 ’33, 259; MRist, Is Mt 11:25–30 a Primitive Baptismal Hymn? JR 15, ’35, 63–77; TArvedson, D. Mysterium Christi: E. Studie zu Mt 11:25–30, ’37; WDavies, ‘Knowledge’ in the Dead Sea Scrolls and Mt 11:25–30, HTR 45, ’53, 113–39; WGrundmann, Sohn Gottes, ZNW 47, ’56, 113–33; JBieneck, Sohn Gottes als Christusbez. der Synopt. ’51; PWinter, Mt 11:27 and Lk 10:22: NovT 1, ’56, 112–48; JJocz, Judaica 13, ’57, 129–42; OMichel/OBetz, Von Gott Gezeugt, Beih. ZNW [Jeremias Festschr.] 26, ’60, 3–23 [Qumran]).—Apart fr. the synoptics, testimony to Jesus as the Son of God is found in many parts of our lit. Oft. in Paul: Ro 1:3, 4, 9; 5:10; 8:3, 29, 32; 1 Cor 1:9; 15:28; 2 Cor 1:19; Gal 1:16; 2:20; 4:4; Eph 4:13; Col 1:13; 1 Th 1:10. Cp. Ac 9:20. In Hb: 1:2, 8; 4:14; 5:8; 6:6; 7:3, 28; 10:29. In greatest frequency in John (cp. Herm. Wr. 1, 6 the Λόγος as υἱὸς θεοῦ. Likew. Philo, Agr. 51 πρωτόγονος υἱός, Conf. Lingu. 146 υἱὸς θεοῦ.—Theoph. Ant. 2, 1 [p. 154, 12] ὁ λόγος ὁ τοῦ θεοῦ, ὅς ἐστιν καὶ υἱὸς αὐτοῦ; Iren. 3, 12, 2 [Harv. II 55, 2]): J 1:49; 3:16–18 (s. μονογενής 2), 35f; 5:19–26; 6:40; 8:35f; 10:36; 11:4, 27; 14:13; 17:1; 19:7; 20:31; 1J 1:3, 7; 2:22–24; 3:8, 23; 4:9f, 14f; 5:5, 9–13, 20; 2J 3, 9.—B 5:9, 11; 7:2, 9; 12:8; 15:5; Dg 7:4; 9:2, 4; 10:2 (τὸν υἱὸν αὐτοῦ τὸν μονογενῆ; also ApcEsdr 6:16 p. 31, 22 Tdf.; ApcSed 9:1f); IMg 8:2; ISm 1:1; MPol 17:3; Hv 2, 2, 8; Hs 5, 2, 6 (ὁ υἱὸς αὐτοῦ ὁ ἀγαπητός); 8; 11; 5, 4, 1; 5, 5, 2; 3; 5; 5, 6, 1; 2; 4; 7 (on the Christology of the Shepherd s. Dibelius, Hdb. on Hs 5, also ALink and JvWalter [πνεῦμα 5cα]); Hs 8, 3, 2; 8, 11, 1. Cp. 9, 1, 1; 9, 12, 1ff.—In trinitarian formulas, in addition to Mt 28:19, also IMg 13:1; EpilMosq 5; D 7:1, 3.—The deceiver of the world appears w. signs and wonders ὡς υἱὸς θεοῦ D 16:4 (ApcEsdr 4:27 p. 28, 32 Tdf. ὁ λέγων• Ἐγώ εἰμι ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ θεοῦ [of Antichrist]).—EKühl, Das Selbstbewusstsein Jesu 1907, 16–44; GVos, The Self-disclosure of Jesus 1926.—EBurton, ICC Gal 1921, 404–17; TNicklin, Gospel Gleanings ’50, 211–36; MHengel, The Son of God (tr. JBowden) ’76; DJones, The Title υἱὸς θεοῦ in Acts: SBLSP 24, ’85, 451–63.γ. ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου lit. ‘the son of the man’ (the pl. form οἱ υἱοὶ τῶν ἀνθρώπων appears freq. in the LXX to render בְּנֵי אָדָם = mortals, e.g. Gen 11:5; Ps 10:4; 11:2; cp. ὁ υἱὸς τῆς ἀπολείας J 17:12 [s. 2cβ]) ‘the human being, the human one, the man’ in our lit. only as a byname in ref. to Jesus and in an exclusive sense the Human One, the Human Being, one intimately linked with humanity in its primary aspect of fragility yet transcending it, traditionally rendered ‘the Son of Man.’ The term is found predom. in the gospels, where it occurs in the synoptics about 70 times (about half as oft. if parallels are excluded), and in J 12 times (s. EKlostermann, Hdb. exc. on Mk 8:31). In every case the title is applied by Jesus to himself. Nowhere within a saying or narrative about him is it found in an address to him: Mt 8:20; 9:6; 10:23; 11:19; 12:8, 32, 40; 13:37, 41; 16:13, 27f; 17:9, 12, 22; 18:10 [11] v.l.; 19:28; 20:18, 28; 24:27, 30, 37, 39, 44; 25:13 v.l., 31; 26:2, 24ab, 45, 64; Mk 2:10, 28; 8:31, 38; 9:9, 12, 31; 10:33, 45; 13:26; 14:21ab, 41, 62; Lk 5:24; 6:5, 22; 7:34; 9:22, 26, 44, 56 v.l., 58; 11:30; 12:8, 10, 40; 17:22, 24, 26, 30; 18:8, 31; 19:10; 21:27, 36; 22:22, 48, 69; 24:7.—John (FGrosheide, Υἱὸς τ. ἀνθρ. in het Evang. naar Joh.: TSt 35, 1917, 242–48; HDieckmann, D. Sohn des Menschen im J: Scholastik 2, 1927, 229–47; HWindisch, ZNW 30, ’31, 215–33; 31, ’32, 199–204; WMichaelis, TLZ 85, ’60, 561–78 [Jesus’ earthly presence]) 1:51; 3:13, 14; 5:27 (BVawter, Ezekiel and John, CBQ 26, ’64, 450–58); 6:27, 53, 62; 8:28; 9:35; 12:23, 34; 13:31. Whether the component of fragility (suggested by OT usage in ref. to the brief span of human life and the ills to which it falls heir) or high status (suggested by traditions that appear dependent on Da 7:13, which refers to one ‘like a human being’), or a blend of the two dominates a specific occurrence can be determined only by careful exegesis that in addition to extra-biblical traditions takes account of the total literary structure of the document in which it occurs. Much neglected in the discussion is the probability of prophetic association suggested by the form of address Ezk 2:1 al. (like the OT prophet [Ezk 3:4–11] Jesus encounters resistance).—On Israelite thought contemporary w. Jesus and alleged knowledge of a heavenly being looked upon as a ‘Son of Man’ or ‘Man’, who exercises Messianic functions such as judging the world (metaph., pictorial passages in En 46–48; 4 Esdr 13:3, 51f) s. Bousset, Rel.3 352–55; NMessel, D. Menschensohn in d. Bilderreden d. Hen. 1922; ESjöberg, Kenna 1 Henok och 4 Esra tanken på den lidande Människosonen? Sv. Ex. Årsb. 5, ’40, 163–83, D. Menschensohn im äth. Hen. ’46. This view is in some way connected w. Da 7:13; acc. to some it derives its real content fr. an eschatological tradition that ultimately goes back to Iran (WBousset, Hauptprobleme der Gnosis 1907, 160–223; Reitzenstein, Erlösungsmyst. 119ff, ZNW 20, 1921, 18–22, Mysterienrel.3 418ff; Clemen2 72ff; CKraeling, Anthropos and Son of Man: A Study in the Religious Syncretism of the Hellenistic Orient 1927); acc. to this tradition the First Man was deified; he will return in the last times and usher in the Kingdom of God.—Outside the gospels: Ac 7:56 (v.l. τοῦ θεοῦ; GKilpatrick, TZ 21, ’65, 209); Rv 1:13; 14:14 (both after Da 7:13; sim. allusion to Da in Just., D. 31, 1). The quot. fr. Ps 8:5 in Hb 2:6 prob. does not belong here, since there is no emphasis laid on υἱὸς ἀνθρώπου. In IEph 20:2 Jesus is described as υἱὸς ἀνθρώπου καὶ υἱὸς θεοῦ. Differently B 12:10 Ἰησοῦς, οὐχὶ υἱὸς ἀνθρώπου ἀλλὰ υἱὸς τοῦ θεοῦ Jesus, not a man’s son, but Son of God.—HLietzmann, Der Menschensohn 1896; Dalman, Worte 191–219 (Eng. tr., 234–67); Wlh., Einl.2 123–30; PFiebig, Der Menschensohn 1901; NSchmidt, The Prophet of Nazareth 1905, 94–134, Recent Study of the Term ‘Son of Man’: JBL 45, 1926, 326–49; FTillmann, Der Menschensohn 1907; EKühl, Das Selbstbewusstsein Jesu 1907, 65ff; HHoltzmann, Das messianische Bewusstsein Jesu, 1907, 49–75 (lit.), Ntl. Theologie2 I 1911, 313–35; FBard, D. Sohn d. Menschen 1908; HGottsched, D. Menschensohn 1908; EAbbott, ‘The Son of Man’, etc., 1910; EHertlein, Die Menschensohnfrage im letzten Stadium 1911, ZNW 19, 1920, 46–48; JMoffatt, The Theology of the Gospels 1912, 150–63; WBousset, Kyrios Christos2 1921, 5–22 (the titles of the works by Wernle and Althaus opposing his first edition [1913], as well as Bousset’s answer, are found s.v. κύριος, end); DVölter, Jesus der Menschensohn 1914, Die Menschensohnfrage neu untersucht 1916; FSchulthess, ZNW 21, 1922, 247–50; Rtzst., Herr der Grösse 1919 (see also the works by the same author referred to above in this entry); EMeyer II 335ff; HGressmann, ZKG n.s. 4, 1922, 170ff, D. Messias 1929, 341ff; GDupont, Le Fils d’Homme 1924; APeake, The Messiah and the Son of Man 1924; MWagner, Der Menschensohn: NKZ 36, 1925, 245–78; Guillaume Baldensperger, Le Fils d’Homme: RHPR 5, 1925, 262–73; WBleibtreu, Jesu Selbstbez. als der Menschensohn: StKr 98/99, 1926, 164–211; AvGall, Βασιλεία τοῦ θεοῦ 1926; OProcksch, D. Menschensohn als Gottessohn: Christentum u. Wissensch. 3, 1927, 425–43; 473–81; CMontefiore, The Synoptic Gospels2 1927 I 64–80; ROtto, Reich Gottes u. Menschensohn ’34, Eng. tr. The Kgdm. of God and the Son of Man, tr. Filson and Woolf2 ’43; EWechssler, Hellas im Ev. ’36, 332ff; PParker, The Mng. of ‘Son of Man’: JBL 60, ’41, 151–57; HSharman, Son of Man and Kingdom of God ’43; JCampbell, The Origin and Mng. of the Term Son of Man: JTS 48, ’47, 145–55; HRiesenfeld, Jésus Transfiguré ’47, 307–13 (survey and lit.); TManson, ConNeot 11, ’47, 138–46 (Son of Man=Jesus and his disciples in Mk 2:27f); GDuncan, Jesus, Son of Man ’47, 135–53 (survey); JBowman, ET 59, ’47/48, 283–88 (background); MBlack, ET 60, ’48f, 11–15; 32–36; GKnight, Fr. Moses to Paul ’49, 163–72 (survey); TNicklin, Gospel Gleanings ’50, 237–50; TManson (Da, En and gospels), BJRL 32, ’50, 171–93; TPreiss, Le Fils d’Homme: ÉThR 26/3, ’51, Life in Christ, ’54, 43–60; SMowinckel, He That Cometh, tr. Anderson, ’54, 346–450; GIber, Überlieferungsgesch. Unters. z. Begriff des Menschensohnes im NT, diss. Heidelb. ’53; ESjöberg, D. verborgene Menschensohn in den Ev. ’55; WGrundmann, ZNW 47, ’56, 113–33; HRiesenfeld, The Mythological Backgrd. of NT Christology, CHDodd Festschr. ’56, 81–95; PhVielhauer, Gottesreich u. Menschensohn in d. Verk. Jesu, GDehn Festschr. ’57, 51–79; ESidebottom, The Son of Man in J, ET 68, ’57, 231–35; 280–83; AHiggins, Son of Man- Forschung since (Manson’s) ‘The Teaching of Jesus’: NT Essays (TW Manson memorial vol.) ’59, 119–35; HTödt, D. Menschensohn in d. synopt. Überl. ’59 (tr. Barton ’65); JMuilenburg, JBL 79, ’60, 197–209 (Da, En); ESchweizer, JBL 79, ’60, 119–29 and NTS 9, ’63, 256–61; BvIersel, ‘Der Sohn’ in den synopt. Jesusworten, ’61 (community?); MBlack, BJRL 45, ’63, 305–18; FBorsch, ATR 45, ’63, 174–90; AHiggins, Jesus and the Son of Man, ’64; RFormesyn, NovT 8, ’66, 1–35 (barnasha=‘I’); SSandmel, HSilver Festschr. ’63, 355–67; JJeremias, Die älteste Schicht der Menschensohn-Logien, ZNW 58, ’67, 159–72; GVermes, MBlack, Aram. Approach3, ’67, 310–30; BLindars, The New Look on the Son of Man: BJRL 63, ’81, 437–62; WWalker, The Son of Man, Some Recent Developments CBQ 45, ’83, 584–607; JDonahue, Recent Studies on the Origin of ‘Son of Man’ in the Gospels, CBQ 48, ’86, 584–607; DBurkitt, The Nontitular Son of Man, A History and Critique: NTS 40, ’94 504–21 (lit.); JEllington, BT 40, ’89, 201–8; RGordon, Anthropos: 108–13.—B. 105; DELG. M-M. EDNT. TW. Sv.
Страницы
- 1
- 2
См. также в других словарях:
Lord Chancellor — For other uses, see Lord Chancellor (disambiguation). Not to be confused with the Chancellor of the Exchequer. Lord High Chancellor of Great Britain … Wikipedia
Lord of Light — This article is about the book by Roger Zelazny. For the song by Hawkwind, see Doremi Fasol Latido. For the song by Iron Maiden, see A Matter of Life and Death (album). Lord of Light … Wikipedia
Lord High Steward of Ireland — The Lord High Steward of Ireland is a hereditary Great Officer of State in Ireland, sometimes known as the Hereditary Great Seneschal [In an inscription on a leaden coffin for the remains of Gilbert, 7th Earl of Shrewsbury (died May 1616), in the … Wikipedia
Lord — For other uses, see Lord (disambiguation). Lordship redirects here. For other uses, see Lordship (disambiguation). Queen Elizabeth II, Lord of Mann Lord is a title with various meanings. It can denote a prince or a feu … Wikipedia
Lord's Day — See also: Sabbath in Christianity Contents 1 Textual tradition 1.1 Ambiguous references 1.2 U … Wikipedia
Lord's Prayer — For alternative meanings, see: Lord s Prayer (disambiguation), Our Father (disambiguation), and Pater Noster (disambiguation). The Sermon on the Mount by Carl Heinrich Bloch The Lord s Prayer (also called the Pater Noster[1] … Wikipedia
Great Fire of Smyrna — Great Fire of Smyrna, 14 September 1922 The Great Fire of Smyrna or the Catastrophe of Smyrna[1][2][3] (Greek: Καταστροφή της Σμύρνης, Turkish … Wikipedia
Great Moravia — 833[Note 1] – 902 … Wikipedia
Lord's Prayer — • Although the Latin term oratio dominica is of early date, the phrase Lord s Prayer does not seem to have been generally familiar in England before the Reformation. During the Middle Ages the Our Father was always said in Latin, even by the… … Catholic encyclopedia
Lord Uxbridge's leg — Lord Uxbridge with both of his legs Lord Uxbridge s leg was shattered by a cannon shot at the Battle of Waterloo and removed by a surgeon.[1][2] The amputated limb went on to lead a somewhat macab … Wikipedia
Lord of Mann — Monarchy … Wikipedia
